FLAVIN DERIVATIVES

Abstract
The present invention relates novel flavin derivatives, their use and compositions for use as riboswitch ligands and/or anti-infectives.
Description
TECHNICAL FIELD

The present invention relates to flavin derivatives and their use and compositions for use as riboswitch ligands and/or anti-infectives.


BACKGROUND OF THE INVENTION

The fast growing rate of antibiotic resistance over the past decades has raised serious concerns that the antibiotic treatment options currently available will soon be ineffective. With the widespread usage of antibiotics in combination with the rapid growing rate of bacterial resistance in stark contrast with the decade-old chemical scaffolds available for their treatment, it is imperative that new drugs are developed in the battle against bacterial pathogens.


In many bacteria and fungi, RNA structures termed riboswitches regulate the expression of various genes crucial for survival or virulence. Typically located within the 5′-untranslated region (5′-UTR) of certain mRNAs, members of each known class of riboswitch can fold into a distinct, three-dimensionally structured receptor that recognizes a specific organic metabolite. When the cognate metabolite is present at sufficiently high concentrations during transcription of the mRNA, the riboswitch receptor binds to the metabolite and induces a structural change in the nascent mRNA that prevents expression of the open reading frame (ORF), thereby altering gene expression. In the absence of the cognate metabolite, the riboswitch folds into a structure that does not interfere with the expression of the ORF.


Sixteen different classes of riboswitches have been reported. Members of each class of riboswitch bind to the same metabolite and share a highly conserved sequence and secondary structure. Riboswitch motifs have been identified that bind to thiamine pyrophosphate (TPP), flavin mononucleotide (FMN), glycine, guanine, 3′-5′-cyclic eiguanylic acid (c-di-GMP), molybdenum cofactor, glucosamine-6-phosphate (GlcN6P), lysine, adenine, and adocobalamin (AdoCbl) riboswitches. Additionally, four dinstinct riboswitch motifs have been identified that recognize S-adenosylmethionine (SAM) I, II and III, IV and two distinct motifs that recognize pre-queosine-1 (PreQ1). Several antimetabolite ligands have also been identified that bind to known riboswitch classes, including pyrithiamine pyrophosphate (PTPP) which binds TPP riboswitches, L-aminoethylcysteine (AEC) and DL-4-oxalysine which bind to lysine riboswitches and roseoflavin and FMN which bind to FMN riboswitches. The riboswitch-receptors bind to their respective ligands in an interface that approaches the level of complexity and selectivity of proteins. This highly specific interaction allows riboswitches to discriminate against most intimately related analogs of ligands. For instance, the receptor of a guanine-binding riboswitch from Bacillus subtilis forms a three-dimensional structure such that the ligand is almost completely enveloped. The guanine is positioned between two aromatic bases and each polar functional group of the guanine hydrogen bonds with four additional riboswitch nucleotides surrounding it. This level of specificity allows the riboswitch to discriminate against most closely related purine analogs. Similarly, studies of the SAM-binding riboswitches reveal that nearly every functional group of SAM is critical in binding the ligands, allowing it to discriminate highly similar compounds such as S-adenosylhomocysteine (SAH) and S-adenosylmethionine (SAM), which only differ by a single methyl group. Likewise, TPP riboswitches comprise one subdomain that recognizes every polar functional group of the 4-amino-5-hydroxymethyl-2-methylpyrimidine (HMP) moiety, albeit not the thiazole moiety, and another subdomain that coordinates two metal ions and several water molecules to bind the negatively charged pyrophosphate moiety of the ligand. Similar to TPP, guanine and SAM riboswitches, FMN riboswitches form receptor structures that are highly specific for the natural metabolite FMN. It is by this highly specific interaction that allows for the design of small molecules for the regulation of specific genes.


FMN riboswitches are of particular interest of this invention because it is believed that the riboswitch binds to flavin mono-nucleotide (FMN) and represses the expression of enzymes responsible for riboflavin and FMN biosynthesis. Riboflavin is a water-soluble vitamin that is converted by flavokinases and FAD synthases to co-factors FMN and FAD, which are indispensable cofactors involved in energy metabolism and metabolism of fats, ketones, carbohydrates and proteins crucial for all living organisms. Although vertebrates rely on uptake of vitamin from their gut for riboflavin sources, most prokaryotes, fungi and plants synthesize the necessary riboflavin for survival. It is therefore suggested that compounds that are selective for FMN riboswitch may be useful targets against bacterial pathogens in shutting down biosynthesis of riboflavin crucial for survival or virulence. In addition, no examples of the FMN, TPP, nor any other riboswitch class have presently been identified in humans. Therefore, riboswitches appear to offer the potential for the discovery of selective antipathogenic drugs. It is therefore the objective of this invention to provide novel flavin derivatives for targeting FMN riboswitch and methods of treating infections comprising administering flavin derivatives. Flavin derivatives that target FMN riboswitch are generically disclosed in PCT/US2009/004576 and PCT/US2010/001876, the contents of which are incorporated by reference in their entirety. The current application provides further flavin derivatives that target the FMN and/or the CD3299 riboswitch and/or are active against various bacterial strains.


SUMMARY OF THE INVENTION

The invention relates to a compound of Formula P:




embedded image


wherein:

    • (i) Alk is C1-6alkylene (e.g., C2-5alkylene, for example ethylene i.e., —CH2CH2—, n-propylene, i.e., —CH2CH2CH2—, n-butylene, e.g., —CH2CH2CH2CH2— or n-pentylene, i.e., —CH2CH2CH2CH2CH2—) optionally substituted with one or more C1-4alkyl (e.g., methyl, ethyl or isobutyl), arylC1-4alkyl (e.g., benzyl) and/or —N(Rc)(Rd); or
      • Alk is C1-6alkylene (e.g., C2-5alkylene, for example n-propylene, i.e., —CH2CH2CH2—, n-butylene, i.e., —CH2CH2CH2CH2— or n-pentylene, i.e., —CH2CH2CH2CH2CH2—) optionally substituted with one hydroxy or C1-4alkoxy (e.g., methoxy, ethoxy, propoxy, isobutoxy or isopropyloxy) group; and
    • (ii) X is a single bond, —S—, —S(O)2—, —S(O)— or —O—;
    • (iii) A is aryl (e.g., phenyl or naphthyl) or aryl-C1-4alkyl (e.g., benzyl or naphthylmethyl), wherein the aryl group of said aryl or arylalkyl is optionally substituted with one or more
      • C1-4alkyl (e.g., methyl, ethyl, t-butyl or n-prop-2-en-1-yl),
      • C1-4alkoxy (e.g., methoxy),
      • hydroxy,
      • —O—C1-4alkyl-N(Rc)(Rd), for example —OCH2CH2N(CH3)2,
      • halo (e.g., Cl, F),
      • haloC1-4alkyl (e.g., CF3),
      • —O-haloC1-4alkyl (e.g., —OCF3),
      • cyano,
      • —O—(CH2CH2O)1-3—C1-4alkyl (e.g., —OCH2CH2OCH3 or —O(CH2CH2O)3CH3), and/or
      • —CH2-heteroC3-8cycloalkyl wherein said cycloalkyl is optionally substituted with one or more C1-4alkyl (e.g., methyl), for example, [2,6-dimethylmorpholin-4-yl]methyl, e.g. [(2R,6S)-2,6-dimethylmorpholin-4-yl]methyl) or [(2R,6R)-2,6-dimethylmorpholin-4-yl]methyl);
    • (iv) R1 is:
      • H,
      • C1-6alkyl, e.g., C1-4alkyl (for example, methyl, ethyl, n-propyl, isopropyl, isobutyl, t-butyl, 1-methylpropyl or n-hexyl),
      • C3-8cycloalkyl (e.g., cyclopropyl or cyclopentyl),
      • aryl (e.g., phenyl), or
      • C1-4alkoxy (e.g., methoxy);
    • (v) R2 is:
      • H,
      • C1-6alkyl, e.g., C1-4alkyl (for example, methyl, ethyl, n-propyl, isopropyl, n-prop-2-en-1-yl, n-butyl, isobutyl, n-but-2-en-1-yl, n-hexyl),
      • —C0-4alkyl-C3-8cycloalkyl (e.g., cyclopropyl),
      • —C1-4alkyl-heteroC3-8cycloalkyl, wherein said heterocycloalkyl is optionally substituted with one or more hydroxy and/or C1-4alkyl (e.g., methyl) groups, for example, [2,6-dimethylmorpholin-4-yl]methyl,
      • —C0-4alkyl-N(Ra)(Rb), for example —C0alkyl-N(Ra)(Rb) or —C1alkyl-N(Ra)(Rb),
      • C1-4alkoxy (e.g., methoxy),
      • halo (e.g., Cl),
      • —O—(CH2CH2O)1-3—C1-4alkyl (e.g., —OCH2CH2OCH3 or —O(CH2CH2O)3CH3),
      • —N(Re)—C(O)—C1-4alkyl (e.g., —N(H)—C(O)—CH3, —N(H)—C(O)—CH2CH3 or —N(H)—C(O)—C(H)(CH3)CH3),
      • —N(Re)—C(O)—O—C1-4alkyl (e.g., —N(H)—C(O)—O—C(H)(CH3)CH3),
      • —N(Re)—C(O)-aryl wherein said aryl is optionally substituted with one or more halo (e.g., F), for example —N(H)—C(O)-(4-fluorophenyl),
      • —C1-6alkyl-OC1-4alkyl (e.g., —CH2CH2CH2CH2—O—CH3),
      • —O—CH2CH2—O—CH2-phenyl,
      • —O-haloC1-4alkyl (e.g., —OCH2CF3),
      • —CH2—O—C(O)—C1-4alkyl (e.g., —CH2—O—C(O)—CH3),
      • —C(O)O—C1-4alkyl (e.g., —C(O)OCH3), or
      • C3-8heterocycloalkyl (e.g., pyrrolidinyl, for example pyrrolidin-1-yl) wherein said heterocycloalkyl is optionally substituted with one or more hydroxy, for example 3-hydroxypyrrolidin-1-yl; or
    • (vi) Optionally, R1 and R2 are linked together so that together with the carbon atoms to which they are attached they form a cyclic structure (e.g., R1 and R2 are linked together to form ethylenedioxy);
    • (vii) Optionally, R2 and A may be linked together so that together with the carbon atoms to which they are attached they form a cyclic structure (e.g., R2 and A are linked together to form, e.g., 14-methyl-1,17,20,22-tetraazapentacyclo[11.10.2.25,8.016,24.018,23]heptacosa-5,7,10,13(25),14,16(24),17,22,26-nonaene-19,21-dione or 14-methyl-1,17,20,22-tetraazapentacyclo[11.10.2.25,8.016,24.018,23]heptacosa-5,7,13(25),14,16(24),17,22,26-octaene-19,21-dione;
    • (viii) Ra and Rb are independently:
      • H,
      • C1-4alkyl (e.g., methyl) optionally substituted with one or more hydroxy groups for example, 2,3-dihydroxyprop-1-yl,
      • C3-8cycloalkyl (e.g., cyclopropyl or cyclopentyl),
      • C1-4alkoxy-C1-4alkyl (e.g., methoxyethyl),
      • hydroxy-C1-4alkyl (e.g., hydroxyethyl),
      • N(Rc)(Rd)—C1-4alkyl (e.g., dimethylaminoethyl);
    • (ix) Rc and Rd are independently H, C1-4alkyl (e.g., methyl) or arylC1-4alkyl (e.g., benzyl);
    • (x) R3 and R4 are independently H or C1-4alkyl (e.g., methyl);
    • (xi) Re is H or C1-4alkyl,


      in free or salt form.


The invention relates to a compound of Formula Q:




embedded image


wherein:

    • (i) Alk is C1-6alkylene (e.g., C2-5alkylene, for example ethylene i.e., —CH2CH2—, n-propylene, i.e., —CH2CH2CH2—, n-butylene, e.g., —CH2CH2CH2CH2— or n-pentylene, i.e., —CH2CH2CH2CH2CH2—) optionally substituted with one or more C1-4alkyl (e.g., methyl or isobutyl) and/or —N(Rc)(Rd); or
      • Alk is C1-6alkylene (e.g., C2-5alkylene, for example n-propylene, i.e., —CH2CH2CH2—, n-butylene, i.e., —CH2CH2CH2CH2— or n-pentylene, i.e., —CH2CH2CH2CH2CH2—) optionally substituted with one hydroxy or C1-4-alkoxy (e.g., methoxy, ethoxy or isopropyloxy) group; and
    • (ii) X is a single bond, —S—, —S(O)2—, —S(O)— or —O—;
    • (iii) A is aryl (e.g., phenyl or naphthyl) or aryl-C1-4alkyl (e.g., benzyl or naphthylmethyl), wherein the aryl group of said aryl or arylalkyl is optionally substituted with one or more
      • C1-4alkyl (e.g., methyl, t-butyl or n-prop-2-en-1-yl),
      • C1-4alkoxy (e.g., methoxy),
      • hydroxy,
      • —O—C1-4alkyl-N(Rc)(Rd), for example —OCH2CH2N(CH3)2,
      • halo (e.g., Cl, F),
      • haloC1-4alkyl (e.g., CF3),
      • —O-haloC1-4alkyl (e.g., —OCF3),
      • cyano,
      • —O—(CH2CH2O)1-3—C1-4alkyl (e.g., —OCH2CH2OCH3 or —O(CH2CH2O)3CH3), and/or
      • —CH2-heteroC3-8cycloalkyl wherein said cycloalkyl is optionally substituted with one or more C1-4alkyl (e.g., methyl), for example, [2,6-dimethylmorpholin-4-yl]methyl, e.g. [(2R,6S)-2,6-dimethylmorpholin-4-yl]methyl) or [(2R,6R)-2,6-dimethylmorpholin-4-yl]methyl);
    • (iv) R1 is:
      • H,
      • C1-6alkyl, e.g., C1-4alkyl (for example, methyl, ethyl, n-propyl, isopropyl, isobutyl, t-butyl, 1-methylpropyl or n-hexyl),
      • C3-8cycloalkyl (e.g., cyclopropyl),
      • aryl (e.g., phenyl), or
      • C1-4alkoxy (e.g., methoxy);
    • (v) R2 is:
      • H,
      • C1-6alkyl, e.g., C1-4alkyl (for example, methyl, ethyl, n-propyl, isopropyl, n-prop-2-en-1-yl, n-butyl, isobutyl, n-but-2-en-1-yl, n-hexyl),
      • —C0-4alkyl-C3-8cycloalkyl (e.g., cyclopropyl),
      • —C1-4alkyl-heteroC3-8cycloalkyl, wherein said heterocycloalkyl is optionally substituted with one or more hydroxy and/or C1-4alkyl (e.g., methyl) groups, for example, [2,6-dimethylmorpholin-4-yl]methyl,
      • —C0-4alkyl-N(Ra)(Rb), for example —C0alkyl-N(Ra)(Rb) or —C1alkyl-N(Ra)(Rb),
      • C1-4alkoxy (e.g., methoxy),
      • halo (e.g., Cl),
      • —O—(CH2CH2O)1-3—C1-4alkyl (e.g., —OCH2CH2OCH3 or —O(CH2CH2O)3CH3),
      • —N(Re)—C(O)—C1-4alkyl (e.g., —N(H)—C(O)—CH3, —N(H)—C(O)—CH2CH3 or —N(H)—C(O)—C(H)(CH3)CH3),
      • —N(Re)—C(O)—O—C1-4alkyl (e.g., —N(H)—C(O)—O—C(H)(CH3)CH3),
      • —N(Re)—C(O)-aryl wherein said aryl is optionally substituted with one or more halo (e.g., F), for example —N(H)—C(O)-(4-fluorophenyl),
      • —C1-6alkyl-OC1-4alkyl (e.g., —CH2CH2CH2CH2—O—CH3),
      • —O—CH2CH2—O—CH2-phenyl,
      • —O-haloC1-4alkyl (e.g., —OCH2CF3),
      • —CH2—O—C(O)—C1-4alkyl (e.g., —CH2—O—C(O)—CH3),
      • —C(O)O—C1-4alkyl (e.g., —C(O)OCH3), or
      • C3-8heterocycloalkyl (e.g., pyrrolidinyl, for example pyrrolidin-1-yl) wherein said heterocycloalkyl is optionally substituted with one or more hydroxy, for example 3-hydroxypyrrolidin-1-yl; or
    • (vi) Optionally, R1 and R2 are linked together so that together with the carbon atoms to which they are attached they form a cyclic structure (e.g., R1 and R2 are linked together to form ethylenedioxy);
    • (vii) Optionally, R2 and A may be linked together so that together with the carbon atoms to which they are attached they form a cyclic structure (e.g., R2 and A are linked together to form, e.g., 14-methyl-1,17,20,22-tetraazapentacyclo[11.10.2.25,8.016,24.018,23]heptacosa-5,7,10,13(25),14,16(24),17,22,26-nonaene-19,21-dione or 14-methyl-1,17,20,22-tetraazapentacyclo[11.10.2.25,8.016,24.018,23]heptacosa-5,7,13(25),14,16(24),17,22,26-octaene-19,21-dione;
    • (viii) Ra and Rb are independently:
      • H,
      • C1-4alkyl (e.g., methyl) optionally substituted with one or more hydroxy groups for example, 2,3-dihydroxyprop-1-yl,
      • C3-8cycloalkyl (e.g., cyclopropyl or cyclopentyl),
      • C1-4 alkoxy-C1-4alkyl (e.g., methoxyethyl),
      • hydroxy-C1-4 alkyl (e.g., hydroxyethyl),
      • N(Rc)(Rd)—C1-4alkyl (e.g., dimethylaminoethyl);
    • (ix) Rc and Rd are independently H, C1-4alkyl (e.g., methyl) or arylC1-4alkyl (e.g., benzyl);
    • (x) R3 and R4 are independently H or C1-4alkyl (e.g., methyl);
    • (xi) Re is H or C1-4alkyl,


      in free or salt form.


In a further embodiment, the invention relates to a compound of Formula I:




embedded image


wherein:

    • (i) Alk is C1-4alkylene (e.g., ethylene, n-propylene, n-butylene, n-pentylene) optionally substituted with one or more C1-4alkyl, —N(Rc)(Rd); or
      • Alk is C1-6alkylene (e.g., n-propylene, n-butylene, n-pentylene) optionally substituted with one hydroxy or C1-4alkoxy group;
    • (ii) X is a single bond, —S— or —O—;
    • (iii) A is aryl (e.g., phenyl) or aryl-C1-4alkyl (e.g., benzyl), wherein the aryl group of said aryl or arylalkyl is optionally substituted with one or more C1-4alkyl (e.g., methyl), C1-4alkoxy (e.g., methoxy), hydroxy, —O—C1-4alkyl-N(Rc)(Rd), halo (e.g., Cl, F), haloC1-4alkyl (e.g., CF3), —O-haloC1-4alkyl (e.g., —OCF3);
    • (iv) R1 is H, C1-4alkyl (e.g., methyl) or C1-4alkoxy (e.g., methoxy);
    • (v) R2 is H, C1-4alkyl (e.g., methyl), —C0-4alkyl-C3-8cycloalkyl (e.g., cyclopropyl), —C1-4alkyl-N(Ra)(Rb), C1-4alkoxy (e.g., methoxy), halo (e.g., Cl), or C3-8heterocycloalkyl (e.g., pyrrolidinyl, for example pyrrolidin-1-yl)
      • wherein said heterocycloalkyl is optionally substituted with one or more hydroxy; or
    • (vi) Optionally, R1 and R2 are linked together so that together with the carbon atoms to which they are attached they form a cyclic structure (e.g., R1 and R2 are linked together to form ethylenedioxy);
    • (vii) Ra and Rb are independently H, C1-4alkyl (e.g., methyl), C3-8cycloalkyl (e.g., cyclopropyl, cyclopentyl), C1-4alkoxy-C1-4alkyl (e.g., methoxyethyl), hydroxy-C1-4alkyl (e.g., hydroxyethyl), N(Rc)(Rd)—C1-4alkyl (e.g., dimethylaminoethyl);
    • (viii) Rc and Rd are independently H or C1-4alkyl (e.g., methyl);


      in free or salt form.


The invention further relates to a compound of Formula P as described in the following formulae:

    • P.1. The compound of Formula P wherein;
      • (i) Alk is C1-6alkylene (e.g., C2-5alkylene, for example ethylene, i.e., CH2CH2—, n-propylene, i.e., —CH2CH2CH2—, n-butylene, i.e., —CH2CH2CH2CH2—, or n-pentylene, i.e., —CH2CH2CH2CH2CH2—) optionally substituted with one or more C1-4alkyl (e.g., methyl, ethyl or isobutyl), arylC1-4alkyl (e.g., benzyl) and/or —N(Rc)(Rd); or
        • Alk is C1-6alkylene (e.g., C2-5alkylene, for example n-propylene, i.e., —CH2CH2CH2—, n-butylene, i.e., —CH2CH2CH2CH2—, or n-pentylene, i.e., —CH2CH2CH2CH2CH2—) optionally substituted with one hydroxy or C1-4alkoxy (e.g., methoxy, ethoxy, propoxy, isobutoxy or isopropyloxy) group;
      • (ii) X is a single bond, —S—, —S(O)2—, —S(O)— or —O—;
      • (iii) A is aryl (e.g., phenyl or naphthyl) or aryl-C1-4 alkyl (e.g., benzyl or naphthylmethyl), wherein the aryl group of said aryl or arylalkyl is optionally substituted with one or more
        • C1-4alkyl (e.g., methyl, ethyl, t-butyl or n-prop-2-en-1-yl),
        • C1-4alkoxy (e.g., methoxy),
        • hydroxy,
        • —O—C1-4alkyl-N(Rc)(Rd), for example —
        • OCH2CH2N(CH3)2,
        • halo (e.g., Cl, F),
        • haloC1-4alkyl (e.g., CF3),
        • —O-haloC1-4alkyl (e.g., —OCF3),
        • cyano,
        • —O—(CH2CH2O)1-3—C1-4alkyl (e.g., —OCH2CH2OCH3 or —O(CH2CH2O)3CH3), and/or
        • —CH2-heteroC3-8cycloalkyl wherein said cycloalkyl is optionally substituted with one or more C1-4alkyl (e.g., methyl), for example, [2,6-dimethylmorpholin-4-yl]methyl, e.g. [(2R,6S)-2,6-dimethylmorpholin-4-yl]methyl);
      • (iv) R1 is:
        • H,
        • C1-6alkyl, e.g., C1-4alkyl (for example, methyl, ethyl, n-propyl, isopropyl, isobutyl, t-butyl, 1-methylpropyl or n-hexyl),
        • C3-8cycloalkyl (e.g., cyclopropyl or cyclopentyl), aryl (e.g., phenyl), or
        • C1-4alkoxy (e.g., methoxy);
      • (v) R2 is:
        • H,
        • C1-6alkyl, e.g., C1-4alkyl (for example, methyl, ethyl, n-propyl, isopropyl, n-prop-2-en-1-yl, n-butyl, isobutyl, n-but-2-en-1-yl, n-hexyl),
        • —C0-4alkyl-C3-8cycloalkyl (e.g., cyclopropyl),
        • —C1-4alkyl-heteroC3-8cycloalkyl, wherein said heterocycloalkyl is optionally substituted with one or more hydroxy and/or C1-4alkyl (e.g., methyl) groups, for example, [2,6-dimethylmorpholin-4-yl]methyl,
        • —C0-4alkyl-N(Ra)(Rb), for example —C0alkyl-N(Ra)(Rb) or
        • —C1alkyl-N(Ra)(Rb),
        • C1-4alkoxy (e.g., methoxy),
        • halo (e.g., Cl),
        • —O—(CH2CH2O)1-3—C1-4alkyl (e.g., —OCH2CH2OCH3 or —O(CH2CH2O)3CH3),
        • —N(Re)—C(O)—C1-4alkyl (e.g., —N(H)—C(O)—CH3, —N(H)—C(O)—CH2CH3 or —N(H)—C(O)—C(H)(CH3)CH3),
        • —N(Re)—C(O)—O—C1-4alkyl (e.g., —N(H)—C(O)—C(H)(CH3)CH3),
        • —N(Re)—C(O)-aryl wherein said aryl is optionally substituted with one or more halo (e.g., F), for example —N(H)—C(O)-(4-fluorophenyl),
        • —C1-6alkyl-OC1-4alkyl (e.g., —CH2CH2CH2CH2—O—CH3),
        • —O—CH2CH2—O—CH2-phenyl,
        • —O-haloC1-4alkyl (e.g., —OCH2CF3),
        • —CH2—O—C(O)—C1-4alkyl (e.g., —CH2—O—C(O)—CH3),
        • —C(O)O—C1-4alkyl (e.g., —C(O)OCH3), or
        • C3-8heterocycloalkyl (e.g., pyrrolidinyl, for example pyrrolidin-1-yl) wherein said heterocycloalkyl is optionally substituted with one or more hydroxy, for example 3-hydroxypyrrolidin-1-yl; or
      • (vi) Optionally, R1 and R2 are linked together so that together with the carbon atoms to which they are attached they form a cyclic structure (e.g., R1 and R2 are linked together to form ethylenedioxy);
      • (vii) Ra and Rb are independently:
        • H,
        • C1-4alkyl (e.g., methyl) optionally substituted with one or more hydroxy groups for example, 2,3-dihydroxyprop-1-yl,
        • C3-8cycloalkyl (e.g., cyclopropyl or cyclopentyl),
        • C1-4alkoxy-C1-4alkyl (e.g., methoxyethyl),
        • hydroxy-C1-4alkyl (e.g., hydroxyethyl),
        • N(Rc)(Rd)—C1-4alkyl (e.g., dimethylaminoethyl);
      • (viii) Rc and Rd are independently H, C1-4alkyl (e.g., methyl) or arylC1-4alkyl (e.g., benzyl);
      • (ix) R3 and R4 are independently H or C1-4alkyl (e.g., methyl);
      • (x) Re is H or C1-4alkyl;
    • P.2. the compound of formula P or P.1, wherein R2 is:
      • H,
      • C1-6alkyl, e.g., C1-4alkyl (for example, methyl, ethyl, n-propyl, isopropyl, n-prop-2-en-1-yl, n-butyl, isobutyl, n-but-2-en-1-yl, n-hexyl),
      • —C0-4alkyl-C3-8cycloalkyl (e.g., cyclopropyl),
      • —C1-4alkyl-heteroC3-8cycloalkyl, wherein said heterocycloalkyl is optionally substituted with one or more hydroxy and/or C1-4alkyl (e.g., methyl) groups, for example, [2,6-dimethylmorpholin-4-yl]methyl,
      • —C0-1alkyl-N(Ra)(Rb), wherein Ra is H and Rb is C1-4alkoxy-C1-4alkyl (e.g., methoxyethyl) or both Ra and Rb are methyl,
      • C1-4alkoxy (e.g., methoxy),
      • halo (e.g., Cl),
      • —C1-6alkyl-OC1-4alkyl (e.g., —CH2CH2CH2CH2—O—CH3),
      • —O-haloC1-4alkyl (e.g., —OCH2CF3),
      • —CH2—O—C(O)—C1-4alkyl (e.g., —CH2—O—C(O)—CH3),
      • —C(O)O—C1-4alkyl (e.g., —C(O)OCH3), or
      • C3-8heterocycloalkyl (e.g., pyrrolidinyl, for example pyrrolidin-1-yl) wherein said heterocycloalkyl is optionally substituted with one or more hydroxy, for example 3-hydroxypyrrolidin-1-yl; or
    • P.3. the compound of formula P, P.1 or P.2, wherein:
      • (i) Alk is C1-6alkylene (e.g., C2-5alkylene, for example ethylene, i.e., —CH2CH2—, n-propylene, i.e., —CH2CH2CH2—, n-butylene, i.e., —CH2CH2CH2CH2—, or n-pentylene, i.e., —CH2CH2CH2CH2CH2—) optionally substituted with one or more C1-4alkyl (e.g., methyl, ethyl or isobutyl), arylC1-4alkyl (e.g., benzyl); or
        • Alk is C1-6alkylene (e.g., C2-5alkylene, for example n-propylene, i.e., —CH2CH2CH2—, n-butylene, i.e., —CH2CH2CH2CH2—, n-pentylene, i.e., —CH2CH2CH2CH2CH2—) optionally substituted with one hydroxy or C1-4alkoxy (e.g., methoxy, ethoxy, propoxy, isobutoxy or isopropyloxy) group;
    • P.4. the compound of formula P or any of P.1-P.3 wherein:
      • A is aryl (e.g., phenyl or naphthyl) or aryl-C1-4alkyl (e.g., benzyl or naphthylmethyl), wherein the aryl group of said aryl or arylalkyl is optionally substituted with one or more
        • C1-4alkyl (e.g., methyl, ethyl, t-butyl or n-prop-2-en-1-yl),
        • C1-4alkoxy (e.g., methoxy),
        • hydroxy,
        • —O—C1-4alkyl-N(Rc)(Rd), for example —OCH2CH2N(CH3)2,
        • halo (e.g., Cl, F),
        • haloC1-4alkyl (e.g., CF3),
        • —O-haloC1-4alkyl (e.g., —OCF3),
        • cyano,
        • —OCH2CH2OCH3, and/or
        • —CH2-heteroC3-8cycloalkyl wherein said cycloalkyl is optionally substituted with one or more C1-4alkyl (e.g., methyl), for example, [2,6-dimethylmorpholin-4-yl]methyl, e.g. [(2R,6S)-2,6-dimethylmorpholin-4-yl]methyl);
    • P.5. the compound of formula P wherein:
      • (i) Alk is C1-4alkylene (e.g., C2-5alkylene, for example ethylene, i.e., —CH2CH2—, n-propylene, i.e., —CH2CH2CH2—, n-butylene, i.e., —CH2CH2CH2CH2—, or n-pentylene, i.e., —CH2CH2CH2CH2CH2—) optionally substituted with one or more C1-4alkyl (e.g., methyl, ethyl or isobutyl), arylC1-4alkyl (e.g., benzyl) and/or —N(Rc)(Rd); or
        • Alk is C1-6alkylene (e.g., C2-5alkylene, for example n-propylene, i.e., —CH2CH2CH2—, n-butylene, i.e., —CH2CH2CH2CH2—, n-pentylene, i.e., —CH2CH2CH2CH2CH2—) optionally substituted with one hydroxy or C1-4alkoxy (e.g., methoxy, ethoxy, isobutoxy or isopropyloxy) group; and
      • (ii) X is a single bond, —S— or —O—;
      • (iii) A is aryl (e.g., phenyl or naphthyl) or aryl-C1-4alkyl (e.g., benzyl or naphthylmethyl), wherein the aryl group of said aryl or arylalkyl is optionally substituted with one or more
        • C1-4alkyl (e.g., methyl, ethyl t-butyl),
        • —O—C1-4alkyl-N(Rc)(Rd), for example —OCH2CH2N(CH3)2,
        • halo (e.g., Cl, F),
        • haloC1-4alkyl (e.g., CF3),
        • —O-haloC1-4alkyl (e.g., —OCF3),
        • cyano,
        • [2,6-dimethylmorpholin-4-yl]methyl, e.g. [(2R,6S)-2,6-dimethylmorpholin-4-yl]methyl);
      • (iv) R1 is:
        • H,
        • C1-6alkyl, e.g., C1-4alkyl (for example, methyl, ethyl, n-propyl, isopropyl, isobutyl, t-butyl, 1-methylpropyl or n-hexyl),
        • C3-8cycloalkyl (e.g., cyclopropyl or cyclopentyl),
        • aryl (e.g., phenyl), or
        • C1-4alkoxy (e.g., methoxy);
      • (v) R2 is:
        • H,
        • C1-6alkyl, e.g., C1-4alkyl (for example, methyl, ethyl, n-propyl, isopropyl, n-butyl, isobutyl, n-but-2-en-1-yl, n-hexyl),
        • —C0-4alkyl-C3-8cycloalkyl (e.g., cyclopropyl), —C1-4alkyl-heteroC3-8cycloalkyl, wherein said heterocycloalkyl is optionally substituted with one or more C1-4alkyl (e.g., methyl) groups, for example, [2,6-dimethylmorpholin-4-yl]methyl,
        • —C0-4alkyl-N(Ra)(Rb), for example —C0alkyl-N(Ra)(Rb) or —C1alkyl-N(Ra)(Rb),
        • halo (e.g., Cl),
        • —N(Re)—C(O)—O—C1-4alkyl (e.g., —N(H)—C(O)—O—C(H)(CH3)CH3),
        • —C1-6alkyl-OC1-4alkyl (e.g., —CH2CH2CH2CH2—O—CH3),
        • —O-haloC1-4alkyl (e.g., —OCH2CF3),
        • —CH2—O—C(O)—C1-4alkyl (e.g., —CH2—O—C(O)—CH3),
        • —C(O)O—C1-4alkyl (e.g., —C(O)OCH3); or
      • (vi) Optionally, R2 and A may be linked together so that together with the carbon atoms to which they are attached they form a cyclic structure (e.g., R2 and A are linked together to form, e.g., 14-methyl-1,17,20,22-tetraazapentacyclo[11.10.2.25,8.016,24.018,23]heptacosa-5,7,10,13(25),14,16(24),17,22,26-nonaene-19,21-dione or 14-methyl-1,17,20,22-tetraazapentacyclo[1.10.2.25,8.016,24.018,23]heptacosa-5,7,13(25),14,16(24),17,22,26-octaene-19,21-dione;
      • (vii) Ra is H and Rb is:
        • C1-4alkyl (e.g., methyl),
        • C1-4alkoxy-C1-4alkyl (e.g., methoxyethyl),
      • or Ra and Rb are independently:
        • C1-4alkyl (e.g., methyl),
        • C1-4alkoxy-C1-4alkyl (e.g., methoxyethyl),
      • (viii) Rc and Rd are independently H, C1-4alkyl (e.g., methyl) or arylC1-4alkyl (e.g., benzyl);
      • (ix) R3 and R4 are independently H or C1-4alkyl (e.g., methyl);
      • (x) Re is H or C1-4alkyl,
    • P.6. the compound of formula P or any of P.1-P.5, wherein:
      • Alk is C2-3alkylene (e.g., ethylene, i.e., —CH2CH2—, or n-propylene, i.e. —CH2CH2CH2—) optionally substituted with one or more C1-4alkyl(e.g., methyl or ethyl) or arylC1-4alkyl (e.g., benzyl); or
      • Alk is C2-3alkylene (e.g., ethylene, i.e., —CH2CH2—, or n-propylene, i.e., —CH2CH2CH2—) optionally substituted with one hydroxy or C1-4alkoxy (e.g., ethoxy or isopropyloxy) group; and
      • X is a single bond, —S— or —O—;
      • A is aryl (e.g., phenyl or naphthyl) or aryl-C1-4alkyl (e.g., benzyl or naphthylmethyl), wherein the aryl group of said aryl or arylalkyl is optionally substituted with one or more
        • C1-4alkyl (e.g., methyl, t-butyl), and/or
        • halo (e.g., Cl, F),
      • R1 is:
        • C1-6alkyl, e.g., C1-4alkyl (for example, methyl, ethyl, n-propyl, isopropyl, isobutyl, 1-methylpropyl), or C3-8cycloalkyl (e.g., cyclopentyl),
      • R2 is:
        • H,
        • C1-6alkyl, e.g., C1-4alkyl (for example, methyl, ethyl, n-propyl, isobutyl, n-hexyl),
        • —C0-4alkyl-C3-8cycloalkyl (e.g., cyclopropyl),
      • R3 and itt are H;
    • P.7. the compound of formula P or any of P.1-P.6, wherein:
      • Alk is C2-3alkylene (e.g., ethylene, i.e., —CH2CH2—, or n-propylene, i.e. —CH2CH2CH2—) optionally substituted with one or more C1-4-alkyl (e.g., methyl or ethyl); or
      • Alk is C2-3alkylene (e.g., ethylene, i.e., —CH2CH2—, or n-propylene, i.e., —CH2CH2CH2—) optionally substituted with one C1-4alkoxy (e.g., ethoxy or isopropyloxy) group; and
      • X is a single bond and A is aryl (e.g., phenyl), wherein the aryl group is optionally substituted with one or more
        • C1-4alkyl (e.g., methyl, t-butyl), and/or
        • halo (e.g., Cl, F), or
      • R1 is C1-6alkyl, e.g., C1-4alkyl (for example, methyl, ethyl, n-propyl, isopropyl, isobutyl, 1-methylpropyl), or
        • C3-8cycloalkyl (e.g., cyclopentyl),
      • R2 is:
        • H,
        • C1-6alkyl, e.g., C1-4alkyl (for example, methyl, ethyl, n-propyl, isobutyl, n-hexyl),
        • —C0-4alkyl-C3-8cycloalkyl (e.g., cyclopropyl),
      • R3 and R4 are H;
    • P.8. the compound of Formula P or any of formulae P.1-P.7 wherein:
      • Alk is n-propylene, i.e., —CH2CH2CH2—;
      • X is a single bond;
      • A is phenyl optionally substituted with one or more C1-4alkyl (e.g., methyl, t-butyl) or halo (e.g., Cl, F);
      • R1 is:
        • H,
        • C1-6alkyl, e.g., C1-4alkyl (for example, methyl, ethyl, n-propyl, isopropyl, isobutyl, t-butyl, 1-methylpropyl or n-hexyl), or
        • Cyclopentyl,
      • R2 is:
        • H,
        • C1-6alkyl, e.g., C1-4alkyl (for example, methyl, n-propyl, isobutyl, n-hexyl),
      • R3 and R4 are H;
    • P.9. the compound of Formula P or any of formulae P.1-P.8 wherein:
      • Alk is n-propylene;
      • X is a single bond;
      • A is phenyl;
      • R1 is:
        • H,
        • C1-6alkyl, e.g., C1-4alkyl (for example, methyl, ethyl, n-propyl, isopropyl, isobutyl, t-butyl, 1-methylpropyl or n-hexyl),
      • R2 is:
        • H,
        • C1-6alkyl, e.g., C1-4alkyl (for example, methyl, n-propyl, isobutyl, n-hexyl),
      • R3 and R4 are H;
    • P.10. the compound of Formula P or any of formulae P.1-P.9 wherein:
      • Alk is n-propylene;
      • X is a single bond;
      • A is phenyl substituted with one or more C1-4alkyl (e.g., methyl, t-butyl) or halo (e.g., Cl, F);
      • R1 is:
        • H,
        • C1-6alkyl, e.g., C1-4alkyl (for example, methyl, ethyl, n-propyl, isopropyl, isobutyl, t-butyl, 1-methylpropyl or n-hexyl),
      • R2 is:
        • H,
        • C1-6alkyl, e.g., C1-4alkyl (for example, methyl, n-propyl, isobutyl, n-hexyl),
      • R3 and R4 are H;
    • P.11. The compound according to any of the preceding formulae, wherein:
      • Alk is C2-3alkylene (e.g., ethylene, i.e., CH2CH2—, n-propylene, i.e., —CH2CH2CH2—) optionally substituted with one or more C1-4alkyl (e.g., methyl, ethyl or isobutyl); or
      • Alk is C2-3alkylene (e.g., ethylene, i.e., CH2CH2— or n-propylene, i.e., —CH2CH2CH2—) optionally substituted with one C1-4alkoxy (e.g., ethoxy or isopropyloxy) group;
      • X is a single bond, —S— or —O—;
      • A is aryl (e.g., phenyl), wherein the aryl group is optionally substituted with one or more
        • C1-4alkyl (e.g., methyl),
        • halo (e.g., Cl, F),
      • R1 is:
        • C1-6alkyl, e.g., C1-4alkyl (for example, methyl, ethyl, n-propyl, isopropyl, isobutyl, t-butyl, 1-methylpropyl), C3-8cycloalkyl (e.g., cyclopentyl),
      • R2 is:
        • H,
        • C1-6alkyl, e.g., C1-4alkyl (for example, methyl, ethyl, n-propyl or isopropyl),
        • —C0-4alkyl-C3-8cycloalkyl (e.g., cyclopropyl),
    • P.12. The compound according to any of the preceding formulae, wherein:
      • Alk is C3alkylene (e.g., n-propylene, i.e., —CH2CH2CH2—) optionally substituted with one or more C1-4alkyl (e.g., methyl or ethyl); or
      • Alk is C3alkylene (e.g., n-propylene, i.e., —CH2CH2CH2—) optionally substituted with one C1-4alkoxy (e.g., ethoxy or isopropyloxy) group;
      • X is a single bond;
      • A is aryl (e.g., phenyl), wherein the aryl group is optionally substituted with one or more
        • C1-4alkyl (e.g., methyl),
        • halo (e.g., Cl, F),
      • R1 is:
        • C1-6alkyl, e.g., C1-4alkyl (for example, methyl, ethyl, n-propyl, isopropyl or 1-methylpropyl),
        • C3-8cycloalkyl (e.g., cyclopentyl),
      • R2 is:
        • H,
        • C1-6alkyl, e.g., C1-4alkyl (for example, methyl, ethyl, n-propyl or isopropyl),
        • —C0-4alkyl-C3-8cycloalkyl (e.g., cyclopropyl),
    • P.13. The compound according to Formula P or any of the preceding formulae, wherein the substituents are as described in any one of formulae 1.1-1.107;
    • P.14. The compound according to any of the preceding formulae, wherein the compound is selected from those set forth in formula 1.27 and:




embedded image


embedded image


embedded image


embedded image


embedded image




    • P.15. The compound according to any of the preceding formulae wherein the compound is selected from formula 1.28 and:







embedded image


embedded image


embedded image


embedded image


embedded image




    • P.16. The compound according to any of the preceding formulae wherein the compound is selected from:







embedded image


embedded image


embedded image


embedded image


embedded image


embedded image


embedded image


embedded image


embedded image


embedded image


embedded image




    • P.17. The compound according to any of the preceding formulae wherein the compound is selected from formula 1.31 and:







embedded image


embedded image


embedded image


in free or salt form.


The invention further relates to a compound of Formula Q as described in the following formulae:

    • 1.1. the compound of formula Q, wherein
      • (i) Alk is C1-6alkylene (e.g., C2-5alkylene, for example ethylene, i.e., CH2CH2—, n-propylene, i.e., —CH2CH2CH2—, n-butylene, i.e., —CH2CH2CH2CH2—, or n-pentylene, i.e., —CH2CH2CH2CH2CH2—) optionally substituted with one or more C1-4alkyl (e.g., methyl or isobutyl) and/or —N(Rc)(Rd); or
        • Alk is C1-6alkylene (e.g., C2-5alkylene, for example n-propylene, i.e., —CH2CH2CH2—, n-butylene, i.e., —CH2CH2CH2CH2—, or n-pentylene, i.e., —CH2CH2CH2CH2CH2—) optionally substituted with one hydroxy or C1-4alkoxy (e.g., methoxy, ethoxy or isopropyloxy) group;
      • (ii) X is a single bond, —S—, —S(O)2—, —S(O)— or —O—;
      • (iii) A is aryl (e.g., phenyl or naphthyl) or aryl-C1-4alkyl (e.g., benzyl or naphthylmethyl), wherein the aryl group of said aryl or arylalkyl is optionally substituted with one or more
        • C1-4alkyl (e.g., methyl, t-butyl or n-prop-2-en-1-yl),
        • C1-4alkoxy (e.g., methoxy),
        • hydroxy,
        • —O—C1-4alkyl-N(Rc)(Rd), for example —OCH2CH2N(CH3)2,
        • halo (e.g., Cl, F),
        • haloC1-4alkyl (e.g., CF3),
        • —O-haloC1-4alkyl (e.g., —OCF3),
        • cyano,
        • —O—(CH2CH2O)1-3—C1-4alkyl (e.g., —OCH2CH2OCH3 or —O(CH2CH2O)3CH3), and/or
        • —CH2-heteroC3-8cycloalkyl wherein said cycloalkyl is optionally substituted with one or more C1-4alkyl (e.g., methyl), for example, [2,6-dimethylmorpholin-4-yl]methyl, e.g. [(2R,6S)-2,6-dimethylmorpholin-4-yl]methyl);
      • (iv) R1 is:
        • H,
        • C1-6alkyl, e.g., C1-4alkyl (for example, methyl, ethyl, n-propyl, isopropyl, isobutyl, t-butyl, 1-methylpropyl or n-hexyl),
        • C3-8cycloalkyl (e.g., cyclopropyl),
        • aryl (e.g., phenyl), or
        • C1-4alkoxy (e.g., methoxy);
      • (v) R2 is:
        • H,
        • C1-6alkyl, e.g., C1-4alkyl (for example, methyl, ethyl, n-propyl, isopropyl, n-prop-2-en-1-yl, n-butyl, isobutyl, n-but-2-en-1-yl, n-hexyl),
        • —C0-4alkyl-C3-8cycloalkyl (e.g., cyclopropyl),
        • —C1-4alkyl-heteroC3-8cycloalkyl, wherein said heterocycloalkyl is optionally substituted with one or more hydroxy and/or C1-4alkyl (e.g., methyl) groups, for example, [2,6-dimethylmorpholin-4-yl]methyl,
        • —C0-4alkyl-N(Ra)(Rb), for example —C0alkyl-N(Ra)(Rb) or
        • —C1alkyl-N(Ra)(Rb),
        • C1-4alkoxy (e.g., methoxy),
        • halo (e.g., Cl),
        • —O—(CH2CH2O)1-3—C1-4alkyl (e.g., —OCH2CH2OCH3 or —O(CH2CH2O)3CH3),
        • —N(Re)—C(O)—C1-4alkyl (e.g., —N(H)—C(O)—CH3, —N(H)—C(O)—CH2CH3 or —N(H)—C(O)—C(H)(CH3)CH3),
        • —N(Re)—C(O)—O—C4alkyl (e.g., —N(H)—C(O)—O—C(H)(CH3)CH3),
        • —N(Re)—C(O)-aryl wherein said aryl is optionally substituted with one or more halo (e.g., F), for example —N(H)—C(O)-(4-fluorophenyl),
        • —C1-6alkyl-OC1-4alkyl (e.g., —CH2CH2CH2CH2—O—CH3),
        • —O—CH2CH2—O—CH2-phenyl,
        • —O-haloC1-4alkyl (e.g., —OCH2CF3),
        • —CH2—O—C(O)—C1-4alkyl (e.g., —CH2—O—C(O)—CH3),
        • —C(O)O—C1-4alkyl (e.g., —C(O)OCH3), or
        • C3-8heterocycloalkyl (e.g., pyrrolidinyl, for example pyrrolidin-1-yl) wherein said heterocycloalkyl is optionally substituted with one or more hydroxy, for example 3-hydroxypyrrolidin-1-yl; or
      • (vi) Optionally, R1 and R2 are linked together so that together with the carbon atoms to which they are attached they form a cyclic structure (e.g., R1 and R2 are linked together to form ethylenedioxy);
      • (vii) Ra and Rb are independently:
        • H,
        • C1-4alkyl (e.g., methyl) optionally substituted with one or more hydroxy groups for example, 2,3-dihydroxyprop-1-yl,
        • C3-8cycloalkyl (e.g., cyclopropyl or cyclopentyl),
        • C1-4alkoxy-C1-4alkyl (e.g., methoxyethyl),
        • hydroxy-C1-4alkyl (e.g., hydroxyethyl),
        • N(Rc)(Rd)—C1-4alkyl (e.g., dimethylaminoethyl);
      • (viii) Rc and Rd are independently H, C1-4alkyl (e.g., methyl) or arylC1-4alkyl (e.g., benzyl);
      • (ix) R3 and R4 are independently H or C1-4alkyl (e.g., methyl);
      • (x) Re is H or C1-4alkyl;
    • 1.2. the compound of formula Q or 1.1, wherein R2 is:
      • H,
      • C1-6alkyl, e.g., C1-4alkyl (for example, methyl, ethyl, n-propyl, isopropyl, n-prop-2-en-1-yl, n-butyl, isobutyl, n-but-2-en-1-yl, n-hexyl),
      • —C0-4alkyl-C3-8cycloalkyl (e.g., cyclopropyl),
      • —C1-4alkyl-heteroC3-8cycloalkyl, wherein said heterocycloalkyl is optionally substituted with one or more hydroxy and/or C1-4alkyl (e.g., methyl) groups, for example, [2,6-dimethylmorpholin-4-yl]methyl,
      • —C0-1alkyl-N(Ra)(Rb), wherein Ra is H and Rb is C1-4alkoxy-C1-4alkyl (e.g., methoxyethyl) or both Ra and Rb are methyl,
      • C1-4alkoxy (e.g., methoxy),
      • halo (e.g., Cl),
      • —C1-6alkyl-OC1-4alkyl (e.g., —CH2CH2CH2CH2—O—CH3),
      • —O-haloC1-4alkyl (e.g., —OCH2CF3),
      • —CH2—O—C(O)—C1-4alkyl (e.g., —CH2—O—C(O)—CH3),
      • —C(O)O—C1-4 alkyl (e.g., —C(O)OCH3), or
      • C3-8heterocycloalkyl (e.g., pyrrolidinyl, for example pyrrolidin-1-yl) wherein said heterocycloalkyl is optionally substituted with one or more hydroxy, for example 3-hydroxypyrrolidin-1-yl; or
    • 1.3. the compound of formula Q, 1.1 or 1.2, wherein:
      • (ii) Alk is C1-4alkylene (e.g., C2-5alkylene, for example ethylene, i.e., —CH2CH2—, n-propylene, i.e., —CH2CH2CH2—, n-butylene, i.e., —CH2CH2CH2CH2—, or n-pentylene, i.e., —CH2CH2CH2CH2CH2—) optionally substituted with one or more C1-4alkyl (e.g., methyl or isobutyl); or
        • Alk is C1-4alkylene (e.g., C2-5alkylene, for example n-propylene, i.e., —CH2CH2CH2—, n-butylene, i.e., —CH2CH2CH2CH2—, n-pentylene, i.e., —CH2CH2CH2CH2CH2—) optionally substituted with one hydroxy or C1-4alkoxy (e.g., methoxy, ethoxy or isopropyloxy) group;
    • 1.4. the compound of formula Q, 1.1, 1.2 or 1.3, wherein:
      • A is aryl (e.g., phenyl or naphthyl) or aryl-C1-4alkyl (e.g., benzyl or naphthylmethyl), wherein the aryl group of said aryl or arylalkyl is optionally substituted with one or more
        • C1-4alkyl (e.g., methyl, t-butyl or n-prop-2-en-1-yl),
        • C1-4alkoxy (e.g., methoxy),
        • hydroxy,
        • —O—C1-4alkyl-N(Rc)(Rd), for example —OCH2CH2N(CH3)2,
        • halo (e.g., Cl, F),
        • haloC1-4alkyl (e.g., CF3),
        • —O-haloC1-4alkyl (e.g., —OCF3),
        • cyano,
        • —OCH2CH2OCH3, and/or
        • —CH2-heteroC3-8cycloalkyl wherein said cycloalkyl is optionally substituted with one or more C1-4alkyl (e.g., methyl), for example, [2,6-dimethylmorpholin-4-yl]methyl, e.g. [(2R,6S)-2,6-dimethylmorpholin-4-yl]methyl);
    • 1.5. the compound of formula Q or any of 1.1-1.3, wherein R3 and R4 are H,
    • 1.6. the compound of formula Q or any of 1.1-1.3, wherein R3 or R4 is C1-4alkyl (e.g., methyl);
    • 1.7. the compound of formula Q wherein:
      • (i) Alk is C1-6alkylene (e.g., C2-5alkylene, for example ethylene, i.e., —CH2CH2—, n-propylene, i.e., —CH2CH2CH2—, n-butylene, i.e., —CH2CH2CH2CH2—, or n-pentylene, i.e., —CH2CH2CH2CH2CH2—) optionally substituted with one or more C1-4alkyl (e.g., methyl or isobutyl) and/or —N(Rc)(Rd); or
        • Alk is C1-6alkylene (e.g., C2-5alkylene, for example n-propylene, i.e., —CH2CH2CH2—, n-butylene, i.e., —CH2CH2CH2CH2—, n-pentylene, i.e., —CH2CH2CH2CH2CH2—) optionally substituted with one hydroxy or C1-4alkoxy (e.g., methoxy, ethoxy or isopropyloxy) group; and
      • (ii) X is a single bond, —S— or —O—;
      • (iii) A is aryl (e.g., phenyl or naphthyl) or aryl-C1-4alkyl (e.g., benzyl or naphthylmethyl), wherein the aryl group of said aryl or arylalkyl is optionally substituted with one or more
        • C1-4alkyl (e.g., methyl, t-butyl),
        • —O—C1-4alkyl-N(Rc)(Rd), for example —OCH2CH2N(CH3)2,
        • halo (e.g., Cl, F),
        • haloC1-4alkyl (e.g., CF3),
        • —O-haloC1-4alkyl (e.g., —OCF3),
        • cyano,
        • [2,6-dimethylmorpholin-4-yl]methyl, e.g. [(2R,6S)-2,6-dimethylmorpholin-4-yl]methyl);
      • (iv) R1 is:
        • H,
        • C1-6alkyl, e.g., C1-4alkyl (for example, methyl, ethyl, n-propyl, isopropyl, isobutyl, t-butyl, 1-methylpropyl or n-hexyl),
        • C3-8cycloalkyl (e.g., cyclopropyl),
        • aryl (e.g., phenyl), or
        • C1-4alkoxy (e.g., methoxy);
      • (v) R2 is:
        • H,
        • C1-6alkyl, e.g., C1-4alkyl (for example, methyl, ethyl, n-propyl, isopropyl, n-butyl, isobutyl, n-but-2-en-1-yl, n-hexyl),
        • —C0-4alkyl-C3-8cycloalkyl (e.g., cyclopropyl),
        • —C1-4alkyl-heteroC3-8cycloalkyl, wherein said heterocycloalkyl is optionally substituted with one or more C1-4alkyl (e.g., methyl) groups, for example, [2,6-dimethylmorpholin-4-yl]methyl,
        • —C0-4alkyl-N(Ra)(Rb), for example —C0alkyl-N(Ra)(Rb) or —C1alkyl-N(Ra)(Rb),
        • halo (e.g., Cl),
        • —N(Re)—C(O)—O—C1-4alkyl (e.g., —N(H)—C(O)—O—C(H)(CH3)CH3),
        • —C1-6alkyl-OC1-4alkyl (e.g., —CH2CH2CH2CH2—O—CH3),
        • —O-haloC1-4alkyl (e.g., —OCH2CF3),
        • —CH2—O—C(O)—C1-4alkyl (e.g., —CH2—O—C(O)—CH3),
        • —C(O)O—C1-4alkyl (e.g., —C(O)OCH3); or
      • (vi) Optionally, R2 and A may be linked together so that together with the carbon atoms to which they are attached they form a cyclic structure (e.g., R2 and A are linked together to form, e.g., 14-methyl-1,17,20,22-tetraazapentacyclo[11.10.2.25,8.016, 24.018,23]heptacosa-5,7,10,13(25),14,16(24),17,22,26-nonaene-19,21-dione or 14-methyl-1,17,20,22-tetraazapentacyclo[11.10.2.25,8.016,24.018,23]heptacosa-5,7,13(25),14,16(24),17,22,26-octaene-19,21-dione;
      • (vii) Ra is H and Rb is:
        • C1-4alkyl (e.g., methyl),
        • C1-4alkoxy-C1-4alkyl (e.g., methoxyethyl),
      • or Ra and Rb are independently:
        • C1-4alkyl (e.g., methyl),
        • C1-4alkoxy-C1-4alkyl (e.g., methoxyethyl),
      • (viii) Rc and Rd are independently H, C1-4alkyl (e.g., methyl) or arylC1-4alkyl (e.g., benzyl);
      • (ix) R3 and R4 are independently H or C1-4alkyl (e.g., methyl);
      • (x) Re is H or C1-4alkyl,
    • 1.8. the compound of formula Q or any of 1.1-1.7, wherein:
      • Alk is C2-3alkylene (e.g., ethylene, i.e., —CH2CH2—, or n-propylene, i.e. —CH2CH2CH2—) optionally substituted with one or more C1-4alkyl (e.g., methyl); or
      • Alk is C2-3alkylene (e.g., ethylene, i.e., —CH2CH2—, or n-propylene, i.e., —CH2CH2CH2—) optionally substituted with one hydroxy or C1-4alkoxy (e.g., ethoxy or isopropyloxy) group; and
      • X is a single bond, —S— or —O—;
      • A is aryl (e.g., phenyl or naphthyl) or aryl-C1-4alkyl (e.g., benzyl or naphthylmethyl), wherein the aryl group of said aryl or arylalkyl is optionally substituted with one or more
        • C1-4alkyl (e.g., methyl, t-butyl), and/or
        • halo (e.g., Cl, F),
      • R1 is:
        • C1-6alkyl, e.g., C1-4alkyl (for example, methyl, ethyl, n-propyl, isopropyl, isobutyl, 1-methylpropyl),
      • R2 is:
        • H,
        • C1-6alkyl, e.g., C1-4alkyl (for example, methyl, ethyl, n-propyl, isobutyl, n-hexyl),
        • —C0-4alkyl-C3-8cycloalkyl (e.g., cyclopropyl),
      • R3 and R4 are H;
    • 1.9. the compound of formula Q or any of 1.1-1.8, wherein:
      • Alk is C2-3alkylene (e.g., ethylene, i.e., —CH2CH2—, or n-propylene, i.e. —CH2CH2CH2—) optionally substituted with one or more C1-4-alkyl (e.g., methyl); or
      • Alk is C2-3alkylene (e.g., ethylene, i.e., —CH2CH2—, or n-propylene, i.e., —CH2CH2CH2—) optionally substituted with one C1-4alkoxy (e.g., ethoxy or isopropyloxy) group; and
      • X is a single bond and A is aryl (e.g., phenyl), wherein the aryl group is optionally substituted with one or more
        • C1-4alkyl (e.g., methyl, t-butyl), and/or
        • halo (e.g., Cl, F), or
      • R1 is C1-6alkyl, e.g., C1-4alkyl (for example, methyl, ethyl, n-propyl, isopropyl, isobutyl, 1-methylpropyl),
      • R2 is:
        • H,
        • C1-6alkyl, e.g., C1-4alkyl (for example, methyl, ethyl, n-propyl, isobutyl, n-hexyl),
        • —C0-4alkyl-C3-8cycloalkyl (e.g., cyclopropyl),
      • R3 and R4 are H,
    • 1.10. the compound of any one of formulae 1.1-1.9, wherein X is a single bond;
    • 1.11. the compound of any one of formulae 1.1-1.8, wherein X is —S—;
    • 1.12. the compound of any one of formulae 1.1-1.9, wherein X is —O—;
    • 1.13. the compound of Formula Q or any of formulae 1.1-1.12, wherein Alk is n-propylene, i.e., —CH2CH2CH2—;
    • 1.14. the compound of Formula Q or any of formulae 1.1-1.13 wherein:
      • Alk is n-propylene, i.e., —CH2CH2CH2—;
      • X is a single bond;
      • A is phenyl optionally substituted with one or more C1-4alkyl (e.g., methyl, t-butyl) or halo (e.g., Cl, F);
      • R1 is:
        • H,
        • C1-6alkyl, e.g., C1-4alkyl (for example, methyl, ethyl, n-propyl, isopropyl, isobutyl, t-butyl, 1-methylpropyl or n-hexyl),
      • R2 is:
        • H,
        • C1-6alkyl, e.g., C1-4alkyl (for example, methyl, n-propyl, isobutyl, n-hexyl),
      • R3 and R4 are H,
    • 1.15. the compound of Formula Q or any of formulae 1.1-1.10 or 1.13-1.14 wherein:
      • Alk is n-propylene;
      • X is a single bond;
      • A is phenyl;
      • R1 is:
        • H,
        • C1-6alkyl, e.g., C1-4alkyl (for example, methyl, ethyl, n-propyl, isopropyl, isobutyl, t-butyl, 1-methylpropyl or n-hexyl),
      • R2 is:
        • H,
        • C1-6alkyl, e.g., C1-4alkyl (for example, methyl, n-propyl, isobutyl, n-hexyl),
      • R3 and R4 are H,
    • 1.16. the compound of Formula Q or any of formulae 1.1-1.10 or 1.13-1.15 wherein:
      • Alk is n-propylene;
      • X is a single bond;
      • A is phenyl substituted with one or more C1-4alkyl (e.g., methyl, t-butyl) or halo (e.g., Cl, F);
      • R1 is:
        • H,
        • C1-6alkyl, e.g., C1-4alkyl (for example, methyl, ethyl, n-propyl, isopropyl, isobutyl, t-butyl, 1-methylpropyl or n-hexyl),
      • R2 is:
        • H,
        • C1-6alkyl, e.g., C1-4alkyl (for example, methyl, n-propyl, isobutyl, n-hexyl),
      • R3 and R4 are H;
    • 1.17. the compound of Formula Q or any of formulae 1.1-1.16 wherein R1 is C1-6alkyl (e.g., methyl);
    • 1.18. the compound of Formula Q or any of formulae 1.1-1.17 wherein R2 is C1-6alkyl (e.g., methyl);
    • 1.19. the compound of Formula Q or any of formulae 1.1-1.18 wherein R3 is H,
    • 1.20. the compound of Formula Q or any of formulae 1.1-1.19 wherein R4 is H,
    • 1.21. the compound of Formula Q or any of formulae 1.1-1.20 wherein Re and Rd are independently H or C1-4alkyl (e.g., methyl);
    • 1.22. the compound of Formula Q or any of formulae 1.1-1.21 wherein Rc and Rd are both H,
    • 1.23. the compound of Formula Q or any of formulae 1.1-1.21 wherein Rc and Rd are both methyl;
    • 1.24. the compound of Formula Q or any of formulae 1.1-1.23 wherein Re is H or C1-4alkyl;
    • 1.25. the compound of Formula Q or any of formulae 1.1-1.24 wherein Re is H,
    • 1.26. the compound of Formula Q or any of formulae 1.1-1.24 wherein:
      • Alk is C1-6alkylene, e.g., C2-3alkylene, preferably C3alkylene (e.g., n-propylene, i.e., —CH2CH2CH2—);
      • X is a single bond;
      • A is aryl (e.g., phenyl);
      • R1 is C1-6alkyl, e.g., C1-4alkyl (for example, methyl),
      • R2 is C1-6alkyl, e.g., C1-4alkyl (for example, methyl),
      • R3 and R4 are H,
    • 1.27. The compound of Formula Q according to any of the preceding formulae wherein said compound is selected from:




embedded image


embedded image


embedded image


embedded image


embedded image


embedded image


embedded image


embedded image


embedded image


embedded image


embedded image


embedded image


embedded image


embedded image


embedded image


embedded image


embedded image


embedded image


embedded image


embedded image


embedded image


embedded image


embedded image


embedded image


embedded image


embedded image


embedded image


embedded image


embedded image


embedded image


embedded image


embedded image


embedded image


embedded image




    • 1.28. The compound according to any of the preceding formulae wherein said compound is selected from:







embedded image


embedded image


embedded image


embedded image


embedded image


embedded image


embedded image


embedded image


embedded image


embedded image


embedded image


embedded image


embedded image


embedded image


embedded image


embedded image


embedded image


embedded image


embedded image


embedded image


embedded image


embedded image


embedded image


embedded image


embedded image


embedded image


embedded image




    • 1.29. The compound according to any of the preceding formulae wherein said compound is selected from:







embedded image


embedded image


embedded image


embedded image


embedded image


embedded image


embedded image




    • 1.30. The compound according to any of the preceding formulae wherein said compound is selected from:







embedded image


embedded image


embedded image


embedded image


embedded image


embedded image




    • 1.31. The compound according to any of the preceding formulae wherein said compound is selected from:







embedded image


embedded image


embedded image


embedded image


embedded image


embedded image


embedded image




    • 1.32. any of the preceding formulae wherein the compound of Formula Q binds to FMN and/or CD3299 riboswitch, e.g., with an Imax of greater than 20%, preferably greater than 30%, more preferably greater than 40%, still more preferably greater than 50% in an assay, for example, as described in Example A, and/or has a Minimum Inhibitory Concentration (MIC) of less than or equal to 64 μg/mL, more preferably less than or equal to 32 μg/mL, still more preferably, less than or equal to 16 μg/mL, for example, in an assay as described in Example B,





in free or salt form.


The invention further relates to a compound of Formula I as described in the following formulae:

    • 1.33 a compound of formula I, wherein Alk is C1-6alkylene (e.g., ethylene, n-propylene, n-butylene, n-pentylene) optionally substituted with one or more C1-4alkyl, —N(Rc)(Rd); or Alk is C1-6alkylene (e.g., n-propylene, n-butylene, n-pentylene) optionally substituted with one hydroxy or C1-4alkoxy group;
    • 1.34 a compound of Formula 1 or 1.33, wherein Alk is C2-5alkylene (e.g., ethylene, n-propylene, n-butylene, n-pentylene) optionally substituted as described in formula 1.33;
    • 1.35 a compound of Formula I or any of 1.33-1.34, wherein Alk is C3-4alkylene (e.g., n-propylene, n-butylene) optionally substituted as described in formula 1.33;
    • 1.36 a compound of Formula I or any of 1.33-1.35, wherein Alk is selected from a group consisting of ethylene, n-propylene, n-butylene and n-pentylene, optionally substituted as described in formula 1.33;
    • 1.37 a compound of Formula I or any of 1.33-1.36, wherein Alk is selected from a group consisting of ethylene, n-propylene, n-butylene, n-pentylene, —CH2CH(OH)CH2—, —CH2CH2CH(OH)—, —CH2CH(NH2)CH2— and CH2CH(N(CH3)2)CH2—;
    • 1.38 a compound of Formula I or any of 1.33-1.36, wherein Alk is ethylene, n-propylene or n-butylene;
    • 1.39 a compound of Formula I or any of 1.33-1.36, wherein Alk is n-propylene or n-butylene;
    • 1.40 a compound of Formula I or any of 1.33-1.39, wherein X is a single bond, —S— or —O—;
    • 1.41 a compound of Formula I or any of 1.33-1.39, wherein X is a single bond;
    • 1.42 a compound of Formula I or any of 1.33-1.39, wherein X is —S—;
    • 1.43 a compound of Formula I or any of 1.33-1.39, wherein X is —O—;
    • 1.44 a compound of Formula I or any of 1.33-1.43, wherein -Alk-X— is selected from a group consisting of ethylene, n-propylene, n-butylene, n-pentylene, CH2CH(OH)CH2—, —CH2CH2CH(OH)—, —CH2CH(NH2)CH2—, CH2CH(N(CH3)2)CH2—, —CH2CH2O— and —CH2CH2S—;
    • 1.45 a compound of Formula I or any of 1.33-1.44, wherein A is aryl (e.g., phenyl) or aryl-C1-4alkyl (e.g., benzyl), wherein the aryl group of said aryl or arylalkyl is optionally substituted with one or more C1-4alkyl (e.g., methyl), C1-4alkoxy (e.g., methoxy), hydroxy, —O—C1-4alkyl-N(Rc)(Rd), halo (e.g., Cl, F), haloC1-4alkyl (e.g., CF3), —O-haloC1-4alkyl (e.g., —OCF3);
    • 1.46 a compound of Formula I or any of 1.33-1.45, wherein A is aryl (e.g., phenyl) optionally substituted as disclosed in formula 1.45;
    • 1.47 a compound of Formula I or any of 1.33-1.45, wherein A is phenyl optionally substituted as disclosed in formula 1.45;
    • 1.48 a compound of Formula I or any of 1.33-1.47, wherein A is phenyl;
    • 1.49 a compound of Formula I or any of 1.33-1.47, wherein A is phenyl substituted with one or more C1-4alkyl (e.g., methyl), C1-4alkoxy (e.g., methoxy), hydroxy, —O—C1-4alkyl-N(Rc)(Rd), halo (e.g., Cl, F), haloC1-4alkyl (e.g., CF3), —O-haloC1-4alkyl (e.g., —OCF3);
    • 1.50 formula 1.49, wherein A is phenyl substituted with one or more substituent selected from a group consisting of methoxy, hydroxy, chloro, fluoro, methyl, CF3, —OCF3 and —OCH2CH2N(CH3)(CH3);
    • 1.51 any of formulae 1.45-1.49, wherein A is phenyl, 4-methoxyphenyl, 4-hydroxyphenyl, 4-(2-dimethylaminoethoxy)-phenyl, 3-methoxyphenyl, 4-chlorophenyl, 3-chlorophenyl, 3,5-difluorophenyl, 3-hydroxyphenyl, 2-fluorophenyl, 4-fluorophenyl, 4-methylphenyl, 3-methylphenyl, 2-methylphenyl, 2,6-difluorophenyl, 3-trifluoromethylphenyl, 3,4-difluoromethyl, 3-trifluoromethoxyphenyl, 4-trifluoromethoxyphenyl, 4-methoxyphenyl, 3-chloro-4-fluorophenyl and 3,4-dichlorophenyl;
    • 1.52 a compound of Formula I or any of 1.33-1.44, wherein A is aryl (e.g., phenyl) or aryl-C1-4alkyl (e.g., benzyl), wherein the aryl group of said aryl or arylalkyl is substituted with one or more C1-4alkyl (e.g., methyl), C1-4alkoxy (e.g., methoxy), hydroxy, —O—C1-4alkyl-N(Rc)(Rd), halo (e.g., Cl, F), haloC1-4alkyl (e.g., CF3), —O-haloC1-4alkyl (e.g., —OCF3);
    • 1.53 a compound of Formula I or any of 1.33-1.45, wherein
      • -Alk is an n-propylene or n-butylene, optionally substituted with one or more C1-4alkyl, —N(Rc)(Rd) or optionally substituted with one hydroxy or C1-4alkoxy group,
      • —X— is a single bond, —O— or —S—, and
      • A is phenyl optionally substituted with one or more C1-4alkyl (e.g., methyl), C1-4alkoxy (e.g., methoxy), hydroxy, halo (e.g., Cl, F), haloC1-4alkyl (e.g., CF3), —O-haloC1-4alkyl (e.g., —OCF3);
    • 1.54 a compound of Formula I or any of 1.33-1.45, wherein
      • -Alk is an n-propylene or n-butylene, optionally substituted with one or more C1-4alkyl, —N(Rc)(Rd) or optionally substituted with one hydroxy or C1-4alkoxy group,
      • —X— is a single bond, and
      • A is phenyl optionally substituted with one or more C1-4alkyl (e.g., methyl), C1-4alkoxy (e.g., methoxy), hydroxy, halo (e.g., Cl, F), haloC1-4alkyl (e.g., CF3), —O-haloC1-4alkyl (e.g., —OCF3);
    • 1.55 a compound of Formula I or any of 1.33-1.45, wherein
      • -Alk is an n-propylene or n-butylene,
      • —X— is a single bond, and
      • A is phenyl optionally substituted with one or more C1-4alkyl (e.g., methyl), C1-4alkoxy (e.g., methoxy), hydroxy, halo (e.g., Cl, F), haloC1-4alkyl (e.g., CF3), —O-haloC1-4alkyl (e.g., —OCF3);
    • 1.56 a compound of Formula I or any of 1.33-1.45, wherein
      • -Alk is an n-propylene or n-butylene,
      • —X— is a single bond, and
      • A is phenyl optionally substituted with one or more C1-4alkyl (e.g., methyl) or halo (e.g., Cl, F);
    • 1.57 a compound of Formula I or any of 1.33-1.45, wherein
      • -Alk is an n-propylene,
      • —X— is a single bond, and
      • A is phenyl optionally substituted with one or more C1-4alkyl (e.g., methyl) or halo (e.g., Cl, F);
    • 1.58 a compound of Formula I or any of 1.33-1.45, wherein A is aryl-C1-4alkyl (e.g., benzyl) optionally substituted with one or more C1-4alkyl (e.g., methyl), C1-4alkoxy (e.g., methoxy), hydroxy, —O—C1-4alkyl-N(Rc)(Rd), halo (e.g., Cl, F), haloC1-4alkyl (e.g., CF3), —O-haloC1-4alkyl (e.g., —OCF3);
    • 1.59 a compound of Formula I or any of 1.33-1.58, wherein -Alk-X-A is selected from any of the following:




embedded image


embedded image


embedded image




    • 1.60 a compound of Formula I or any of formulae 1.33-1.59, wherein R1 is H, C1-4alkyl (e.g., methyl) or C1-4alkoxy (e.g., methoxy);

    • 1.61 a compound of Formula I or any of 1.33-1.60, wherein R1 is H,

    • 1.62 a compound of Formula I or any of 1.33-1.60, wherein R1 is C1-4alkyl (e.g., methyl);

    • 1.63 a compound of Formula I or any of 1.33-1.60, wherein R1 is methyl;

    • 1.64 a compound of Formula I or any of 1.33-1.63, wherein R2 is H, (e.g., methyl), —C0-4alkyl-C3-8cycloalkyl (e.g., cyclopropyl), —C0-4alkyl-N(Ra)(Rb), C1-4alkoxy (e.g., methoxy), halo (e.g., Cl), C3-8heterocycloalkyl (e.g., pyrrolidinyl, for example pyrrolidin-1-yl) wherein said heterocycloalkyl is optionally substituted with one or more hydroxy;

    • 1.65 a compound of Formula I or any of 1.33-1.63, wherein R2 is H, C1-4alkyl (e.g., methyl), —C0-4alkyl-C3-8cycloalkyl (e.g., cyclopropyl), N(Ra)(Rb), C1-4alkoxy (e.g., methoxy), halo (e.g., Cl), C3-8heterocycloalkyl (e.g., pyrrolidinyl, for example pyrrolidin-1-yl) wherein said heterocycloalkyl is optionally substituted with one or more hydroxy;

    • 1.66 a compound of Formula I or any of 1.33-1.63, wherein R2 is H, C1-4alkyl (e.g., methyl), —C0-4alkyl-C3-8cycloalkyl (e.g., cyclopropyl), —C1-4alkyl-N(Ra)(Rb), C1-4alkoxy (e.g., methoxy), C3-8heterocycloalkyl (e.g., pyrrolidinyl, for example pyrrolidin-1-yl) wherein said heterocycloalkyl is optionally substituted with one or more hydroxy;

    • 1.67 a compound of Formula I or any of 1.33-1.64, wherein R2 is selected from a group consisting of H, C1-4alkyl, (e.g., methyl), —C0-4alkyl-C3-8cycloalkyl (e.g., cyclopropyl) and halo (e.g., Cl);

    • 1.68 a compound of Formula I or any of 1.33-1.64, wherein R2 is H,

    • 1.69 a compound of Formula I or any of 1.33-1.64, wherein R2 is C1-4alkyl (e.g., methyl);

    • 1.70 a compound of Formula I or any of 1.33-1.64, wherein R2 is methyl;

    • 1.71 a compound of Formula I or any of 1.33-1.64, wherein R2 is —C0-4alkyl-C3-8 cycloalkyl (e.g., cyclopropyl);

    • 1.72 a compound of Formula I or any of 1.33-1.64, wherein R2 is halo (e.g., Cl);

    • 1.73 a compound of Formula 1 or any of 1.33-1.64, wherein R1 and R2 are selected from H, C1-4alkyl (e.g., methyl) and —C0-4alkyl-C3-8cycloalkyl (e.g., cyclopropyl);

    • 1.74 a compound of Formula I or any of 1.33-1.64, wherein R1 and R2 are both methyl;

    • 1.75 a compound of Formula 1 or any of 1.33-1.64, wherein R1 is H and R2 is —C0-4 alkyl-C3-8cycloalkyl (e.g., cyclopropyl);

    • 1.76 a compound of Formula I or any of 1.33-1.64, wherein R1 and R2 are linked so that together with the carbon atoms to which they are attached, they form a cyclic structure;

    • 1.77 a compound of Formula I or any of 1.33-1.64, wherein R1 and R2 are methoxy and R1 and R2 are linked together so that together with the carbon atoms to which they are attached they form a cyclic structure (e.g., R1 and R2 are linked together to form ethylenedioxy);

    • 1.78 a compound of Formula I or any of 1.33-1.77, wherein Ra and Rb are independently H, C1-4alkyl (e.g., methyl), C3-8cycloalkyl (e.g., cyclopropyl, cyclopentyl), C1-4alkoxy-C1-4alkyl (e.g., methoxyethyl), hydroxy-C1-4alkyl (e.g., hydroxyethyl), N(Rc)(Rd)—C1-4alkyl (e.g., dimethylaminoethyl);

    • 1.79 a compound of Formula I or any of 1.33-1.78, wherein Rc and Rd are independently H or C1-4alkyl (e.g., methyl);

    • 1.80 a compound of Formula I or any of 1.33-1.79, wherein Rc and Rd are H,

    • 1.81 a compound of Formula I or any of 1.33-1.79, wherein Rc and Rd are C1-4alkyl (e.g., methyl);

    • 1.82 a compound of Formula I or any of 1.33-1.79, wherein Rc is H and Rd is C1-4alkyl (e.g., methyl);

    • 1.83 a compound of Formula I or any of formulae 1.33-1.82, wherein
      • Alk is C1-6alkylene (e.g., ethylene, n-propylene, n-butylene, n-pentylene) optionally substituted with one or more C1-4alkyl, —N(Rc)(Rd); or
      • Alk is C1-6alkylene (e.g., n-propylene, n-butylene, n-pentylene) optionally substituted with one hydroxy or C1-4alkoxy group;
      • X is a single bond, —S— or —O—;
      • A is aryl (e.g., phenyl) or aryl-C1-4alkyl (e.g., benzyl), wherein the aryl group of aryl or arylalkyl is optionally substituted with one or more C1-4alkyl (e.g., methyl), C1-4alkoxy (e.g., methoxy), hydroxy, —O—C1-4alkyl-N(Rc)(Rd), halo (e.g., Cl, F), haloC1-4alkyl (e.g., CF3), —O-haloC1-4alkyl (e.g., —OCF3);
      • R1 is H, C1-4alkyl (e.g., methyl) or C1-4alkoxy (e.g., methoxy);
      • R2 is H, C1-4alkyl (e.g., methyl), —C0-4alkyl-C3-8cycloalkyl (e.g., cyclopropyl), C1-4alkoxy (e.g., methoxy), halo (e.g., Cl), C3-8heterocycloalkyl (e.g., pyrrolidinyl, for example pyrrolidin-1-yl) wherein said heterocycloalkyl is optionally substituted with one or more hydroxy; or
      • Optionally, R1 and R2 are linked together to form a cyclic structure (e.g., R1 and R2 are linked together to from ethylenedioxy);
      • Rc and Rd are independently H or C1-4alkyl (e.g., methyl);

    • 1.84 a compound of Formula I or any of formulae 1.33-1.82, wherein
      • Alk is C2-5alkylene (e.g., ethylene, n-propylene, n-butylene, n-pentylene) optionally substituted with one or more C1-4alkyl, —N(Rc)(Rd); or
      • Alk is C2-5alkylene (e.g., n-propylene, n-butylene, n-pentylene) optionally substituted with one hydroxy or C1-4alkoxy group;
      • X is a single bond, —S— or —O—;
      • A is aryl (e.g., phenyl) or aryl-C1-4alkyl (e.g., benzyl), wherein the aryl group of aryl or arylalkyl is optionally substituted with one or more C1-4alkyl (e.g., methyl), C1-4alkoxy (e.g., methoxy), hydroxy, —O—C1-4alkyl-N(Rc)(Rd), halo (e.g., Cl, F), haloC1-4alkyl (e.g., CF3), —O-haloC1-4alkyl (e.g., —OCF3);
      • R1 is H, C1-4alkyl (e.g., methyl) or C1-4alkoxy (e.g., methoxy);
      • R2 is H, C1-4alkyl (e.g., methyl), —C0-4alkyl-C3-8cycloalkyl (e.g., cyclopropyl), —C1-4alkyl-N(Ra)(Rb), C1-4alkoxy (e.g., methoxy), halo (e.g., Cl), C3-8heterocycloalkyl (e.g., pyrrolidinyl, for example pyrrolidin-1-yl) wherein said heterocycloalkyl is optionally substituted with one or more hydroxy; or
      • Optionally, R1 and R2 are linked together to form a cyclic structure (e.g., R1 and R2 are linked together to from ethylenedioxy);
      • Ra and Rb are independently H, C1-4alkyl (e.g., methyl), C3-8cycloalkyl (e.g., cyclopropyl, cyclopentyl), C1-4alkoxy-C1-4alkyl (e.g., methoxyethyl), hydroxy-C1-4alkyl (e.g., hydroxyethyl), N(Rc)(Rd)—C1-4alkyl (e.g., dimethylaminoethyl);
      • Rc and Rd are independently H or C1-4alkyl (e.g., methyl);

    • 1.85 a compound of Formula I or any of formulae 1.33-1.82, wherein R2 is:
      • H, C1-4alkyl (e.g., methyl), —C0-4alkyl-C3-8cycloalkyl (e.g., cyclopropyl), —C1alkyl-N(Ra)(Rb), C1-4alkoxy (e.g., methoxy), halo (e.g., Cl), C3-8heterocycloalkyl (e.g., pyrrolidinyl, for example pyrrolidin-1-yl) wherein said heterocycloalkyl is optionally substituted with one or more hydroxy;

    • 1.86 a compound of Formula I or any of formulae 1.33-1.82, wherein
      • Alk is C3-4alkylene (e.g., n-propylene, n-butylene) optionally substituted with one or more C1-4alkyl, —N(Rc)(Rd); or
      • Alk is C3-4alkylene (e.g., n-propylene, n-butylene) optionally substituted with one hydroxy or C1-4alkoxy group;
      • X is a single bond, —S— or —O—;
      • A is aryl (e.g., phenyl) optionally substituted with one or more C1-4alkyl (e.g., methyl), C1-4alkoxy (e.g., methoxy), hydroxy, —O—C1-4alkyl-N(Rc)(Rd), halo (e.g., Cl, F), haloC1-4alkyl (e.g., CF3), —O-haloC1-4alkyl (e.g., —OCF3);
      • R1 is H, C1-4alkyl (e.g., methyl) or C1-4alkoxy (e.g., methoxy);
      • R2 is H, C1-4alkyl (e.g., methyl), —C0-4alkyl-C3-8cycloalkyl (e.g., cyclopropyl) or halo (e.g., Cl);
      • Rc and Rd are independently H or C1-4alkyl (e.g., methyl);

    • 1.87 a compound of Formula I or any of formulae 1.33-1.82, wherein
      • Alk is C3-4alkylene (e.g., n-propylene, n-butylene) optionally substituted with one or more C1-4alkyl, —N(Rc)(Rd); or
      • Alk is C3-4alkylene (e.g., n-propylene, n-butylene) optionally substituted with one hydroxy or C1-4alkoxy group;
      • X is a single bond, —S— or —O—;
      • A is phenyl optionally substituted with one or more C1-4alkyl (e.g., methyl), C1-4alkoxy (e.g., methoxy), hydroxy, —O—C1-4alkyl-N(Rc)(Rd), halo (e.g., Cl, F), haloC1-4alkyl (e.g., CF3), —O-haloC1-4alkyl (e.g., —OCF3);
      • R1 is H, C1-4alkyl (e.g., methyl) or C1-4alkoxy (e.g., methoxy);
      • R2 is H, C1-4alkyl (e.g., methyl), —C0-4alkyl-C3-8cycloalkyl (e.g., cyclopropyl) or halo (e.g., Cl);
      • Rc and Rd are independently H or C1-4alkyl (e.g., methyl);

    • 1.88 a compound of Formula I or any of formulae 1.33-1.82, wherein
      • Alk is C3-4alkylene (e.g., n-propylene, n-butylene) optionally substituted with one or more C1-4alkyl, —N(Rc)(Rd); or
      • Alk is C3-4alkylene (e.g., n-propylene, n-butylene) optionally substituted with one hydroxy or C1-4alkoxy group;
      • X is a single bond;
      • A is aryl (e.g., phenyl) optionally substituted with one or more C1-4alkyl (e.g., methyl), C1-4alkoxy (e.g., methoxy), hydroxy, —O—C1-4alkyl-N(Rc)(Rd), halo (e.g., Cl, F), haloC1-4alkyl (e.g., CF3), —O-haloC1-4alkyl (e.g., —OCF3);
      • R1 is H or C1-4alkyl (e.g., methyl);
      • R2 is H, C1-4alkyl (e.g., methyl), —C0-4alkyl-C3-8cycloalkyl (e.g., cyclopropyl) or halo (e.g., Cl);
      • Rc and Rd are independently H or C1-4alkyl (e.g., methyl);

    • 1.89 a compound of Formula I or any of formulae 1.33-1.82, wherein
      • Alk is C3-4alkylene (e.g., n-propylene, n-butylene);
      • X is a single bond;
      • A is aryl (e.g., phenyl) optionally substituted with one or more C1-4alkyl (e.g., methyl), C1-4alkoxy (e.g., methoxy), hydroxy, —O—C1-4alkyl-N(Rc)(Rd), halo (e.g., Cl, F), haloC1-4alkyl (e.g., CF3), —O-haloC1-4alkyl (e.g., —OCF3);
      • R1 is H or C1-4alkyl (e.g., methyl);
      • R2 is H, C1-4alkyl (e.g., methyl), —C0-4alkyl-C3-8cycloalkyl (e.g., cyclopropyl) or halo (e.g., Cl);
      • Rc and Rd are independently H or C1-4alkyl (e.g., methyl);

    • 1.90 a compound of Formula I or any of formulae 1.33-1.82, wherein
      • Alk is C3-4alkylene (e.g., n-propylene, n-butylene);
      • X is a single bond;
      • A is aryl (e.g., phenyl);
      • R1 is H or C1-4alkyl (e.g., methyl);
      • R2 is H, C1-4alkyl (e.g., methyl), —C0-4alkyl-C3-8cycloalkyl (e.g., cyclopropyl) or halo (e.g., Cl);

    • 1.91 a compound of Formula I or any of formulae 1.33-1.82, wherein
      • Alk is C3-4alkylene (e.g., n-propylene, n-butylene);
      • X is a single bond;
      • A is aryl (e.g., phenyl);
      • R1 is C1-4alkyl (e.g., methyl);
      • R2 is C1-4alkyl (e.g., methyl) or —C0-4alkyl-C3-8cycloalkyl (e.g., cyclopropyl);

    • 1.92 a compound of Formula I or any of formulae 1.33-1.82, wherein
      • Alk is C3-4alkylene (e.g., n-propylene, n-butylene);
      • X is —S—;
      • A is aryl (e.g., phenyl) optionally substituted with one or more C1-4alkyl (e.g., methyl) or halo (e.g., Cl, F);
      • R1 is C1-4alkyl (e.g., methyl);
      • R2 is C1-4alkyl (e.g., methyl) or —C0-4alkyl-C3-8cycloalkyl (e.g., cyclopropyl);

    • 1.93 a compound of Formula I or any of formulae 1.33-1.82, wherein
      • Alk is C3-4alkylene (e.g., n-propylene, n-butylene);
      • X is a single bond;
      • A is aryl (e.g., phenyl) optionally substituted with one or more C1-4alkyl (e.g., methyl) or halo (e.g., Cl, F);
      • R1 is H or C1-4alkyl (e.g., methyl);
      • R2 is —C0-4alkyl-C3-8cycloalkyl (e.g., cyclopropyl);

    • 1.94 a compound of Formula I or any of formulae 1.33-1.82, wherein
      • Alk is C3-4alkylene (e.g., n-propylene, n-butylene);
      • X is a single bond;
      • A is aryl (e.g., phenyl) substituted with one or more C1-4alkyl (e.g., methyl) or halo (e.g., Cl, F);
      • R1 is H or C1-4alkyl (e.g., methyl);
      • R2 is H, C1-4alkyl (e.g., methyl), —C0-4alkyl-C3-8cycloalkyl (e.g., cyclopropyl);

    • 1.95 a compound of Formula I or any of formulae 1.33-1.82, wherein
      • Alk is C3-4alkylene (e.g., n-propylene, n-butylene);
      • X is a single bond;
      • A is aryl (e.g., phenyl) substituted with one or more methyl, Cl or F;
      • R1 is H or C1-4alkyl (e.g., methyl);
      • R2 is H, C1-4alkyl (e.g., methyl) or —C0-4alkyl-C3-8cycloalkyl (e.g., cyclopropyl);

    • 1.96 a compound of Formula I or any of formulae 1.33-1.82, wherein
      • Alk is C3-4alkylene (e.g., n-propylene, n-butylene);
      • X is a single bond;
      • A is 4-chlorophenyl, 3-chloromethyl or 4-methylphenyl;
      • R1 is H or C1-4alkyl (e.g., methyl);
      • R2 is H, C1-4alkyl (e.g., methyl) or —C0-4alkyl-C3-8cycloalkyl (e.g., cyclopropyl);

    • 1.97 any of formulae 1.33-1.96, wherein the compound of Formula I is selected from any of the following:







embedded image


embedded image


embedded image


embedded image


embedded image


embedded image


embedded image


embedded image


embedded image


embedded image


embedded image


embedded image


embedded image




    • 1.98 any of formulae 1.33-1.96, wherein the compound of Formula I is selected from any of the following:







embedded image


embedded image


embedded image


embedded image


embedded image


embedded image


embedded image


embedded image


embedded image




    • 1.99 any of formulae 1.33-1.96, wherein the compound of Formula I is selected from any of the following:







embedded image


embedded image


embedded image


embedded image




    • 1.100 any of formulae 1.33-1.96, selected from any of the following:







embedded image


embedded image


embedded image




    • 1.101 any of formulae 1.33-1.96, selected from any of the following:







embedded image


embedded image


embedded image


embedded image


embedded image


embedded image


embedded image


embedded image




    • 1.102 formula 1.101, wherein the compound of Formula I is selected from any of the following:







embedded image


embedded image


embedded image


embedded image


embedded image




    • 1.103 a compound of Formula I or any of formulae 1.33-1.98, wherein the compound of Formula I is selected from any of the following:







embedded image


embedded image


embedded image


embedded image


embedded image


embedded image




    • 1.104 Formula 1.103, wherein the compound of Formula I is selected from any of the following:







embedded image


embedded image




    • 1.105 any of formulae 1.33-1.96, wherein the compound of Formula I is selected from any of the following:







embedded image




    • 1.106 any of the preceding formulae wherein the compound of Formula I binds to FMN and/or CD3299 riboswitch, e.g., with an Imax of greater than 20%, preferably greater than 30%, more preferably greater than 40%, still more preferably greater than 50% in an assay, for example, as described in Example A, and/or has a Minimum Inhibitory Concentration (MIC) of less than or equal to 64 μg/mL, more preferably less than or equal to 32 μg/mL, for example, in an assay as described in Example B,





in free or salt form.


The invention also relates to a compound of Formula Q, wherein the substituents are as defined in any of formulae 1.33-1.106, in free or salt form (Formula 1.107).


In the first aspect, the invention provides a compound of formula P, or any of P.1-P.17, or Formula Q, or any of formulae 1.1-1.32 or 1.107, in free or salt form as hereinbefore described provided that (1) when -Alk-X-A is —CH2CH2-phenyl or —CH2CH2—O-phenyl, R1 and R2 are not both H; (2) when -Alk-X-A is —CH2CH2-(3-methoxyphenyl), then R1 and R2 are not both methyl; or (3) when R2 is —C(O)OEt and -Alk-X-A is phenylethyl, then R1 is C1-6alkyl, e.g., C1-4alkyl (for example, methyl, ethyl, n-propyl, isopropyl, n-prop-2-enyl, n-butyl, n-but-2-en-yl or n-hexyl), C3-8cycloalkyl (e.g., cyclopropyl), or C1-4alkoxy (e.g., methoxy).


In a further embodiment of the first aspect, the invention provides a compound of formula I, or any of formulae 1.33-1.106, in free or salt form as hereinbefore described provided that (1) when -Alk-X-A is —CH2CH2-phenyl or —CH2CH2—O-phenyl, R1 and R2 are not both H; or (2) when -Alk-X-A is —CH2CH2-(3-methoxyphenyl), —CH2CH2-(3,4,5-trimethoxyphenyl), —CH2CH2CH2-(2,5-dimethoxyphenyl) or —CH2CH2CH2-(2,5-dihydroxyphenyl), R1 and R2 are not both methyl.


In the second aspect, the invention provides a compound of Formula II″:




embedded image


wherein:

    • (i) Alk is C1-6alkylene (e.g., n-propylene, n-butylene, n-pentylene) optionally substituted with one or more C1-6alkyl (e.g., methyl) or one hydroxy or C1-4alkoxy group;
    • (ii) X is a single bond, —S— or —O—;
    • (iii) A is aryl (e.g., phenyl) or heteroaryl (e.g. pyridinyl) optionally substituted with one or more C1-4alkyl (e.g., methyl), C1-4alkoxy (e.g., methoxy), hydroxy, halo (e.g., Cl, F), haloC1-4alkyl (e.g., CF3), —O-haloC1-4alkyl (e.g., —OCF3);
    • (iv) R1 is H, C1-4alkyl (e.g., methyl), or C1-4alkoxy (e.g., methoxy);
    • (v) R2 is H, C1-4alkyl (e.g., methyl), C1-4alkoxy (e.g., methoxy), halo (e.g., Cl), C3-8cycloalkyl-C1-4alkyl, —C1-4alkyl-N(Ra)(Rb), (C1-4alkoxy)-C1-4alkyl, (2-C1-4alkoxyethoxy)-C1-4alkyl;
    • (vi) R3 is H, C1-4alkyl (e.g., methyl);
    • (vii) R4 is H, C1-4alkyl (e.g., methyl);
    • (viii) Ra and Rb are independently H, C1-4alkyl (e.g., methyl) or C3-8cycloalkyl (e.g., cyclopropyl, cyclopentyl),


      in free or salt form.


In the second aspect, the invention provides a compound of Formula II:




embedded image


wherein:

    • (i) Alk is C1-6alkylene (e.g., n-propylene, n-butylene, n-pentylene) optionally substituted with one hydroxy or C1-4alkoxy group;
    • (ii) X is a single bond, —S— or —O—;
    • (iii) A is aryl (e.g., phenyl) or heteroaryl (e.g. pyridinyl) optionally substituted with one or more C1-4alkyl (e.g., methyl), C1-4alkoxy (e.g., methoxy), hydroxy, halo (e.g., Cl, F), haloC1-4alkyl (e.g., CF3), —O-haloC1-4alkyl (e.g., —OCF3);
    • (iv) R1 is H, C1-4alkyl (e.g., methyl), or C1-4alkoxy (e.g., methoxy);
    • (v) R2 is H, C1-4alkyl (e.g., methyl), C1-4alkoxy (e.g., methoxy), halo (e.g., Cl), C3-8cycloalkyl-C1-4alkyl, —C1-4alkyl-N(Ra)(Rb), (C alkoxy)-C1-4alkyl, (2-C1-4alkoxyethoxy)-C1-4alkyl;
    • (vi) R3 is H, C1-4alkyl (e.g., methyl);
    • (vii) R4 is H, C1-4alkyl (e.g., methyl);
    • (viii) Ra and Rb are independently H, C1-4alkyl (e.g., methyl) or C3-8cycloalkyl (e.g., cyclopropyl, cyclopentyl),


      in free or salt form.


In a further embodiment of the second aspect, the invention provides a compound of the following formulae:

    • 2.1 a compound of Formula II, wherein Alk is C1-6alkylene (e.g., n-propylene, n-butylene, n-pentylene) optionally substituted with one hydroxy or C1-4 alkoxy group;
    • 2.2 a compound of Formula II or 2.1, wherein Alk is n-propylene;
    • 2.3 a compound of Formula II or 2.1 or 2.2, wherein X is a single bond, —S— or —O—;
    • 2.4 a compound of Formula II or any of 2.1-2.3, wherein X is a single bond, wherein said compound is represented by a compound of formula II′;




embedded image




    • 2.5 a compound of Formula II or any of 2.1-2.4, wherein A is aryl (e.g., phenyl) or heteroaryl (e.g. pyridinyl) optionally substituted with one or more C1-4alkyl (e.g., methyl), C1-4alkoxy (e.g., methoxy), hydroxy, halo (e.g., Cl, F), haloC1-4alkyl (e.g., CF3), —O-haloC1-4alkyl (e.g., —OCF3);

    • 2.6 a compound of Formula II or any of 2.1-2.5, wherein A is aryl (e.g., phenyl);

    • 2.7 a compound of Formula II or any of 2.1-2.6, wherein A is phenyl;

    • 2.8 a compound of Formula II or any of 2.1-2.7, wherein R1 is H, C1-4alkyl (e.g., methyl), or C1-4alkoxy (e.g., methoxy);

    • 2.9 a compound of Formula II or any of 2.1-2.8, wherein R1 is C1-4alkyl (e.g., methyl);

    • 2.10 a compound of Formula II or any of 2.1-2.9, wherein R1 is methyl;

    • 2.11 a compound of Formula II or any of 2.1-2.10, wherein R2 is H, C1-4alkyl (e.g., methyl), C1-4alkoxy (e.g., methoxy), halo (e.g., Cl), C3-8cycloalkyl-C1-4alkyl, —C1-4alkyl-N(Ra)(Rb), (C1-4alkoxy)-C1-4alkyl, (2-C1-4-alkoxyethoxy)-C1-4alkyl;

    • 2.12 a compound of Formula II or any of 2.1-2.10, wherein R2 is H, C1-4alkyl (e.g., methyl), C1-4alkoxy (e.g., methoxy), halo (e.g., Cl), C3-8cycloalkyl-C1-4alkyl, —C1alkyl-N(Ra)(Rb), (C1-4alkoxy)-C1-4alkyl, (2-C1-4-alkoxyethoxy)-C1-4alkyl;

    • 2.13 a compound of Formula II or any of 2.1-2.11, wherein R2 is methyl;

    • 2.14 a compound of Formula II or any of 2.1-2.13, wherein R3 is H, C1-4alkyl (e.g., methyl);

    • 2.15 a compound of Formula II or any of 2.1-2.14, wherein R3 is H,

    • 2.16 a compound of Formula II or any of 2.1-2.15, wherein R4 is H, C1-4alkyl (e.g., methyl);

    • 2.17 a compound of Formula II or any of 2.1-2.16, wherein R4 is H,

    • 2.18 a compound of Formula II or any of 2.1-2.17, wherein:
      • Alk is C1-6alkylene (e.g., n-propylene, n-butylene, n-pentylene) optionally substituted with one hydroxy or C1-4alkoxy group;
      • X is a single bond, —S— or —O—;
      • A is aryl (e.g., phenyl) optionally substituted with one or more C1-4alkyl (e.g., methyl), C1-4alkoxy (e.g., methoxy), hydroxy, halo (e.g., Cl, F), haloC1-4alkyl (e.g., CF3), —O-haloC1-4alkyl (e.g., —OCF3);
      • R1 is C1-4alkyl (e.g., methyl);
      • R2 is C1-4alkyl (e.g., methyl);
      • R3 is H;
      • R4 is H,

    • 2.19 a compound of Formula II or any of 2.1-2.18, wherein:
      • Alk is C1-6alkylene (e.g., n-propylene, n-butylene, n-pentylene) optionally substituted with one hydroxy or C1-4alkoxy group;
      • X is a single bond;
      • A is aryl (e.g., phenyl) optionally substituted with one or more C1-4alkyl (e.g., methyl), C1-4alkoxy (e.g., methoxy), hydroxy, halo (e.g., Cl, F), haloC1-4alkyl (e.g., CF3), —O-haloC1-4alkyl (e.g., —OCF3);
      • R1 is C1-4alkyl (e.g., methyl);
      • R2 is C1-4alkyl (e.g., methyl);
      • R3 is H;
      • R4 is H,

    • 2.20 a compound of Formula II or any of 2.1-2.19, wherein:
      • Alk is C1-6alkylene (e.g., n-propylene, n-butylene, n-pentylene);
      • X is a single bond;
      • A is aryl (e.g., phenyl);
      • R1 is C1-4alkyl (e.g., methyl);
      • R2 is C1-4alkyl (e.g., methyl);
      • R3 is H;
      • R4 is H,

    • 2.21 any of the preceding formulae, wherein the compound of Formula II is







embedded image




    • 2.22 any of the preceding formulae, wherein the compound of Formula II binds to FMN and/or CD3299 riboswitch, e.g., with an Imax of greater than 20%, preferably greater than 30%, more preferably greater than 40%, still more preferably greater than 50% in an assay, for example, as described in Example A, and/or has a Minimum Inhibitory Concentration (MIC) of less than or equal to 64 μg/mL, more preferably less than or equal to 32 μg/mL, still more preferably less than or equal to 16 μg/mL, most preferably less than or equal to 8 μg/mL, for example, in an assay as described in Example B,


      in free or salt form.





In a further embodiment of the second aspect, the invention provides a compound according to formula II″ wherein the substituents are as described in any one of formulae 2.1-2.22.


In the third aspect, the invention provides a pharmaceutical composition comprising a compound of Formula P, e.g., any of P.1-P.17, or Formula Q, e.g., any of formulae 1.1-1.32 or 1.107, in free or pharmaceutically acceptable salt form in admixture with a pharmaceutically acceptable diluent or carrier. In a further embodiment of the third aspect, the invention provides a pharmaceutical composition comprising a compound of Formula I, e.g., any of formulae 1.33-1.106, in free or pharmaceutically acceptable salt form in admixture with a pharmaceutically acceptable diluent or carrier. In another embodiment of the third aspect, the invention provides a pharmaceutical composition comprising a compound of Formula II″ or II, e.g., any of formulae 2.1-2.22, in free or pharmaceutically acceptable salt form in admixture with a pharmaceutically acceptable diluent or carrier.


In the fourth aspect, the invention provides a method for the treatment or prophylaxis of a bacterial infection (Method P or Q respectively) comprising administering to a subject in need thereof an effective amount of a compound of Formula P, e.g., any of P.1-P.17, or Formula Q, e.g., any of formulae 1.1-1.32 or 1.107, in free or pharmaceutically acceptable salt form. In a further embodiment of the fourth aspect, the invention provides a method for the treatment or prophylaxis of a bacterial infection (Method I) comprising administering to a subject in need thereof an effective amount of a compound of Formula I, e.g., any of formulae 1.33-1.106, in free or pharmaceutically acceptable salt form. In still another embodiment of the fourth aspect, the invention provides a method for the treatment or prophylaxis of a bacterial infection (Method II) comprising administering to a subject in need thereof an effective amount of a compound of Formula II″ or II, e.g., any of formulae 2.1-2.22, in free or pharmaceutically acceptable salt form.


In a further embodiment of the fourth aspect, Methods P, Q, I and II as hereinbefore described, are useful for the treatment or prophylaxis of a Gram-positive or Gram-negative bacterial infection (Method P-A, Method Q-A, Method I-A or Method II-A respectively). In another specific embodiment, Method P, Method Q, Method I and Method II are useful for treating a bacterial infection including, but not limited to an infection by one or more of the following bacteria: Clostridium difficile (or C. difficile), Staphylococcus epidermidis, Staphylococcus aureus, Streptococcus pneumoniae, Pseudomonas aeruginosa, Acinetobacter baumannii, Escherichia coli, Haemophilus influenzae, Enterococcus faecalis, Streptococcus pyogenes, Listeria monocytogenes, Salmonella enterica, Vibrio cholerae, Brucella melitensis, Bacillus anthracis, Francisella tularensis, Moraxella catarrhalis, Klebsiella pneumoniae, Yersinia pestis, Streptococcus viridans, Enterococcus faecium, and/or Borrelia burgdorferi bacteria (Method P-B, Method Q-B, Method I-B or Method II-B respectively). Patients taking antibiotics, particularly those with a broad spectrum activity, are particularly vulnerable to C. difficile infection as a result of the use of antibiotics which disrupts the normal intestinal flora, leading to an overgrowth of C. difficile, causing an infection ranging from asymptomatic to severe and life-threatening condition. Various Compounds of the Invention, e.g., various compounds of Formula P, Q, I, II″ and II, particularly any compounds of any of Formulae P.17, 1.31, 1.101-1.102, 1.105 and 2.21 are particularly active against the CD3299 riboswitch and selectively inhibit C. difficile bacteria. Therefore, in a particular embodiment, Method P, Q, I and II, e.g., comprising administering a compound of any of Formulae P.17, 1.31, 1.101-1.102, 1.105 and 2.21 are particularly useful for treating an infection caused by Clostridium difficile. Further, various compounds of the invention, e.g., various compounds of Formula P, Formula Q or Formula I, particularly any compounds of Formula 1.103, 1.104 or 1.105 are also active against FMN riboswitch. Compounds which are active against FMN riboswitch are generally also active against Staphylococcus aureus and/or Clostridium difficile infections. Therefore, in particular embodiment, these compounds are especially useful for the treatment of a Staphylococcus aureus and/or Clostridium difficile infection.


In still another embodiment of the fourth aspect, Method P as hereinbefore described is useful for the treatment or prophylaxis of a disease, infection or condition selected from a group consisting of anthrax, staphylococcal scalded skin syndrome (staph infections), pneumonia, impetigo, boils, cellulitis, folliculitis, furuncles, carbuncles, scalded skin syndrome, abscesses, meningitis, osteomyelitis endocarditis, Toxic Shock Syndrome (TSS), septicemia, acute sinusitis, otitis media, septic arthritis, endocarditis, peritonitis, pericarditis, brain abscess, tularemia, urinary tract infection, empyema, food poisoning, diarrhea, conjunctivitis and clostridium difficile associated disease (CDAD), comprising administering to a subject in need thereof an effective amount of a compound of Formula P, e.g., any of formulae P.1-P.17, in free or pharmaceutically acceptable salt form (Method P-D).


In yet another embodiment of the fourth aspect, Method Q as hereinbefore described is useful for the treatment or prophylaxis of a disease, infection or condition selected from a group consisting of anthrax, staphylococcal scalded skin syndrome (staph infections), pneumonia, impetigo, boils, cellulitis, folliculitis, furuncles, carbuncles, scalded skin syndrome, abscesses, meningitis, osteomyelitis endocarditis, Toxic Shock Syndrome (TSS), septicemia, acute sinusitis, otitis media, septic arthritis, endocarditis, peritonitis, pericarditis, brain abscess, tularemia, urinary tract infection, empyema, food poisoning, diarrhea, conjunctivitis and clostridium difficile associated disease (CDAD), comprising administering to a subject in need thereof an effective amount of a compound of Formula Q, e.g., any of formulae 1.1-1.32 or 1.107, in free or pharmaceutically acceptable salt form (Method Q-D).


In still another embodiment of the fourth aspect, Method I as hereinbefore described is useful for the treatment or prophylaxis of a disease, infection or condition selected from a group consisting of anthrax, staphylococcal scalded skin syndrome (staph infections), pneumonia, impetigo, boils, cellulitis, folliculitis, furuncles, carbuncles, scalded skin syndrome, abscesses, meningitis, osteomyelitis endocarditis, Toxic Shock Syndrome (TSS), septicemia, acute sinusitis, otitis media, septic arthritis, endocarditis, peritonitis, pericarditis, brain abscess, tularemia, urinary tract infection, empyema, food poisoning, diarrhea, conjunctivitis and clostridium difficile associated disease (CDAD), comprising administering to a subject in need thereof an effective amount of a compound of Formula I, e.g., any of formulae 1.33-1.106, in free or pharmaceutically acceptable salt form (Method I-D).


In still another embodiment of the fourth aspect, Method II as hereinbefore described is useful for the treatment or prophylaxis of a disease, infection or condition selected from a group consisting of anthrax, staphylococcal scalded skin syndrome (staph infections), pneumonia, impetigo, boils, cellulitis, folliculitis, furuncles, carbuncles, scalded skin syndrome, abscesses, meningitis, osteomyelitis endocarditis, Toxic Shock Syndrome (TSS), septicemia, acute sinusitis, otitis media, septic arthritis, endocarditis, peritonitis, pericarditis, brain abscess, tularemia, urinary tract infection, empyema, food poisoning, diarrhea, conjunctivitis and clostridium difficile associated disease (CDAD), comprising administering to a subject in need thereof an effective amount of a compound of Formula II″ or II, e.g., any of formulae 2.1-2.22, in free or pharmaceutically acceptable salt form (Method II-D).


Without being bound to any particular theory, it is believed that the current invention provides methods of treating a bacterial infection via a novel mechanism, e.g., by utilizing riboswitch-ligand binding to alter gene expression. Therefore in one aspect, various compounds of the invention bind to FMN riboswitches, thereby affecting downstream riboflavin biosynthesis. In another aspect, various compounds of the invention are active against the CD3299 riboswitch, thereby affecting expression of the adjacent coding region. Compounds that are active against CD3299 and/or FMN riboswitch are particularly selective against C. difficile. As such, various Compounds of the Invention, e.g., various compounds of Formula P, e.g., various compounds of any of formulae P.1-P.17, particularly any compounds of Formule P.15-P.17, or Formula Q, e.g., various compounds of formulae 1.1-1.32 or 1.107, particularly any compounds of formulae 1.28-1.31; various compounds of Formula I, e.g., various compounds of formulae 1.33-1.106, particularly any of formulae 1.103, 1.104 or 1.105; and various compounds of Formula II″ or II, e.g., various compounds of formulae 2.1-2.22, particularly formula 2.21, in free or pharmaceutically acceptable salt form, are effective in treating an infection wherein traditional antibiotics are rendered ineffective due to drug resistance. Therefore, in a particular embodiment, the invention provides Method P, e.g., any of Methods P-A to P-D, or Method Q or any of Methods Q-A to Q-D or Method I or any of Methods I-A to I-D or Method II or any of Methods II-A to II-D as hereinbefore described wherein the infection is by an infectious agent which is resistant to a drug that is not a riboswitch ligand (Method P-E, Method Q-E, Method I-E or Method II-E respectively). In a further embodiment, various compounds of Formula P, Formula Q, Formula I, Formula II″ or Formula II, particularly any of formulae 1.103, 1.104 or 1.105 or 2.21, in free or pharmaceutically acceptable salt form are particularly useful for an infection which is resistant to one or more drugs selected from a group consisting of a penicillin, vancomycin, cephalosporin and methicillin. In a particular embodiment, the infection is a methicillin-resistant Staphylococcus aureus infection. In another embodiment, the infection to be treated in Method P, Method Q, Method I or Method II is a C. difficile infection. In a particular embodiment, various compounds of Formula P, Q, I, II″ or II, particularly any of formulae P.15-P.17, 1.28-1.30, 1.31, 1.101, 1.102, 1.105 or 2.21, in free or pharmaceutically acceptable salt form are particularly useful for the C. difficile infection which is resistant to any drug that is not a riboswitch ligand, e.g., fluoroquinolone (e.g., ciprofloxacin- and/or levofloxacin-resistant infection), metronidazole and/or vancomycin.


It will be noted that various compounds of the Invention have a low CC50 value in an assay as disclosed in Example C and therefore, may have anti-metabolite activities which may interfere with DNA biosynthesis. Therefore, in one embodiment, these compounds may be useful as an anti-cancer or anti-viral agent. In another embodiment, the compounds that have a low MIC and/or a high Imax value in an assay as disclosed in Example B and A respectively, and a low CC50 value in an assay as disclosed in Example C are used as an antibacterial, for topical administration.


In the fifth aspect, the invention provides use of a compound, or use of a pharmaceutical composition comprising a compound, of Formula P, e.g., any of P.1-P.17, in free or pharmaceutically acceptable salt form, (in the manufacture of a medicament) for the treatment or prophylaxis of an infection, e.g., a bacterial infection as described in Methods P, or any of Methods P-A through P-E. In another embodiment, the invention provides use of a compound, or use of a pharmaceutical composition comprising a compound, of Formula Q, e.g., any of formulae 1.1-1.32 or 1.107, in free or pharmaceutically acceptable salt form, (in the manufacture of a medicament) for the treatment or prophylaxis of an infection, e.g., a bacterial infection as described in Methods Q, or any of Methods Q-A through Q-E. In another embodiment of the fifth aspect, the invention provides use of a compound, or use of a pharmaceutical composition comprising a compound, of Formula I, e.g., any of formulae 1.33-1.106, in free or pharmaceutically acceptable salt form, (in the manufacture of a medicament) for the treatment or prophylaxis of an infection, e.g., a bacterial infection as described in Methods I, or any of Methods I-A through I-E. In still another embodiment of the fifth aspect, the invention provides use of a compound, or use of a pharmaceutical composition comprising a compound, of Formula II″ or II, e.g., any of formulae 2.1-2.22, in free or pharmaceutically acceptable salt form, (in the manufacture of a medicament) for the treatment or prophylaxis of an infection, e.g., a bacterial infection as described in Methods II, or any of Methods II-A through II-E.


In the sixth aspect, the invention provides use of a compound, or use of a pharmaceutical composition comprising a compound, of Formula P, e.g., any of P.1-P.17, in free or pharmaceutically acceptable salt form, (in the manufacture of a medicament) for the treatment or prophylaxis of an infection, e.g., a bacterial infection as described in Methods Q, or any of Methods Q-A through Q-E. In another embodiment, the invention provides use of a compound, or use of a pharmaceutical composition comprising a compound, of Formula Q, e.g., any of formulae 1.1-1.32 or 1.107, in free or pharmaceutically acceptable salt form, for the treatment or prophylaxis of an infection, e.g., a bacterial infection as described in Methods Q, or any of Methods Q-A through Q-E. In another embodiment of the sixth aspect, the invention provides use of a compound or use of a pharmaceutical composition comprising a compound of Formula I, e.g., any of formulae 1.33-1.106, in free or pharmaceutically acceptable salt form, for the treatment or prophylaxis of an infection, e.g., a bacterial infection as described in Methods I, or any of Methods I-A through I-E. In still another embodiment of the sixth aspect, the invention provides use of a compound or use of a pharmaceutical composition comprising a compound of Formula II″ or II, e.g., any of formulae 2.1-2.22, in free or pharmaceutically acceptable salt form, for the treatment or prophylaxis of an infection, e.g., a bacterial infection as described in Methods II, or any of Methods II-A through II-E.


In the seventh aspect, the invention provides a method for the treatment of an infection in a plant comprising administering to such plant an effective amount of a compound of Formula P, e.g., any of P.1-P.17, in free or pharmaceutically acceptable salt form. In another embodiment, the invention provides a method for the treatment of an infection in a plant comprising administering to such plant an effective amount of a compound of Formula Q, e.g., any of formulae 1.1-1.32 or 1.107, in free or pharmaceutically acceptable salt form. In another embodiment of the seventh aspect, the invention provides a method for the treatment of an infection in a plant comprising administering to such plant an effective amount of a compound of Formula I, e.g., any of formulae 1.33-1.106, in free or pharmaceutically acceptable salt form. In yet another embodiment of the seventh aspect, the invention provides a method for the treatment of an infection in a plant comprising administering to such plant an effective amount of a compound of Formula II″ or II, e.g., any of formulae 2.1-2.22, in free or pharmaceutically acceptable salt form.


In the eighth aspect, the invention provides a pharmaceutical composition comprising a compound of Formula P, e.g., any of P.1-P.17, in free or pharmaceutically acceptable salt form, for use in the treatment of any disease or condition as hereinbefore described, e.g., in any of Methods P or Methods P-A through P-E. In another embodiment, the invention also provides a pharmaceutical composition comprising a compound of Formula Q, e.g., any of formulae 1.1-1.32 or 1.107, in free or pharmaceutically acceptable salt form, for use in the treatment of any disease or condition as hereinbefore described, e.g., in any of Methods Q or Methods Q-A through Q-E. In another embodiment of the eighth aspect, the invention provides a pharmaceutical composition comprising a compound of Formula I, e.g., any of formulae 1.33-1.106, in free or pharmaceutically acceptable salt form, for use in the treatment of any disease or condition as hereinbefore described, e.g., in any of Methods I, or Methods I-A through 1-E. In another embodiment of the eighth aspect, the invention provides a pharmaceutical composition comprising a compound of Formula II″ or II, e.g., any of formulae 2.1-2.22, in free or pharmaceutically acceptable salt form, for use in the treatment of any disease or condition as hereinbefore described, e.g., in any of Methods II, or Methods II-A through II-E.







DETAILED DESCRIPTION OF THE INVENTION

The term “riboswitch” or “riboswitches” is an art recognized term and refers to an mRNA which comprises a natural aptamer that binds target metabolite and an expression platform which changes in the RNA structure to regulate genes. The term “riboswitch ligand” refers to any compound such as a compound of Formula P, Formula Q or Formula I, e.g., various compounds of formulae P.1-P.17, formulae 1.1-1.106, or a compound of Formula II″ or II, e.g., various compounds of formulae 2.1-2.22, in free or salt form, that binds to that particular riboswitch. For example; “FMN riboswitch” refers to a riboswitch that binds a metabolite such as flavin mono-nucleotide (FMN) or other ligands such as various compound of Formula Q, particularly various compounds of Formula P, e.g., any of P.1-P.17, particularly various compounds of Formulae P.15-P.17; or various compound of Formula Q, particularly various compounds of Formulae 1.28-1.31; or various compounds of Formula I, e.g., various compounds of any of formulae 1.33-1.106, particularly compounds of formula 1.103, 1.104 or 1.105, in free or salt form, and which affects downstream FMN biosynthesis and transport proteins. Without intended to be bound by any particular theory, it is believed the binding of the ligand to its riboswitch induces a conformational change in the bacterial mRNA such that the expression of the ORF is repressed, for example, such that the expression of enzymes responsible for, e.g., riboflavin and FMN biosynthesis is repressed. This is achieved by inducing the mRNA to form (1) a terminator hairpin that halts RNA synthesis before the ORF can be synthesized or (2) a hairpin that sequesters the Shine-Dalgarno sequence and prevents the ribosome from binding to the mRNA so as to translate the ORF.


“CD3299 riboswitch” refers to a riboswitch found in C. difficile, controlling the gene designated CD3299. The 5′UTR and beginning of ORF from CD3299 gene of C. difficile 630, accession number AM180355 is as follows:









SEQ ID NO: 1:


TTACAGCTTTCTGATTTTGATAAATTTAAAACTTACCATCTAATACTAA





TAACAGGTTAATTTTATCTAATTATTATAGATTCTCATACTGTGCCTTA





TTCTATCTATAAATACAATTTAAGTGTCCATATTGAAATATTTGTATTG





TAATACAGCTGGATATTACTTAAATCCAATTGTTTCCATTATAATTTTA





TGTTAAAATAATATTACAAAATACATCTGTTTTTCTTCATAAACGGGTG






AAATTCCCTATCGGCGGTAAAAGCCCGCGAGCCTTATGGCATAATTTGG







TCATATTCCAAAGCCAACAGTAAAATCTGGATGGTAGAAGAAAATAGTA






TATGAGTACCTTTATGTAATTTTACATGAGTAATCTATACAAATCCTTC





AACTACCGTATTTATTCATGAAATTAGACACATTCAAGcustom-character






custom-character
custom-character TTTTTTTGTTGTTTATTTTACAATTATATCGTACTT






ATAAAATCTATTAAGATTGGAGTGTTATCcustom-charactercustom-character AATGGATAG





TATTGATTATCATCTGTATTGGTGTATTTATGTCTACTCTTGATGGAAG





TATACTAAATATCGCAAA







In the above depiction of the sequence, the riboswitch is highlighted in bold, and is











SEQ ID NO: 2




GTTTTTCTTCATAAAC

GGGTG

AAATTCCCTATCGGCGGTAAAAGCC









CGCGAGCCTTATGGCATAATTTGGTCATATTCCAAAGCCAACAGTA









AAATCTGGATGGTAGAAGAAAATA








The ORF start site in the above sequence is downstream from the riboswitch and is depicted in italics and is:











SEQ ID NO: 3




custom-character
custom-character








The putative terminator hairpin is in bold italics and is:











SEQ ID NO: 4




custom-character
custom-character
custom-character








The hairpin can form a loop having a structure as depicted in Formula 1:




embedded image


A possible antiterminator has a structure as depicted in Formula 2:




embedded image


We have shown that various Compounds of the Invention, particularly compounds of Formula P.17, 1.31, 1.101 or 1.102, 1.105 or 2.21, in free or salt form, bind well to the CD3299 riboswitch and have antibacterial activity against C. difficile, provided these compounds possess physicochemical characteristics amenable to uptake into the bacteria.


The term “infection” encompasses an infection by a Gram-positive or Gram-negative bacteria. In one embodiment, the infection is by a Gram-positive bacteria. In another embodiment, the infection is by a Gram-negative bacteria. In still another embodiment, the infection is an infection by one or more bacteria selected from a group consisting of Clostridium difficile, Staphylococcus epidermidis, Staphylococcus aureus, Streptococcus pneumoniae, Pseudomonas aeruginosa, Acinetobacter baumannii, Escherichia coli, Haemophilus influenzae, Enterococcus faecalis, Streptococcus pyogenes, Listeria monocytogenes, Salmonella enterica, Vibrio cholerae, Brucella melitensis, Bacillus anthracis, Francisella tularensis, Moraxella catarrhalis, Klebsiella pneumoniae, Yersinia pestis, Streptococcus viridans, Enterococcus faecium, and/or Borrelia burgdorferi. In a further embodiment, the infection is a Clostridium difficile and/or Staphylococcus aureus infection. In a particular embodiment, the infection is an infection which is resistant to a drug which is not a riboswitch ligand. In a further aspect of this particular embodiment, the infection is an infection which is resistant to one or more drugs selected from a group consisting of penicillin, vancomycin, cephalosporin, methicillin and fluoroquinolone (e.g., ciprofloxacin- and/or levofloxacin). In a particular embodiment, the infection is a methicillin-resistant Staphylococcus aureus (MRSA) infection. In another particular embodiment, the infection is a fluoroquinolone-resistant (e.g., ciprofloxacin- and/or levofloxacin-resistant), metronidazole and/or vancomycin-resistant C. difficile infection.


The term “bacteria” or “bacterial” include, but are not limited to Clostridium difficile, Staphylococcus epidermidis, Staphylococcus aureus, Streptococcus pneumoniae, Pseudomonas aeruginosa, Acinetobacter baumannii, Escherichia coli, Haemophilus influenzae, Enterococcus faecalis, Streptococcus pyogenes, Listeria monocytogenes, Salmonella enterica, Vibrio cholerae, Brucella melitensis, Bacillus anthracis, Francisella tularensis, Moraxella catarrhalis, Klebsiella pneumoniae, Yersinia pestis, Streptococcus viridans, Enterococcus faecium, and/or Borrelia burgdorferi.


If not otherwise specified or clear from context, the following terms as used herein have the following meetings:

    • a. “Alkyl” as used herein is a saturated or unsaturated hydrocarbon moiety, preferably saturated, e.g., one to eight, e.g., one to six, e.g., one to four carbon atoms in length, which may be linear or branched (e.g., n-butyl or tert-butyl) unless otherwise specified, and may be optionally substituted, e.g., mono-, di-, or tri-substituted on any one of the carbon atoms, e.g., with C1-4alkyl (e.g., methyl), C1-4alkoxy, halogen (e.g., chloro or fluoro), haloC1-4alkyl (e.g., trifluoromethyl), hydroxy, and carboxy. For example, “C1-C8 alkyl” denotes alkyl having 1 to 8 carbon atoms. Examples of alkyl include, but are not limited to, methyl, ethyl, n-propyl, i-propyl, n-butyl, i-butyl, sec-butyl, t-butyl, 3-methylpentyl, 4-methylpentyl, n-pentyl, n-hexyl and n-heptyl. Wherein the alkyl group is unsaturated or partially saturated, it is denoted as “alkenyl” or “alkynyl”. Therefore, n-prop-2-en-1-Y1 is intended to be —CH2—CH═CH2.
    • b. For the avoidance of doubt, the term “alkylene” is intended to denote an alkyl group bridging between two substituents (e.g., between the flavin core structure and another substituent, for example —X-A). Therefore C1-4alkylene, e.g., methylene, ethylene, n-propylene and n-butylene are intended to represent —CH2—, —CH2CH2—, —CH2CH2CH2— and —CH2CH2CH2CH2— respectively. Wherein the alkylene group is unsaturated or partially saturated, it is denoted as “alkenylene” or “alkynylene”. Therefore, n-but-2-enylene is intended to be —CH2—CH═CHCH2—.
    • c. “Aryl” as used herein is a monocyclic or polycyclic aromatic hydrocarbon, preferably phenyl, optionally substituted, e.g., with C1-4alkyl (e.g., methyl), C1-4alkoxy, halogen (e.g., chloro or fluoro), haloC1-4alkyl (e.g., trifluoromethyl), hydroxy, carboxy, or an additional aryl or heteroaryl.
    • d. “Cycloalkyl” refers to a saturated or unsaturated nonaromatic hydrocarbon moiety, preferably saturated, preferably comprising three to eight carbon atoms, at least some of which form a nonaromatic mono- or bicyclic, or bridged cyclic structure.
    • e. “Heterocycloalkyl” refers to a cycloalkyl as defined above wherein at least one of the carbon atoms is replaced with a heteroatom selected from N, O, S. Therefore, “C3-8heterocycloalkyl” or “heteroC3-8cycloalkyl” refers to a 3- to 8-membered non-aromatic ring system containing at least one heteroatom selected from N, O and S.
    • f. Wherein the substituent is connected via an alkyl group, e.g., —C0-4alkyl-C3-8cycloalkyl or aryl-C1-4alkyl, it is understood that the alkyl group may be saturated or unsaturated or linear or branched. Wherein the substituent is connected via the C0-alkyl, it is understood that the alkyl is not present and the connectivity is directly to the next substituent. For example, wherein the substituent is —C0alkyl-C3-8cycloalkyl, it is understood that the alkyl group is not present and the cycloalkyl (e.g., cyclopropyl) is directly connected.


The Compounds of the Invention or any of the compounds disclosed herein (e.g. a compound of Formula P or any of P.1-P, e.g., any of P.1-P.17, or Formula Q or Formula I, e.g., any of formulae 1.1-1.107 or a compound of Formula II″ or II, e.g., any of formulae 2.1-2.22), may exist in free or salt, e.g., as acid addition salts, or prodrug form. An acid-addition salt of a compound of the invention which is sufficiently basic, for example, an acid-addition salt with, for example, an inorganic or organic acid, for example hydrochloric, hydrobromic, sulphuric, phosphoric, acid acetic, trifluoroacetic, citric, maleic acid, toluene sulfonic, propionic, succinic, glycolic, stearic, lactic, malic, tartaric, citric, ascorbic, pamoic, hydroxymaleic, phenylacetic, glutamic, benzoic, salicylic, sulfanilic, 2-acetoxybenzoic, fumaric, toluenesulfonic, methanesulfonic, ethane disulfonic, oxalic, isethionic acid, and the like. In addition a salt of a compound of the invention which is sufficiently acidic is an alkali metal salt, for example a sodium or potassium salt, an alkaline earth metal salt, for example a calcium or magnesium salt, an ammonium salt or a salt with an organic base which affords a physiologically-acceptable cation, for example a salt with methylamine, dimethylamine, trimethylamine, piperidine, morpholine or tris-(2-hydroxyethyl)amine. In a particular embodiment, the salt of the compound of the invention is a trifluoroacetic or hydrochloric acid addition salt. In another embodiment, the salt of the compound of the invention is an acetic acid addition salt.


In this specification, unless otherwise indicated, language such as Compounds of the Invention is to be understood as embracing the compounds disclosed herein, such as a compound of Formula P, e.g., any of P.1-P.17, or Formula Q or Formula I, e.g., any of formulae 1.1-1.106, or a compound of Formula II″ or II, e.g., any of formulae 2.1-2.22, in any form, for example free or acid addition salt or prodrug form, or where the compounds contain acidic substituents, in base addition salt form. The Compounds of the Invention are intended for use as pharmaceuticals, therefore pharmaceutically acceptable salts are preferred. Salts which are unsuitable for pharmaceutical uses may be useful, for example, for the isolation or purification of free Compounds of the Invention, and are therefore also included.


The Compounds of the Invention may comprise one or more chiral carbon atoms. The compounds thus exist in individual isomeric, e.g., enantiomeric or diasteriomeric form or as mixtures of individual forms, e.g., racemic/diastereomeric mixtures. Any isomer may be present in which the asymmetric center is in the (R)—, (S)—, or (R,S)— configuration. The invention is to be understood as embracing both individual optically active isomers as well as mixtures (e.g., racemic/diasteromeric mixtures) thereof. Accordingly, the Compound of the Invention may be a racemic mixture or it may be predominantly, e.g., in pure, or substantially pure, isomeric form, e.g., greater than 70% enantiomeric excess (“ee”), preferably greater than 80% ee, more preferably greater than 90% ee, most preferably greater than 95% ee. The purification of said isomers and the separation of said isomeric mixtures may be accomplished by standard techniques known in the art (e.g., column chromatography, preparative TLC, preparative HPLC, simulated moving bed and the like).


Geometric isomers by nature of substituents about a double bond or a ring may be present in cis (=Z-) or trans (=E-) form, and both isomeric forms are encompassed within the scope of this invention.


As will be appreciated by those skilled in the art, the Compounds of the Invention may exhibit keto-enol tautomerization. Therefore, the invention as defined in the present invention is to be understood as embracing both the structures as setforth herewith and their tautomeric forms.


It is also intended that the Compounds of the Invention encompass their stable isotopes. For example, the hydrogen atom at a certain position on the Compounds of the Invention may be replaced with deuterium. It is expected that the activity of compounds comprising such isotopes would be retained and/or it may have altered pharmacokinetic or pharmacodynamic properties. In addition to therapeutic use, compounds comprising such isotopes and having altered pharmacokinetic or pharmacodynamic properties would also have utility for measuring pharmacokinetics of the non-isotopic analogs.


Compounds of the Invention may in some cases also exist in prodrug form. The term “prodrug” is an art recognized term and refers to a drug precursors prior to administration, but generate or release the active metabolite in vivo following administration, via some chemical or physiological process. For example, when the Compounds of the Invention (e.g., a compound of Formula P, Formula Q or Formula I, e.g., any of formulae P.1-P.17, 1.1-1.106, or a compound of Formula II″ or II, e.g., any of formulae 2.1-2.22) contain a hydroxy group, these substituents may be esterified to form physiologically hydrolysable and acceptable esters (e.g., acyl esters, e.g., CH3C(O)—O— Compound). As used herein, “physiologically hydrolysable and acceptable esters” means esters of Compounds of the Invention which are hydrolysable under physiological conditions to yield hydroxy on the one hand and acid, e.g., carboxylic acid on the other (e.g., Drug-O—C(O)—CH3→Drug-OH+CH3COOH), which are themselves physiologically tolerable at doses to be administered. Similarly, wherein the compounds of the invention contain an amine group, prodrug of such amine, e.g., amino acid, carbamic acid ester, amide prodrugs may also exist wherein the prodrug is cleaved to release the active amine metabolite in vivo following administration. Further details of amine prodrugs may may be found in Jeffrey P. Krise and Reza Oliyai, Biotechnology: Pharmaceutical Aspects, Prodrugs, Volume 5, Part 3, pages 801-831, the contents of which are herein incorporated by reference in their entirety. As will be appreciated, the term thus embraces conventional pharmaceutical prodrug forms.


Methods of using Compounds of the Invention


The Compounds of the Invention are useful for the treatment of an infection, particularly an infection by bacteria including but not limited to Clostridium difficile, Staphylococcus epidermidis, Staphylococcus aureus, Streptococcus pneumoniae, Pseudomonas aeruginosa, Acinetobacter baumannii, Escherichia coli, Haemophilus influenzae, Enterococcus faecalis, Streptococcus pyogenes, Listeria monocytogenes, Salmonella enterica, Vibrio cholerae, Brucella melitensis, Bacillus anthracis, Francisella tularensis, Moraxella catarrhalis, Klebsiella pneumoniae, Yersinia pestis, Streptococcus viridans, Enterococcus faecium, and/or Borrelia burgdorferi bacteria. In a particular embodiment, the bacteria is selected from any one of the following: Clostridium difficile and Staphylococcus aureus.


The invention therefore provides methods of treatment of any one or more of the following conditions: anthrax infection, staphylococcal scalded skin syndrome (staph infections), pneumonia, impetigo, boils, cellulitis, folliculitis, furuncles, carbuncles, scalded skin syndrome, abscesses, meningitis, osteomyelitis endocarditis, Toxic Shock Syndrome (TSS), septicemia, acute sinusitis, otitis media, septic arthritis, endocarditis, peritonitis, pericarditis, brain abscess, tularemia, urinary tract infection, empyema, food poisoning, diarrhea, conjunctivitis and clostridium difficile associated disease (CDAD); comprising administering an effective amount of a compound of Formula P, e.g., any of P.1-P.17, or Formula Q, e.g., any of formulae 1.1-1.32 or 1.107, Formula I, e.g., any of formulae 1.33-1.106, or a compound of Formula II″ or II, e.g., any of formulae 2.1-2.22, in free or pharmaceutically acceptable salt form, to a subject in need thereof.


The words “treatment” and “treating” are to be understood accordingly as embracing prophylaxis and treatment or amelioration of symptoms of disease as well as treatment of the cause of the disease. In one particular embodiment, the invention encompasses prophylaxis of symptoms of disease or cause of the disease. In another particular embodiment, the invention encompasses treatment or amelioration of symptoms of disease or cause of the disease.


The term “subject” as used herein encompasses human and/or non-human (e.g., animal).


Dosages employed in practicing the present invention will of course vary depending, e.g. on the particular disease or condition to be treated, the particular Compound of the Invention used, the mode of administration, and the therapy desired. Administration of a therapeutically active amount of the therapeutic compositions is defined as an amount effective, at dosages and for periods of time necessary to achieve the desired result. For example, a therapeutically effective amount of a Compound of the Invention reactive with at least a portion of the FMN or the CD3299 riboswitch may vary according to factors such as the disease state, age, sex, and weight of the individual, and the ability of the compound to elicit a desired response in the individual. Dosage regiment may be adjusted to provide the optimum therapeutic response. For example, several divided doses may be administered daily or the dose may be proportionally reduced as indicated by the exigencies of the therapeutic situation. In general, satisfactory results, e.g. for the treatment of diseases as hereinbefore set forth are indicated to be obtained on oral administration at dosages of the order from about 0.01 to 2.0 mg/kg. In larger mammals, for example humans, an indicated daily dosage for oral administration will accordingly be in the range of from about 0.75 to 1000 mg, conveniently administered once, or in divided doses 2 to 4 times, daily or in sustained release form. Unit dosage forms for oral administration thus for example may comprise from about 0.2 to 75 mg, 250 mg, 1000 mg, e.g. from about 0.2 or 2.0 to 50, 75, 100, 250, 500, 750 or 1000 mg of a Compound of the Invention, together with a pharmaceutically acceptable diluent or carrier therefor.


Pharmaceutical compositions comprising the Compounds of the Invention may be prepared using conventional diluents or excipients and techniques known in the galenic art. Thus oral dosage forms may include tablets, capsules, solutions, suspensions, spray-dried dispersions [e.g. Eudragit L100] and the like. The term “pharmaceutically acceptable carrier” as used herein is intended to include diluents such as saline and aqueous buffer solutions. The Compounds of the Invention may be administered in a convenient manner such as by injection such as subcutaneous, intravenous, by oral administration, inhalation, transdermal application, intravaginal application, topical application, intranasal, sublingual or rectal administration. Depending on the route of administration, the active compound may be coated in a material to protect the compound from the degradation by enzymes, acids and other natural conditions that may inactivate the compound. In one embodiment, the compound may be orally administered. In another embodiment, the compound is administered via topical application.


In certain embodiment, the Compounds of the Invention may be administered alone or in conjunction, e.g., at or about the same time or simultaneously and separately or simultaneously in an admixture, with another agent, e.g., an agent to facilitate entry or permeability of the Compounds of the Invention into the cell, e.g., an antimicrobial cationic peptide. Antimicrobial cationic peptides include peptides which contain (1) a disulfide-bonded β-sheet peptides; (2) amphipathic α-helical peptides; (3) extended peptides; or (4) loop-structured peptides. Examples of cationic peptide include but are not limited to defensins, cecropins, melittins, magainins, indolicidins, bactenecin and protegrins. Other examples of antimicrobial cationic peptides include but are not limited to human neutrophil defensin-1 (HNP-1), platelet microbicidal protein-1 (tPMP), inhibitors of DNA gyrase or protein synthesis, CP26, CP29, CP11CN, CP10A, Bac2A-NH2 as disclosed in Friedrich et al., Antimicrob. Agents Chemother. (2000) 44(8):2086, the contents of which are hereby incorporated by reference in its entirety. Further examples of antibacterial cationic peptides include but are not limited to polymyxin e.g., polymixin B, polymyxin E or polymyxin nonapeptide. Therefore, in another embodiment, the Compounds of the Invention may be administered in conjunction with polymyxin, e.g., polymixin B, polymyxin E or polymyxin nonapeptide, preferably polymyxin B.


In still another embodiment, the Compounds of the Invention may be administered alone or in conjunction, e.g., at or about the same-time, simultaneously and separately, or simultaneously in an admixture, with other antimicrobial agents, e.g., other antifungal or other systemic antibacterial (bactericidal or bacteriostatic) agents. Examples of bacterial agents include agents which inhibit bacterial cell wall synthesis (e.g., penicillins, cephalosporins, carbapenems, vancomycin), agents which damage cytoplasmic membrane (e.g., polymixins as discussed above), agents which modify the synthesis or metabolism of nucleic acids (e.g., quinolones, rifampin, nitrofurantoin), agents which inhibit protein synthesis (aminoglycosides, tetracyclines, chloramphenicol, erythomycin, clindamycin), agents which interfer with the folate synthesis (e.g., folate-inhibitors), agents which modify energy metabolism (e.g., sulfonamides, trimethoprim) and/or other antibiotics (beta-lactam antibiotic, beta-lactamase inhibitors). Specific anti-infective agents, particularly antibacterial and antifungal agents, are discussed in Remington: The Science and Practice of Pharmacy, Chapter 90, pp. 1626-1684 (21st Ed., Lippincott Williams & Wilkins 2005), the contents of which are hereby incorporated by reference.


Methods of Making the Compounds of the Invention:

The compounds of the Invention, e.g., compound of Formula P, Formula Q or Formula I, e.g., any of formulae P.1-P.17, 1.1-1.106, or a compound of Formula II″ or II, e.g., any of formulae 2.1-2.22, in free or salt form may be made using the methods as described and exemplified herein and by methods similar thereto and by methods known in the chemical art. Such methods include, but not limited to, those described below. In the description of the synthetic methods described herein, it is to be understood that all proposed reaction conditions, including choice of solvent, reaction atmosphere, reaction temperature, duration of the experiment and workup procedures, are chosen to be the conditions standard for that reaction, which should be readily recognized by one skilled in the art. Therefore, at times, the reaction may require to be run at elevated temperature or for a longer or shorter period of time. It is understood by one skilled in the art of organic synthesis that functionality present on various portions of the molecule must be compatible with the reagents and reactions proposed. If not commercially available, starting materials for these processes may be made by procedures, which are selected from the chemical art using techniques which are similar or analogous to the synthesis of known compounds. All references cited herein are hereby incorporated by reference in their entirety.


The synthetic methods for the Compounds of the Invention are illustrated below either in the generic synthetic scheme and/or in the specific Examples, which methods are claimed individually and/or collectively. The significances for the substituents are as set forth above in Formula P, e.g., any of P.1-P.17, Formula Q or Formula I, e.g., any of formulae 1.1-1.106, or Formula II″ or II, e.g., any of formulae 2.1-2.22, unless otherwise indicated.


Generally, the compounds of Formula P, Formula Q or Formula I, e.g., any of formulae P.1-P.17 or 1.1-1.106, may be prepared as follows: (1) reacting a nitro aniline, Int-A′, with an A-X-Alk-L, Int-B′, wherein L is a leaving group, e.g., a halide, e.g., bromide, to provide Int-E′, or by (2) reacting Int-C′ with an A-X-Alk-amine, Int-D′, wherein X in this instance is a single bond, to provide Int-E′. The resulting Int-E′ may be converted to Int-F′ for example, by catalytic hydrogenation, e.g., by reacting Int-E′ with a metal, e.g., Raney Nickel, in the presence of hydrogen gas in a solvent such as ethanol to provide diamine, Int-F′. Int-F′ may react with pyrimidine-2,4,5,6(1H,3H)-tetrone in the presence of boric acid and acetic acid to obtain a compound of Formula P, Formula Q or Formula I. This preparation may be summarized in the following reaction scheme:




embedded image


Wherein R2 of the compounds of Formula P, Formula Q or Formula I is —C1alkyl-N(Ra) (Rb), e.g., —CH2—N(CH3)2, this compound may be prepared by halogenating the compounds of Formula P, Formula Q or Formula I, wherein R2 is e.g., a methyl group, for example by reacting bromine with the compounds of Formula Q or Formula I, wherein R2 is methyl, optionally in the presence of a catalyst such as azobisisobutyronitrile (AIBN). The resulting intermediate, Int-G′, may then react with an amine, HN(Ra)(Rb), e.g. HN(CH3)2, to provide a Compound of Formula P, Formula Q or Formula I, wherein R2 is —C1alkyl-N(Ra)(Rb), e.g., —CH2—N(CH3)2. These preparations may be summarized in the following reaction scheme:




embedded image


Generally, the compounds of Formula II″ or II, e.g., any of formulae 2.1-2.22 may be prepared by reacting Intermediate-5 (Int-5) with ammonia in a pressure tube. Int-5 may be prepared by reacting Intermediate-4 (Int-4) with diethyl 2-bromo-3-oxopentanedioate in the presence of a base, e.g., cesium carbonate, in a solvent, for example, a mixture of dimethylformamide (DMF) and methylene chloride (CH2Cl2). Int-4 may be may be prepared by converting Intermediate-3 (Int-3) to Int-4, for example, by catalytic hydrogenation, e.g., by reacting Int-3 with a metal, e.g., Raney-Nickel, and hydrogen gas in a solvent such as ethanol. In turn, Int-3 may be prepared by reacting Intermediate-1 (Int-1) with NH2-Alk-X-A (Int-2), wherein Alk, X and A are defined in Formula II or any of 2.1-2.22 to yield Int-3. Int-1 is either commercially available or may be prepared as described in any of Examples 1-16 described below. Wherein R2 of compounds of Formula II″ or II is alkoxy, this compound may be prepared by reacting a compound of Formula II″ or II, wherein R2 is halo, e.g., chloro, with R2—H, e.g., methanol, in the presence of a base. The methods for preparing a compound of Formula II″ or II may be described in the reaction scheme below, wherein all substituents are defined in Formula II″ or II or any of 2.1-2.22:




embedded image


Wherein R2 of the compounds of Formula II″ or II is (C1-4alkoxy)-methyl, these compounds may be prepared by first halogenating the compound of Formula II″ or II, wherein R2 is methyl, for example by reacting such compound with a halogen, e.g., bromine, e.g., optionally in the presence of a catalyst such as azobisisobutyronitrile (AIBN). The resulting intermediate, Int-6, may then react with a R2—H, wherein R2—H is e.g. methanol, in the presence of a base to provide the corresponding alkoxy-methyl product. Wherein R2 of the compounds of Formula II is -methyl-N(Ra)(Rb), e.g., —CH2—N(CH3)2, this compound may be prepared by halogenating the compounds of Formula II″ or II, wherein R2 is e.g., a methyl group, for example by reacting bromine with the compounds of Formula II″ or II, wherein R2 is methyl, optionally in the presence of a catalyst such as azobisisobutyronitrile (AIBN). The resulting intermediate, Int-6, may then react with an amine, HN(Ra)(Rb), e.g. HN(CH3)2, to provide a Compound of Formula II″ or II wherein R2 is -methyl-N(Ra)(Rb), e.g., —CH2—N(CH3)2. This preparation may be summarized in the following reaction scheme:




embedded image


Wherein R2 and A of the Compound of Formula P or Formula Q are linked together so as to form, e.g., 14-methyl-1,17,20,22-tetraazapentacyclo[11.10.2.25,8.016,24.018,23]heptacosa-5,7,10,13(25),14,16(24),17,22,26-nonaene-19,21-dione or 14-methyl-1,17,20,22-tetraazapentacyclo[11.10.2.25,8.016,24.018,23]heptacosa-5,7,13(25),14,16(24),17,22,26-octaene-19,21-dione, these compounds may be prepared, for example, by reacting Int-12 with benzylidene-bis(tricyclohexyl-phosphine)dichlororuthenium (i.e., first generation Grubb's catalyst), for example, in toluene at reflux. This preparation may be summarized in the following reaction schemes wherein R6 may be H or any of the substituents allowed to substitute Aryl (e.g., phenyl) defined in A of Formula P or Formula Q:




embedded image


In turn, Int-12 may be prepared by first reacting Int-7 with Int-8 in the presence of a base, e.g., diisopropylethylamine to yield Int-9. Int-9 is then reacted with 6-chlorouracil in the presence of a base, e.g., diisopropylethylamine, e.g., in a solvent such as DMF to yield Int-10. Int-10 is then reacted with sodium nitrite, e.g., in a solvent such as acetic acid to yield Int-11. Int-11 is then reacted with a reducing agent, e.g., sodium hydrosulfite, e.g., in the presence of a base, e.g., triethylamine to yield Int-12. The preparation may be summaried below:




embedded image


embedded image


Int-7 may be prepared by reacting (R1-substituted)-2-bromo-4-nitrobenzene with allyltributylstanane and tetrakis(triphenylphosphine)palladium(0). The resulting product is then reacted with a reducing agent, for example, zinc dust to yield Int-7. The preparation may be summaried below:




embedded image


Int-8 may be prepared by as described in Examples 25 and 26 below.


EXAMPLES
Binding of Ligand to Riboswitch
Example A

An in-line probing assay, as described in Regulski and Breaker, “In-line probing analysis of riboswitches”, (2008), Methods in Molecular Biology, Vol 419, pp 53-67, the contents of which are incorporated by reference in their entirety, is used to estimate the dissociation binding constants for the interaction of each of the ligands described herein with either an FMN riboswitch amplified from the genome of Bacillus subtilis or a CD3299 riboswitch amplified from Clostridium difficile. Precursor mRNA leader molecules are prepared by in vitro transcription from templates generated by PCR and [5′-32P]-labeling using methods described previously (Regulski and Breaker, In-line probing analysis of riboswitches (2008), Methods in Molecular Biology Vol 419, pp 53-67). Approximately 5 nM of labeled RNA precursor is incubated for 41 hours at 25° C. in 20 mM MgCl2, 50 mM Tris/HCl (pH 8.3 at 25° C.) in the presence or absence of a fixed concentration of each ligand. Binding to the FMN and CD3299 riboswitches are measured at 20 μM and 100 μM, respectively. In-line cleavage products are separated on 10% polyacrylamide gel electrophoresis (PAGE), and the resulting gel is visualized using a Molecular Dynamics Phosphorimager. The location of products bands corresponding to cleavage are identified by comparison to a partial digest of the RNA with RNase T1 (G-specific cleavage) or alkali (nonspecific cleavage).


In-line probing exploits the natural ability of RNA to self-cleave at elevated pH and metal ion concentrations (pH≈8.3, 25 mM MgCl2) in a conformation-dependent manner. For self-cleavage to occur, the 2′-hydroxyl of the ribose must be “in-line” with the phosphate-oxygen bond of the internucleotide linkage, facilitating a SN2P nucleophilic transesterification and strand cleavage. Typically, single-stranded regions of the riboswitch are dynamic in the absence of an active ligand, and the internucleotide linkages in these regions can frequently access the required in-line conformation. Binding of an active ligand to the riboswitch generally reduces the dynamics of these regions, thereby reducing the accessibility to the in-line conformation, resulting in fewer in-line cleavage events within those regions. These ligand-dependent changes in RNA cleavage can be readily detected by denaturing gel electrophoresis. The relative binding affinity of each ligand is expressed as Imax, wherein Imax represents the percent inhibition of in-line cleavage at selected internucleotide ligands in the presence of a fixed ligand concentration (20 μM for the FMN riboswitch and 100 μM for the CD3299 riboswitch) normalized to the percent inhibition in the absence of ligand and the percent inhibition in the presence of a saturation concentration of a control ligand. 100 μM FMN is used as a control ligand for estimating binding to the FMN riboswitch and 100 μM of Example 1 (which is a compound which has a high affinity against the CD3299 riboswitch) is used as a control ligand for estimating binding to the CD3299 riboswitch.


The experiments show that various Compounds of the Invention have a binding affinity to the FMN riboswitch with an Imax value of up to 100%, meaning that they can bind almost as well as FMN at 20 μM. In other instances, various compounds of the invention have a binding affinity to the CD3299 switch with an Imax value of greater than 20% compared to the control at 100 μM.


MIC Assay
Example B

The MIC assays are carried out in a final volume of 100 μL in 96-well clear round-bottom plates according to methods established by the Clinical Laboratory Standards Institute (CLSI). Briefly, test compound suspended in 100% DMSO (or another suitable solubilizing buffer) is added to an aliquot of media appropriate for a given pathogen to a total volume of 50 μL. This solution is serially diluted by 2-fold into successive tubes of the same media to give a range of test compound concentrations appropriate to the assay. To each dilution of test compound in media is added 50 μl of a bacterial suspension from an overnight culture growth in media appropriate to a given pathogen. Final bacterial inoculum is approximately 105-106 CFU/well. After growth for 18-24 hours at 37° C., the MIC is defined as the lowest concentration of antimicrobial agent that completely inhibits growth of the organism as detected by the unaided eye, relative to control for bacterial growth in the absence of added antibiotic. Ciprofloxacin is used as an antibiotic-positive control in each screening assay. Each of the bacterial cultures that are available from the American Type Culture Collection (ATCC, www.atcc.org) is identified by its ATCC number.


The experiments show that various compounds of the invention, e.g., the compounds of Formulae P.15 have a minimum inhibitory concentration (MIC) of less than 64 μg/mL, in particular instance, less than or equal to 32 μg/mL and in other instances, less than or equal to 16 μg/mL and still in other instances less than or equal to 8 μg/mL against at least one of the bacteria selected from Clostridium difficile (e.g., C. difficile MMX3581 (clinical) and C. Difficile ATCC43596)), Staphylococcus epidermidis, Staphylococcus aureus (e.g., Staphylococcus aureus ATCC29213 and Stephylococcus aureus RN4220), Streptococcus pneumoniae, Pseudomonas aeruginosa, Acinetobacter baumannii, Escherichia coli, Haemophilus influenzae, Enterococcus faecalis, Streptococcus pyogenes, MMX Streptococcus pneumoniae ATCC 49619, MMX Streptococcus pneumoniae PSSP, MMX Streptococcus pneumoniae ATCC 6301, MMX Streptococcus pyogenes ATCC 19615, MMX Haemophilus influenzae ATCC 49247, Bacillus subtilis 1A1, Staphylococcus epidermidis ATCC 12228, Enterococcus faecalis ATCC 29212, S. aureus 13709 (Smith), S. epidermidis 35984, S. aureus VL134 (MRSA), S. aureus 25923 (haze not considered growth), S. aureus NRS384, C. diff ATCC 700057 (MMX 4381), C. diff ATCC BAA-1805 (NAP1), C. diff ATCC BAA-1382 (MMX4820), C. diff ATCC 43596(MMX4822), C. diff 43255(MMX4821), B. fragilis ATCC 25285 (MMX0123), C. diff ATCC 43255, C. diff ATCC 43596, C. diff ATCC 700057, C. diff ATCC BAA-1382 and B. fragilis ATCC 25285.


All of the exemplified compounds of the invention have either an Imax value of greater than 20% in an assay as described in Example A (compared to at least one of the two controls) and/or a MIC of less than or equal to 64 μg/mL against at least one of the bacterial strains as described in Example B. In certain embodiment, certain compounds of the invention have either an Imax value of greater than 50% in an assay as described in Example A (compared to at least one of the two controls) and/or a MIC of less than or equal to 16 μg/mL, in some instances, less than or equal to 8 μg/mL against at least one of the bacterial strains as described in Example B.


Cytotoxic Assay
Example C

The cytotoxic effects of test compounds on HepG2 are measured with a commercially available cell viability assay kit from Promega. On day 1, HepG2 cells (˜1×104 cells) are seeded into each well in 96-well plate and cultured for approximately 24 h at 37° C. in a 5% CO2 atmosphere under saturating humidity. On day 2, test compounds and DMSO controls are added to appropriate wells to give a range of test compound concentrations appropriate to the assay. Terfenadine is also added to each plate as a positive cytotoxic control. Control wells containing medium without cell are prepared to obtain a value for background luminescence. Assay plates are then cultured for approximately 24 h at 37° C. in a 5% CO2 atmosphere under saturating humidity. On day 3, assay plates are removed from 37° C. incubator and equilibrated to 22° C. Once equilibrated, CellTiter-Glo® reagent is added to each well containing cell culture medium, followed by mixing to allow cell lysis. The CellTiter-Glo® Assay measures the number of viable cells in culture based on quantitation of the ATP present, an indicator of metabolically active cells. This assay generates a luminescent signal proportional to the amount of ATP present. The amount of ATP is directly proportional to the number of cells present in culture. After the assay plate is incubated at room temperature for approximately 10 min to stabilize luminescent signal, luminescence is recorded on PerkinElmer luminometer. CC50 is defined as the concentration of test compounds in μM to result in 50% reduction in luminescence signal relative to the signal for untreated cells.


The experiments show that various compounds of the invention have a CC50 value of greater than or equal to 30 μM. In some instances, various compounds of the invention have a MIC to cytotox ratio of at least 1:20.


Synthesis of the Compounds of the Invention:

Temperatures are given in degrees Celsius (° C.); unless otherwise stated, operations are carried out at room or ambient temperature, that is, at a temperature in the range of 18-25° C. Chromatography means flash chromatography on silica gel; thin layer chromatography (TLC) is carried out on silica gel plates. NMR data is in the delta values of major diagnostic protons, given in parts per million (ppm) relative to the deuterium lock signal of the deuterated solvent utilized. Conventional abbreviations for signal shape are used. For mass spectra (MS), the lowest mass major ion is reported for molecules where isotope splitting results in multiple mass spectral peaks. Solvent mixture compositions are given as volume percentages or volume ratios. In cases where the NMR spectra are complex, only diagnostic signals are reported.


Analytical HPLC
Method A:

Agilent 1100 HPLC, Agilent XDB C18 50×4.6 mm 1.8 micron column, 1.5 mL/min, Solvent A-Water (0.1% TFA), Solvent B—Acetonitrile (0.07% TFA), Gradient: 5 min 95% A to 95% B; 1 min. hold; then recycle, UV Detection @ 210 and 254 nm.


Method B:

Agilent 1100 HPLC, Agilent XDB C18 150×4.6 mm 1.8 micron column, 1.5 mL/min, Solvent A-Water (0.1% TFA), Solvent B—Acetonitrile (0.07% TFA), Gradient: 7 min 95% A to 95% B; 1 min. hold; then recycle, UV Detection @ 210 and 254 nm.


System A:

Agilent 1100 HPLC, Agilent XDB C8 150×4.6 mm 5 micron column, 1.5 mL/min, Solvent A-Water (0.1% TFA), Solvent B—Acetonitrile (0.07% TFA), Gradient: 7 min 95% A to 95% B; 2.5 min. hold; then recycle, UV Detection @ 210 and 254 nm.


Method C:

Agilent 1100 HPLC, Agilent XDB C18 50×4.6 mm 1.8 micron column, 1.5 mL/min.; Solvent A is water (0.1% TFA), solvent B is acetonitrile (0.07% TFA); Gradient: 7 min. 95% A to 95% B, 1 min. hold, then recycle; UV detection @ 214 and 254 nm.


Method D:

Agilent 1100 HPLC, Agilent XDB C18 50×4.6 mm 1.8 micron column, 1.5 mL/min.; Solvent A is water (0.1% TFA), solvent B is acetonitrile (0.07% TFA); Gradient: 5 min. 95% A to 95% B, 1 min. hold, then recycle; UV detection @ 210 and 254 nm.


Method E:

Agilent 1100 HPLC, Agilent XDB C18 150×4.6 mm 1.8 micron column, 1.5 mL/min.; Solvent A is water (0.1% TFA), solvent B is acetonitrile (0.07% TFA); Gradient: 7 min. 95% A to 95% B, 1 min. hold, then recycle; UV detection @ 210 and 254 nm.


Method F:

Agilent 1100 HPLC, Agilent XDB C8 150×4.6 mm 5 micron column, 1.5 mL/min.; Solvent A is water (0.1% TFA), solvent B is acetonitrile (0.07% TFA); Gradient: 7 min. 95% A to 95% B, 2.5 min. hold, then recycle; UV detection @ 210 and 250 nm.


Method G:

Agilent 1100 HPLC, Agilent XDB C18 50×4.6 mm 5 micron column, 1.5 mL/min.; Solvent A is water (0.1% TFA), solvent B is acetonitrile (0.07% TFA); Gradient: 6 min. 95% A to 95% B, 1 min. hold, then recycle; UV detection @ 210 and 250 nm.


Preparative Reverse Phase Chromatography
Method L:

Varian PrepStar, Phenomenex Luna(2) C18 250×21.2 mm 10 micron column, 20 mL/min, Solvent B—Water (0.1% TFA), Solvent A-Acetonitrile (0.07% TFA), Gradient: 10 min 5% A to 80% A; 5 min 80% A to 100% A; 5 min hold; then recycle, UV Detection @ 254 nm.


Method M:

SunFire™ Prep C18 OBD™ 5 μm, 30×100 mm column. The aqueous phase is 0.1% TFA in USP water. The organic phase is acetonitrile. The elution profile is as follows: 95% aqueous (0 to 4 min); a gradient from 95% aqueous to 58% organic (4 to 14 min); hold at 58% organic (14 to 27 min); a gradient from 58% organic to 98% organic (27 to 30 min); 98% organic (30-33 min); a gradient from 98% organic to 95% aqueous (33-34 min); 95% aqueous (34-36 min).


Method N:

Preparatory HPLC is performed using a SunFire™ Prep C18 OBD™ 5 μm, 30×100 mm column. The aqueous phase is 0.1% TFA in USP water. The organic phase is acetonitrile. The elution profile is as follows: 100% aqueous (0 to 4 min.); a gradient from 100% aqueous to 60% organic (4 to 14 min.); hold at 60% organic (14 to 26 min.); a gradient to 95% organic (26 to 30 min.); hold at 95% organic (30 to 34 min.); equilibrate to aqueous.


TERMS AND ABBREVIATIONS





    • ACN=acetonitrile,

    • br=broad,

    • t-BuOH=tert-butyl alcohol,

    • Cat.=catalytic,

    • Conc.=concentrated,

    • d=doublet,

    • DCM=dichloromethane,

    • DIAD=diisopropyl azodicarboxylate,

    • DMF=N,N-dimethylforamide,

    • DCM=dichloromethane

    • DMSO=dimethyl sulfoxide,

    • Et2O=diethyl ether,

    • Et3N=triethyl amine,

    • EtOAc=ethyl acetate,

    • EtOH=ethyl alcohol,

    • equiv.=equivalent(s),

    • flash chromatography; as described in Still, W. C, Kahn, M.; Mitra, A. J. Org. Chem. 1978, 43, 2923.

    • h=hour(s),

    • H2O=water,

    • HCl=hydrochloric acid

    • hep=heptet,

    • HPLC=high performance liquid chromatography,

    • HOAc=acetic acid,

    • IPA=isopropyl alcohol,

    • K2CO3=potassium carbonate,

    • LiBH4=lithium tetrahydroborate,

    • LAH=lithium tetrahydroaluminate,

    • m=multiplet,

    • min.=minute(s)

    • MgCl2=magnesium chloride

    • MeOH=methanol,

    • NaHCO3=sodium bicarbonate,

    • Na2SO4=sodium sulfate,

    • NH4OH=ammonium hydroxide,

    • NH4OAc=ammonium acetate,

    • NMR=nuclear magnetic resonance,

    • NMP=N-methylpyrrolidinone,

    • p=pentet,

    • rt=room temperature,

    • RNA=ribonucleic acid,

    • RNase T1=an endoribonuclease that specifically degrades single-stranded RNA at G residues,

    • s=singlet,

    • t=triplet,

    • TFA=trifluoroacetic acid,

    • THF=tetrahydrofuran,

    • TLC=thin layer chromatography,





Intermediate A
1-Bromo-3-(2,6-difluorophenyl)propane



embedded image


Step 1 Preparation of ethyl (2E)-3-(2,6-difluorophenyl)acrylate



embedded image


To a well-stirred solution of (carbethoxymethylidene)triphenylphosphorane (6.25 g, 17.9 mmol) in dry THF (20 mL) under nitrogen is slowly added 2,6-difluorobenzaldehyde (2.43 g, 17.1 mmol). The reaction is allowed to stir at rt for 24 h. The reaction is concentrated and the residue is subjected to silica gel chromatography (230-400 mesh, 150 g, elution with 10% ethyl acetate/hexane) to give 3.41 g (94%) of the desired product as a clear colorless oil. 1H NMR (400 MHz, CDCl3) δ 1.35 (3H, t), 4.23 (2H, q), 6.75 (1H, d), 6.95 (2H, m), 7.31 (1H, m), 7.78 (1H, d); MS (ESI+) for C11H10F2O2 m/z 213.2 (M+H)+, HPLC retention time: 4.91 min. (Method A).


Step 2 Preparation of ethyl 3-(2,6-difluorophenyl)propionate



embedded image


A slurry of ethyl (2E)-3-(2,6-difluorophenyl)acrylate (3.40 g, 16.0 mmol) and 10% Pd/C (100 mg, 0.9 mmol) in ethanol (50 mL, 800 mmol) is subjected to 1 atm of hydrogen gas (balloon) at rt for 24 h. The reaction mixture is filtered through Celite, the filter pad is washed with ethyl acetate and the filtrates are combined and concentrated to give 3.30 g (96%) of the desired product as clear, colorless oil. 1H NMR (400 MHz, CDCl3) δ 1.25 (3 H, t), 2.61 (2H, t), 3.01 (2H, t), 4.14 (2H, q), 6.86 (2H, m), 7.16 (1H, m); MS (ESI+) for C11H12F2O2 m/z 215.2 (M+H)+.


Step 3 Preparation of 3-(2,6-difluorophenyl)propan-1-ol



embedded image


A slurry of LAH (250 mg, 6.6 mmol) in dry THF (20 mL) is stirred at 0° C. under nitrogen and a solution of ethyl 3-(2,6-difluorophenyl)propionate (1.2 g, 5.6 mmol) in THF (5 mL) is added slowly. The reaction is allowed to warm to rt and stirred overnight. The reaction is cooled to 0° C. and a saturated solution of potassium sodium tartrate (5 mL) is added carefully. The mixture is then stirred at rt for 4 h, diluted with ethyl acetate and filtered through Celite. The salts are washed with ethyl acetate and the filtrate is concentrated. The residue is subjected to silica gel chromatography (230-400 mesh, 150 g, elution with 20% ethyl acetate/hexane) to give 673 mg (70%) of the desired product as a clear colorless oil. 1H NMR (400 MHz, CDCl3) δ 1.42 (1H, t), 1.87 (2H, m), 2.79 (2H, t), 3.68 (2H, q), 6.86 (2H, m), 7.15 (1H, m); HPLC retention time: 4.91 min. (Method A).


Step 4 Preparation of 1-bromo-3-(2,6-difluorophenyl)propane



embedded image


A solution of 3-(2,6-difluorophenyl)propan-1-ol (670 mg, 0.0039 mol) and triphenylphosphine dibromide (1.72 g, 0.00409 mol) in DCM (20 mL) is stirred at rt under nitrogen for 24 h. The reaction is concentrated and the residue is subjected to silica gel chromatography (230-400 mesh, 50 g, elution with 10% ethyl acetate/hexane) to give 631 mg (69%) of the desired product as an oil. 1H NMR (400 MHz, CDCl3) δ 2.17 (2H, m), 2.84 (2H, t), 3.43 (2H, t), 6.87 (2H, m), 7.17 (1H, m); HPLC retention time: 5.60 min. (Method A).


Intermediate B
3-(4-Chlorophenyl)propan-1-ol



embedded image


Step 1 Preparation of 3-(4-chlorophenyl)propan-1-ol



embedded image


A slurry of LAH (2.10 g, 55.2 mmol) in dry THF (250 mL) is stirred at 0° C. under nitrogen and a solution of 3-(4-chlorophenyl)propionic acid (10.2 g, 55.2 mmol) in THF (10 mL) is added slowly. The reaction is allowed to warm to rt and stirred overnight. The reaction is cooled at 0° C. and a saturated solution of potassium sodium tartrate (20 mL) is added carefully. The mixture is then stirred at it for 4 h, diluted with ethyl acetate and filtered through Celite. The salts are washed with ethyl acetate and the filtrate is concentrated to give 9.20 g (97%) of desired product as clear colorless oil. 1H NMR (400 MHz, CDCl3) δ 1.89 (2H, m), 2.71 (2H, m), 3.69 (2H, t), 7.15 (2H, d), 7.27 (2H, d); HPLC retention time: 3.44 min. (Method A).


Step 2 Preparation of 1-(3-bromopropyl)-4-chlorobenzene



embedded image


A solution of triphenylphosphine (7.42 g, 28.3 mmol) in DCM (200 mL) is cooled at 0° C. and a solution of bromine (1.46 mL, 28.3 mmol) in DCM (40 mL) is added slowly over a period of 30 min. A solution of 3-(4-chlorophenyl)propan-1-ol (4.6 g, 27 mmol) in DCM (20 mL) is then added and the reaction is allowed to warm to it and stir for 24 h. The reaction mixture is then transferred to a separatory funnel; washed with saturated sodium bicarbonate, water and brine; and the organics are dried with anhydrous sodium sulfate and concentrated. The residue is subjected to silica gel chromatography (230-400 mesh, 350 g, elution with 7.5% ethyl acetate/hexane) to give 6.15 g (97%) of the desired product as clear colorless oil. 1H NMR (400 MHz, CDCl3) δ 2.16 (2H, m), 2.77 (2H, t), 3.41 (2 H, t), 7.15 (2H, d), 7.27 (2H, d); HPLC retention time: 5.11 min. (Method A).


Intermediate C
1-(3-bromopropyl)-1H-pyrrole



embedded image


To a cooled (0-5° C.) solution 3-(1H-pyrrol-1-yl)propan-1-ol (800 mg, 6.39 mmol) in CH2Cl2 (30 mL) is added triphenylphosphine dibromide (3.091 g, 7.03 mmol) with stirring. After 10 min, the ice bath is removed and the mixture is stirred an additional 3 h at rt. Water is added and the mixture is diluted with CH2Cl2. The layers are separated and the organic layer is washed with brine, dried (anhydrous sodium sulfate), filtered and concentrated at reduced pressure. The residue is purified by flash chromatography (230-400 mesh, hexane/ethyl acetate (5%) containing 0.1% isopropanol as eluant) to afford 630 mg (52%) of the desired product as a clear oil. 1H NMR (400 MHz, CDCl3) δ 2.82 (p, 2 H), 3.33 (t, 2H), 4.10 (t, 2H), 6.18 (m, 2H), 6.70 (m, 2H); HPLC retention time: 3.91 min. (Method G).


Intermediate D
1-(3-Bromopropyl)-1H-imidazole



embedded image


Step 1 Preparation of methyl 3-(1H-imidazol-1-yl)propanoate



embedded image


To a solution of 1H-imidazole (1.000 g, 14.7 mmol) in acetonitrile (20 mL) in a pressure tube is added methyl acrylate (2.65 mL, 29.4 mmol). The tube is sealed and heated at 80° C. Additional methyl acrylate (1.32 mL, 14.7 mmol) is added after 8 h and 12 h, respectively. After 17 h, volatiles are removed at reduced pressure and the residue is dissolved in ethyl acetate. The solution is washed with brine, dried (anhydrous sodium sulfate), filtered and concentrated at reduced pressure to afford 2.13 g (94%) of the desired product as oil. 1H NMR (400 MHz, CDCl3) δ 2.80 (t, 2H), 3.71 (s, 3H), 4.29 (t, 2H), 6.94 (s, 1H), 7.06 (s, 1H), 7.52 (s, 1H); MS (ESI+) for C7H10N2O2 m/z 155.2 (M+H)+.


Step 2 Preparation of 3-(1H-imidazol-1-yl)propan-1-ol



embedded image


To a flask containing lithium aluminum hydride (379 mg, 9.99 mmol) is slowly added tetrahydrofuran (8 mL). The mixture is stirred for 10 min. at rt then cooled (0-5° C.). A solution of methyl 3-(1H-imidazol-1-yl)propanoate (770 mg, 4.99 mmol) in THF (3 mL) is added drop wise and the mixture is stirred an additional 5 min. at 0-5° C. The mixture is heated to 70° C. for 3 h. The mixture is cooled to rt and with vigorous stirring the reaction is quenched by the sequential addition of water (0.38 mL), 15% aqueous NaOH (0.38 mL), and water (1.14 mL). The solids are removed by filtration through a pad of Celite and the filtrate is dried (anhydrous sodium sulfate), filtered and concentrated at reduced pressure. Purification of the residue by flash chromatography (230-400 mesh, CH2Cl2/methanol (3-5%) as eluant) afforded 554 mg (88%) of the desired product as an oil. 1H NMR (400 MHz, CDCl3) δ 2.02 (p, 2H), 3.63 (t, 2H), 4.13 (t, 2H), 6.95 (s, 1H), 7.07 (s, 1H), 7.49 (s, 1H); MS (ESI+) for C6H10N2O m/z 127.1 (M+H)+.


Step 3 Preparation of 1-(3-bromopropyl)-1H-imidazole



embedded image


To a 0-5° C. solution 3-(1H-imidazol-1-yl)propan-1-ol (300 mg, 2.38 mmol) in CH2Cl2 (10 mL) is added triphenylphosphine dibromide (1.150 g, 2.62 mmol) with stirring. After 10 min., the ice bath is removed and the mixture is stirred an additional 3 h at rt. Water is added and the reaction mixture is diluted with CH2Cl2. The layers are separated and the organic layer is washed with saturated, aqueous sodium bicarbonate, brine, dried (anhydrous sodium sulfate), filtered and partially concentrated at reduced pressure to an approximate volume of 3 mL. This solution is used immediately in the next step. 1H NMR (400 MHz, CDCl3) δ 2.29 (p, 2H), 2.33 (t, 2H), 4.18 (t, 2H), 6.95 (s, 1H), 7.09 (s, 1H), 7.54 (s, 1H).


Intermediate E
4-(3-bromopropyl)-2-chloro-1-fluorobenzene



embedded image


Step 1 Preparation of ethyl (2E)-3-(3-chloro-4-fluorophenyl)acrylate



embedded image


A solution of 3-chloro-4-fluorobenzaldehyde (1.0 g, 6.3 mmol) and (carbethoxymethylidene)triphenylphosphorane (2.42 g, 6.94 mmol) in dry tetrahydrofuran (25 mL, 310 mmol) is stirred at rt under nitrogen for 24 h. The mixture is concentrated and the residue is subjected to silica gel chromatography (230-400 mesh, 150 g, elution with 20% ethyl acetate/hexane) to give 1.35 g (94%) of desired product as a white solid. 1H NMR (400 MHz, CDCl3) δ 7.54-7.64 (m, 2H), 7.41 (m, 1H), 7.18 (t, 1H), 6.39 (d, 1H), 4.29 (q, 2H), 1.36 (t, 3H).


Step 2 Preparation of ethyl 3-(3-chloro-4-fluorophenyl)propanoate



embedded image


Sodium tetrahydroborate (0.993 g, 26.2 mmol) is added in 4 equal portions over 30 minutes to a mixture of ethyl (2E)-3-(3-chloro-4-fluorophenyl)acrylate (1.00 g, 4.37 mmol) and cuprous monochloride (0.649 g, 6.56 mmol) in 20 mL of MeOH which is cooled in an ice bath under N2. The resulting mixture is stirred with ice bath cooling for 30 minutes. The reaction is quenched by addition of 20 mL of 0.5 N HCl. The MeOH is evaporated and the mixture is extracted with 3×20 mL of CH2Cl2. Drying of the combined organic layers over Na2SO4 and evaporation gives 0.90 g (89%) of desired product as a clear oil. 1H NMR (400 MHz, CDCl3) δ 7.16-7.19 (m, 1H), 6.98 (d, 1H), 6.93-7.04 (m, 1H), 4.05 (q, 2H), 2.83 (t, 2H), 2.52 (t, 2H), 1.16 (t, 3H).


Step 3 Preparation of 3-(3-chloro-4-fluorophenyl)propan-1-ol



embedded image


Ethyl 3-(3-chloro-4-fluorophenyl)propanoate (0.900 g, 3.90 mmol) is added to a suspension of lithium tetrahydroaluminate (0.148 g, 3.90 Mmol) in 20 mL of Et2O which is cooled in an ice bath under N2. After 1 h, water is added (0.15 mL), followed by 0.15 mL of 15% NaOH and 0.45 mL of water. The mixture is stirred at rt for 30 min and the solid is removed by filtration. Drying of the filtrate over Na2SO4 and evaporation gives 0.61 g (83%) of desired product as a clear oil. 1H NMR (400 MHz, CDCl3) δ 7.16 (d, 1 H), 6.97-6.99 (m, 2H), 3.55-3.65 (m, 2H), 2.61 (t, 2H), 1.75-1.85 (m, 2H), 1.24 (br s, 1H).


Step 4 Preparation of 4-(3-bromopropyl)-2-chloro-1-fluorobenzene



embedded image


Bromine (0.250 mL, 4.85 mmol) is added to a solution of triphenylphosphine (1.27 g, 4.85 mmol) and pyridine (0.392 mL, 4.85 mmol) in 50 mL of CH2Cl2 which is cooled in an ice bath under N2. Triphenylphosphine (˜0.1 g) is added until the yellow color disappears. 3-(3-chloro-4-fluorophenyl)propan-1-ol (0.610 g, 3.23 mmol) is added dropwise as a solution in 10 mL of CH2Cl2 and the mixture is stirred with ice bath cooling for 15 min. The ice bath is removed and the mixture is stirred at rt for 1 h. The mixture is extracted with 3×50 mL of 1.0 N HCl and 50 mL of saturated, aqueous NaHCO3. Drying over Na2SO4 and evaporation of the solvent gives a white solid. The solid is suspended in 200 mL of hexane and the mixture is stirred at rt for 30 min. The solid is removed by filtration through a pad of silica gel (100 g) and the pad is eluted with 400 mL of 5% EtOAc/hexane. Evaporation of the eluate gives 0.76 g (93%) of desired product as a clear oil. 1H NMR (400 MHz, CDCl3) δ 7.20-7.40 (m, 1H), 7.08 (d, 2H), 3.40 (t, 2H), 2.77 (t, 2H), 2.16 (m, 2H).


Intermediate F
5-(3-Bromopropyl)-3-methylisoxazole



embedded image


Step 1 Preparation of 3-(3-methylisoxazol-5-yl)propan-1-ol



embedded image


n-Butyllithium (2.5 M in hexane) (8.24 mL, 20.6 mmol) is added to a solution of 3,5-dimethylisoxazole-(2.02 mL, 20.6 mmol) in 20 mL of THF which is cooled to −78° C. under N2. The mixture is stirred at −78° C. for 2 h. A solution of ethylene oxide (0.907 g, 20.6 mmol) in 10 mL of THF is added to the mixture at −78° C. and the mixture is stirred at −78° C. for 30 min. Saturated, aqueous NH4Cl is added and the mixture is warmed to rt. The pH of the aqueous phase is adjusted to ˜7 with 1.0 N HCl and the THF is evaporated. The solution is extracted with 3×20 mL of CH2Cl2 and the combined organic layers are dried over Na2SO4. Evaporation of the organic layer gives 1.7 g of an oil. Residual 3,5-dimethylisoxazole is removed by drying under high vacuum at rt for 2 h to give 1.3 g (45%) of the desired product as an orange oil. 1H NMR (400 MHz, CDCl3) δ 5.86 (s, 1 H), 3.72 (d, 2H), 2.85 (t, 2H), 2.28 (s, 3H), 1.91-2.00 (m, 2H), 1.65 (m, 1H).


Step 2 Preparation of 5-(3-bromopropyl)-3-methylisoxazole



embedded image


Bromine (0.109 mL, 2.12 mmol) is added to a solution of triphenylphosphine (0.557 g, 2.12 mmol) and pyridine (0.172 mL, 2.12 mmol) in 20 mL of CH2Cl2 which is cooled in an ice bath under N2. Triphenylphosphine is added until the yellow color disappears. 3-(3-Methylisoxazol-5-yl)propan-1-ol (0.200 g, 1.42 mmol) is added and the mixture is stirred with ice bath cooling for 15 min. The ice bath is removed and the mixture is stirred at rt for 1 h. The mixture is extracted with 3×20 mL of 1.0 N aqueous HCl followed by 20 mL of saturated, aqueous NaHCO3. The organic layer is dried over Na2SO4 and evaporation gives 0.4 g of a white solid. The solid is taken up in 20 mL of hexane and the solid is removed by filtration through a pad of silica gel (20 g). The pad is eluted with 200 mL of 50% EtOAc/hexane. Evaporation of the elutant gives 0.22 g (70%) of desired product as a clear oil. 1H NMR (400 MHz, CDCl3) δ 5.90 (s, 1H), 3.45 (t, 2H), 2.93 (t, 2H), 2.29 (s, 3H), 2.26 (m, 2H).


Intermediate G
2-Methoxy-3-phenylpropan-1-amine



embedded image


Step 1 Preparation of 1-azido-3-phenylpropan-2-ol



embedded image


A solution of 2-benzyloxirane (2.0 g, 15 mmol), sodium azide (1.06 g, 16.4 mmol) in DMF (10 mL) and water (2 mL) is heated at 65° C. for 18 h. The reaction is partitioned between ethyl acetate and brine (50 mL each), the layers are separated and the aqueous layer is extracted with ethyl acetate (3×25 mL). The organic layers are combined, dried with anhydrous sodium sulfate and concentrated. The residue is subjected to silica gel chromatography (230-400 mesh, 150 g, elution with 5, 10 and 20% ethyl acetate) to give 1.24 g (47%) of 1-azido-3-phenylpropan-2-ol as an oil. 1H NMR (400 MHz, CDCl3) δ 1.97 (1H, br s), 2.83 (2H, m), 3.31 (1H, m), 3.40 (1H, m), 4.02 (1H, m), 7.22-7.36 (5H, m); HPLC retention time: 3.23 min. (Method D).


Step 2 Preparation of (3-azido-2-methoxypropyl)benzene



embedded image


To a cold (0° C.) solution of 1-azido-3-phenylpropan-2-ol (0.354 g, 2.00 mmol) in dry THF (15 mL, 180 mmol) under nitrogen is added sodium hydride (0.0959 g, 2.40 mmol) as a solid. This mixture is stirred for 30 min. at 0° C. and methyl iodide (155 uL, 2.50 mmol) is added via syringe. The reaction mixture is then allowed to warm to room temperature and is stirred overnight. The reaction mixture is partitioned between saturated, aqueous ammonium chloride and ethyl acetate (30 mL each), the layers are separated and the aqueous layer is extracted with ethyl acetate (3×20 mL). The organic layers are combined, dried with anhydrous sodium sulfate and concentrated. The residue is subjected to silica gel chromatography (230-400 mesh, 40 g, elution with 10% ethyl acetate/hexane) to give 341 mg (89%) of (3-azido-2-methoxypropyl)benzene as a clear colorless oil. 1H NMR (400 MHz, CDCl3) δ 2.78 (1H, m), 2.93 (1H, dd), 3.19 (1H, m), 3.28 (1H, m), 3.42 (3H, s), 3.56 (1H, m), 7.20-7.33 (5H, m); HPLC retention time: 4.20 min. (Method D).


Step 3 Preparation of 2-methoxy-3-phenylpropan-1-amine



embedded image


A well-stirred slurry of (3-azido-2-methoxypropyl)benzene (341 mg, 1.78 mmol) and 10% palladium on carbon (38.0 mg, 0.357 mmol) in ethanol (10 mL) is subjected to 1 atm of hydrogen gas (balloon) for 18 h. The reaction mixture is diluted with ethyl acetate (10 mL) and is filtered through Celite. The filter pad is washed with ethyl acetate (3×10 mL) and the filtrate is concentrated. The residue is subjected to silica gel chromatography (230-400 mesh, 40 g, elution with 5% MeOH (7M NH3)/DCM) to give 146 mg (49%) of 2-methoxy-3-phenylpropan-1-amine as an oil. 1H NMR (400 MHz, CDCl3) δ 1.25, (2H, br s), 2.66 (1H, m), 2.77 (1H, m), 3.19 (1H, m), 2.92 (1H, dd), 3.36 (1H, m), 3.40 (3H, s), 7.20-7.33 (5H, m); MS (ESI+) for C10H15NO m/z 166.2 (M+H)+; HPLC retention time: 2.14 min. (Method D).


Intermediate H
3-(4-Chlorophenyl)-2-isopropoxypropan-1-amine



embedded image


Step 1 Preparation of 2-(4-chlorobenzyl)oxirane



embedded image


A well-stirred solution of 1-allyl-4-chlorobenzene (1.10 g, 7.21 mmol) in DCM (60 mL) is cooled at 0° C. and solid MCPBA (1.82 g, 7.93 mmol) is added over a five minute period. The ice bath is removed and the reaction is allowed to stir at rt for 18 h. The reaction is quenched with saturated, aqueous ammonium chloride (10 mL), partitioned between ethyl acetate and water (50 mL each), the layers are separated and the aqueous layer is extracted with ethyl acetate (3×25 mL). The organics are combined, dried with anhydrous sodium sulfate and concentrated. The residue is subjected to silica gel chromatography (230-400 mesh, 150 g, elution with 10% ethyl acetate/hexane) to give 945 mg (77%) of 2-(4-chlorobenzyl)oxirane as a clear, colorless oil. 1H NMR (400 MHz, CDCl3) δ 2.53 (1H, dd), 2.80 (1H, m), 2.85 (2H, m), 3.13 (1H, m), 7.19 (2H, d), 7.29 (2H, d); HPLC retention time: 3.72 min. (Method D).


Step 2 Preparation of 3-(4-chlorophenol)-2-isopropoxypropan-1-ol



embedded image


A slurry of 2-(4-chlorobenzyl)oxirane (0.970 g, 5.75 mmol) and indium trichloride (254.5 mg, 1.150 mmol) in isopropyl alcohol (12 mL) is stirred at 50° C. for 24 h. The reaction mixture is concentrated and then partitioned between DCM and water (200 mL each). The layers are separated and the aqueous layer is extracted with (3×100 mL). The organic layers are combined, dried with anhydrous sodium sulfate and concentrated. The residue is subjected to silica gel chromatography (230-400 mesh, 350 g, elution with 10,15, 20 and 25% ethyl acetate/hexane) to give 340 mg (25%) of 3-(4-chlorophenyl)-2-isopropoxypropan-1-ol as an oil. 1H NMR (400 MHz, CDCl3) δ 1.06 (3H, d), 1.16 (3H, d), 2.13 (1H, br s), 2.78 (2H, m), 3.45 (1H, m), 3.59 (3H, m), 7.17 (2H, d), 7.27 (2H, d); HPLC retention time: 3.74 min. (Method D).


Step 3 Preparation of 3-(4-chlorophenyl)-2-isopropoxypropyl methanesulfonate



embedded image


A solution of 3-(4-chlorophenyl)-2-isopropoxypropan-1-ol (360 mg, 1.6 mmol) and triethylamine (263 uL, 1.89 mmol) in DCM (7.8 mL, 120 mmol) is cooled at 0° C. and methanesulfonyl chloride (146 uL, 1.89 mmol) is added slowly via syringe. The reaction mixture is stirred at 0° C. for 1 h and is allowed to warm to rt. After 2 h at rt, the reaction is quenched with saturated, aqueous ammonium chloride (2 mL). The reaction mixture is partitioned between DCM and water (50 mL each), the layers are separated and the aqueous layer is extracted with DCM (3×30 mL). The organic layers are combined, dried with anhydrous sodium sulfate and concentrated to provide 465 mg (96%) of 3-(4-chlorophenyl)-2-isopropoxypropyl methanesulfonate. 1H NMR (400 MHz, CDCl3) δ 0.97 (3H, d), 1.14 (3H, d), 2.79 (2H, m), 3.06 (3H, s), 3.56 (1H, m), 3.75 (1H, m), 4.09 (1 H, m), 4.17 (1H, m), 7.16 (2H, d), 7.26 (2H, d); HPLC retention time: 4.34 min. (Method D).


Step 4 Preparation of 1-(3-azido-2-isopropoxypropyl)-4-chlorobenzene



embedded image


To a well-stirred solution of 3-(4-chlorophenyl)-2-isopropoxypropyl methanesulfonate (0.465 g, 1.52 mmol) in MeOH (6.0 g, 190 mmol) and water (3.0 g, 170 mmol) is added sodium azide (0.319 g, 4.91 mmol). The reaction mixture is heated at 65° C. for 72 h and cooled to rt. The mixture is concentrated to remove MeOH and the residue is partitioned between DCM and brine (30 mL each). The layers are separated and the aqueous layer is extracted with DCM (3×20 mL). The organic layers are combined, dried with anhydrous sodium sulfate and concentrated. The residue is subjected to silica gel chromatography (230-400 mesh, 50 g, elution with 5% ethyl acetate/hexane) to give 254 mg (66%) of 1-(3-azido-2-isopropoxypropyl)-4-chlorobenzene as an oil. 1H NMR (400 MHz, CDCl3) δ 1.03 (3H, d), 1.19 (3H, d), 2.78 (2H, m), 3.20 (2H, m), 3.62 (2H, m), 7.16 (2H, d), 7.26 (2 H, d); HPLC retention time: 5.01 min. (Method D).


Step 5 Preparation of 3-(4-chlorophenyl)-2-isopropoxypropan-1-amine



embedded image


To a cold (0° C.) well-stirred solution of 1-(3-azido-2-isopropoxypropyl)-4-chlorobenzene (0.254 g, 1.00 mmol) in dry THF (5.0 mL) is added 1.00 M of trimethylphosphine in THF (1.50 mL, 1.50 mmol). After 30 min. at 0° C., water (0.5 mL) is added, the ice bath is removed and stirring is continued for 2 h. The reaction mixture is partitioned between brine and ethyl acetate (50 mL each), the layers are separated and the aqueous layer is extracted with ethyl acetate (3×25 mL). The organic layers are combined, dried with anhydrous sodium sulfate and concentrated. The residue is subjected to silica gel chromatography (230-400 mesh, 10 g, elution with 5% MeOH (7M NH3)/DCM) to give 215 mg (94%) of 3-(4-chlorophenyl)-2-isopropoxypropan-1-amine as an oil. 1H NMR (400 MHz, CDCl3) δ 1.04 (3H, d), 1.18 (3H, d), 2.75 (4H, m), 3.54 (2H, m), 7.16 (2H, d), 7.26 (2H, d); MS (ESI+) for C12H18ClNO m/z 228.2 (M+H)+; HPLC retention time: 2.92 min (Method D).


Intermediate I
4-Ethyl-5-methyl-2-nitroaniline



embedded image


Step 1 Preparation of N-(4-ethyl-5-methylphenyl)acetamide



embedded image


Procedure A:

To a well-stirred solution of 4-bromo-3-methylacetanilide (5.0 g, 22 mmol) in anhydrous 1,4-dioxane (100 mL) is added [1,1′-bis(diphenylphosphino)-ferrocene]dichloropalladium(II) (0.802 g, 1.10 mmol). This mixture is sparged with nitrogen for 20 min. and diethyl zinc in hexane (0.8 M, 60.3 mL, 48.2 mmol) is added slowly via syringe. The reaction is stirred at rt under nitrogen for 15 min. and then heated at 80° C. for 2 h. The reaction is cooled to rt, diluted with ethyl acetate (100 mL), and washed with 1N HCl, water, saturated sodium bicarbonate and brine. The organic layers are dried with anhydrous sodium sulfate and concentrated. The residue is subjected to a silica gel (230-400 mesh, 50 g, elution with ethyl acetate) to give 3.80 g (98%) of N-(4-ethyl-5-methylphenyl)acetamide as a solid.


Procedure B:

A well-stirred slurry of 4-bromo-3-methylacetanilide (1.54 g, 6.77 mmol), ethylboronic acid (1.00 g, 13.5 mmol) and Cs2CO3 (6.4 g, 19.6 mmol) in anhydrous 1,4-dioxane (30 mL) is sparged with dry nitrogen for 10 min. [1,1′-Bis(diphenylphosphino)ferrocene]dichloropalladium(II), complex with DCM (1:1) (0.553 g, 0.677 mmol) is added and sparging is continued for an additional 10 min. The reaction mixture is then heated at 80° C. for 2 h, cooled to rt, diluted with ethyl acetate (20 mL) and filtered through Celite. The residue is subjected to silica gel chromatography (230-400 mesh, 150 g, elution with 50% ethyl acetate/hexane) to give 850 mg (71%) of N-(4-ethyl-5-methyl-phenyl)acetamide as a solid. 1H NMR (400 MHz, CDCl3) δ 1.17 (3H, t), 2.16 (3H, s), 2.27 (3H, s), 2.57 (2H, q), 7.08 (1H, d), 7.24 (2H, m); MS (ESI+) for C11H15NO m/z 178.2 (M+H)+; HPLC retention time: 3.28 min. (Method D).


Step 2 Preparation of N-(4-ethyl-5-methyl-2-nitrophenyl)acetamide



embedded image


To a cold (0° C.) well-stirred solution of 70% nitric acid (20 mL) and sulfuric acid (7.6 mL) is added N-(4-ethyl-5-methyl-phenyl)acetamide (4.0 g, 22 mmol) portionwise. After the addition is complete, the reaction mixture is stirred at 0° C. for 30 min. and poured onto ice (50 g). The reaction is partitioned between DCM and water (100 mL each), the layers are separated and the aqueous layer is extracted with DCM (3×50 mL). The organic layers are combined, washed with saturated, aqueous sodium bicarbonate solution, dried with anhydrous sodium sulfate and concentrated. The residue is subjected to silica gel chromatography (230-400 mesh, 350 g, elution with 10, 15 and 20% ethyl acetate/hexane) to give 3.0 g (60%) of N-(4-ethyl-5-methyl-2-nitrophenyl)acetamide as a yellow solid. 1H NMR (400 MHz, CDCl3) δ 1.17 (3H, t), 2.20 (3H, s), 2.31 (3H, s), 2.56 (2H, q), 7.92 (1 H, s), 8.46 (1H, s), 10.23 (1H, br s); MS (ESI+) for C11H14N2O3 m/z 245.2 (M+Na)+; HPLC retention time: 3.68 min. (Method D).


Step 3 Preparation of 4-ethyl-5-methyl-2-nitroaniline



embedded image


A well-stirred solution of N-(4-ethyl-5-methyl-2-nitrophenyl)acetamide (2.13 g, 9.01 mmol) in MeOH (40.0 mL) and 8.0 M of HCl (20.0 mL) is heated at 80° C. for 2 h. The reaction mixture is cooled to rt and then concentrated. The residue is suspended in water (100 mL) and the pH is adjusted to ˜10 with sodium carbonate. The mixture is then extracted with EtOAc (4×50 mL). The combined organic layers are washed with brine (1×50 mL) and then dried over anhydrous sodium sulfate. Concentration of the organic layers provided 4-ethyl-5-methyl-2-nitroaniline (1.60 g, 98%) as an orange solid. 1H NMR (400 MHz, CDCl3) δ 1.21 (3H, t), 2.26 (3H, s), 2.53 (2H, q), 5.91 (2H, br s), 6.59 (1H, s), 7.89 (1H, s); MS (ESI+) for C9H12N2O2 m/z 181.1 (M+H)+; HPLC retention time: 3.89 min. (Method D).


Intermediate J
Preparation of methyl 5-amino-2-methyl-4-nitrobenzoate



embedded image


A slurry of methyl 5-acetamido-2-methyl-4-nitrobenzoate [WO 2005/080388] (0.545 g, 2.16 mmol) in 8.0 M HCl (12 mL) and MeOH (15 mL) is heated at 70° C. for 18 h. The reaction mixture is cooled to rt, carefully partitioned between saturated, aqueous sodium bicarbonate and DCM (50 mL each), the layers are separated and the aqueous layer is extracted with DCM (4×25 mL). The organic layers are combined, dried with anhydrous sodium sulfate and concentrated. The residue is subjected to silica gel chromatography (230-400 mesh, 40 g, elution with 10, 15 and 20% ethyl acetate/hexane) to give 402 mg (88%) of methyl 5-amino-2-methyl-4-nitrobenzoate as a crystalline orange solid. 1H NMR (400 MHz, DMSO-d6) δ 2.04 (3H, s), 3.86 (3H, s), 7.89 (1H, s), 7.98 (1H, s), 10.32 (2 H, br s); MS (ESI+) for C9H10N2O4 m/z 209.1 (M−H); HPLC retention time: 3.57 min. (Method D).


Intermediate K
Preparation of 1-bromo-4,5-dimethyl-2-nitrobenzene



embedded image


A solution of aqueous HBr (53 mL, 48 wt % in water) in water (200 mL) is added to 4,5-dimethyl-2-nitroaniline (5.00 g, 30.1 mmol) and the orange slurry is heated at 70° C. for 30 min. The mixture is cooled to −5° C. and sodium nitrite (12.9 g, 186 mmol) dissolved in water (60 mL) is added slowly. When the addition is complete, the mixture is stirred at −5° C. for 15 min. A solution of copper (I) bromide (53.95 g, 376.1 mmol) in aqueous HBr (100 mL, 48 wt % in water) is added dropwise with gas evolution at a rate to keep the reaction temperature <0° C. After addition of the copper (I) bromide solution, the mixture is heated slowly to 70° C. During heating there is gas evolution. The mixture is kept at 70° C. for 15 min. then cooled to rt and extracted with 3×200 mL of CH2Cl2. The combined extracts are washed with 2N sodium hydroxide and then dried with sodium sulfate. Concentration provides a brown solid which is taken up in 20 mL of CH2Cl2 and adsorbed onto a silica gel pad (200 g). The pad is eluted with 800 mL of 50% CH2Cl2/hexane and the eluate is evaporated to give 5.8 g (83%) of 1-bromo-4,5-dimethyl-2-nitrobenzene as a yellow solid. 1H NMR (400 MHz, CDCl3) δ 7.71 (s, 1H), 7.52 (s, 1H), 2.32 (m, 6H).


Intermediate L
1-(3-Bromo-2-methylpropyl)-4-chlorobenzene



embedded image


Step 1 Preparation of ethyl 3-(4-chlorophenol)-2-methylpropanoate



embedded image


To a dry three-necked flask is added dry THF (70 mL, 900 mmol) followed by LDA in heptane (1.8 M, 15 mL, 27 mmol) and the stirred solution is cooled to −78° C. Ethyl propionate (2.82 mL, 24.5 mmol, dried by filtering through neutral alumina) is added by syringe over a 12 min., maintaining the reaction temperature below −75° C. After 20 min., a solution of 4-chlorobenzylbromide (10.07 g, 49.00 mmol) in THF (10 mL) is added dropwise by syringe (30 min.) at a rate that maintains the reaction temperature below −75° C. The reaction is allowed to warm to rt overnight and is stirred at rt for 5 days. The mixture is concentrated, diluted with EtOAc (80 mL), washed with water (3×20 mL) and concentrated to dryness giving a yellow oil. The residue is subjected to chromatography on silica gel using heptane followed by 1% EtOAc/heptane to give 3.5 g (57%) of 3-(4-chlorophenyl)-2-methylpropanoate as an oil. 1H NMR (DMSO-d6) δ 7.19 (m, 4H), 4.09 (q, 2H), 2.97 (m, 1H), 2.67 (m, 2H), 1.19 (m, 6H); MS (ESI−) for C12H15ClO2 m/z 227.25 (M−H).


Step 2 Preparation of 3-(4-chlorophenyl)-2-methylpropan-1-ol



embedded image


To a cold (0° C.) well-stirred solution of ethyl 3-(4-chlorophenyl)-2-methylpropanoate (2.71 g, 12.0 mmol) in dry THF (20 mL) is added LiAlH4 (0.4537 g, 11.95 mmol) in portions over a 2 min. period. After stirring overnight, the reaction is quenched by addition of ice (10 mL) followed by water (50 mL). After stirring for 20 min., the mixture is filtered through Celite (5×20 mL EtOH rinses). The filtrate is concentrated to 60 mL and EtOAc (80 mL) is added. The layers are separated and the organic layer is washed with water (4×10 mL). The organic layer is concentrated to give 2.12 g (96%) of 3-(4-chlorophenyl)-2-methylpropan-1-ol as an oil. 1H NMR (CDCl3) δ 7.19 (m, 4H), 3.50 (m, 2H), 2.75 (m, 1H), 2.40 (m, 1H), 1.91 (m, 1H), 0.91 (m, 3H).


Step 3 Preparation of 1-(3-bromo-2-methylpropyl)-4-chlorobenzene



embedded image


To a cold (0° C.), well-stirred solution of triphenylphosphine dibromide [freshly prepared from bromine (0.887 mL, 17.2 mmol) and triphenylphosphine (4.52 g, 17.2 mmol] in CH2Cl2 (60 mL) under nitrogen is added 3-(4-chlorophenyl)-2-methylpropan-1-ol (2.12 g, 11.5 mmol) as a solution in 10 mL of CH2Cl2. The reaction mixture is stirred with ice bath cooling for 20 min., the ice bath is removed and the reaction mixture is stirred at rt overnight. The reaction mixture is diluted with heptane (60 mL), concentrated, re-suspended in heptane and filtered. The solids are washed with heptane (4×100 mL) and the filtrates are combined and cooled at −5° C. for 2 days. The liquid is decanted off and concentrated to give 1-(3-bromo-2-methylpropyl)-4-chlorobenzene (2.6 g, 73%) as a clear colorless oil. 1H NMR (CDCl3) δ 7.30 (m, 4H), 3.35 (m, 2H), 2.75 (m, 1H), 2.55 (m, 1 H), 2.06 (m, 1H), 1.04 (m, 3H).


Intermediate M
1-(3-Bromo-1-methylpropyl)-4-chlorobenzene



embedded image


Step 1 Preparation of 3-(4-chlorophenyl)but-3-en-1-ol



embedded image


A stirred mixture of 3-bromobut-3-en-1-ol (1.10 g, 7.28 mmol), tetrakis(triphenylphosphine)palladium(0) (1.00 g, 0.865 mmol), potassium carbonate (2.01 g, 14.6 mmol), and benzene (14 mL) in water (7 mL) is sparged with N2 for 5 min. A solution of 4-chlorophenylboronic acid (1.48 g, 9.47 mmol) in EtOH (8 mL) is added and nitrogen sparging is continued for 5 additional min. The reaction mixture is heated at 74° C. for 18 h and then cooled to rt. Aqueous hydrogen peroxide (1 mL, 35%) is added and after 30 min., the mixture is diluted with ether (80 mL). The layers are separated, the organic layer is washed with water (2×30 mL) and concentrated. The residue is chromatographed (silica gel, 10 and 15% EtOAc/heptane) to give 3-(4-chlorophenyl)but-3-en-1-ol (0.65 g, 47%) as a yellow oil. 1H NMR (CDCl3) δ 7.25 (m, 4H), 5.33 (s, 1H), 5.11 (s, 1H), 3.66 (t, 2H), 2.70 (t, 2H).


Step 2 Preparation of 3-(4-chlorophenyl)butan-1-ol



embedded image


A stirred mixture of 3-(4-chlorophenyl)but-3-en-1-ol (1.060 g, 4.643 mmol), EtOAc (30 mL), zinc dibromide (0.2091 g, 0.9286 mmol) and 10% Pd/C (0.06 g, 0.06 mmol) is placed under 1 atmosphere of H2. After 90 h, the mixture was filtered through Solka Floc® (4×5 mL EtOAc rinses) and concentrated to a pale, brown oil. The oil is washed with hot heptane (3×15 mL) and then placed under high vacuum to give 3-(4-chlorophenyl)butan-1-ol (0.847 g, 91.9%) as an oil. 1H NMR (CDCl3) δ 7.12 (m, 4H), 3.49 (m, 2H), 2.80 (m, 1H), 1.76 (m, 2H), 1.19 (m, 3H).


Step 3 Preparation of 1-(3-bromo-1-methylpropyl)-4-chlorobenzene



embedded image


To a cold (0° C.), well-stirred solution of triphenylphosphine dibromide [freshly prepared from bromine (0.337 mL, 6.54 mmol) and triphenylphosphine (1.71 g, 6.54 mmol)] in 60 mL of CH2Cl2 is added 3-(4-chlorophenyl)butan-1-ol (0.847 g, 4.36 mmol) as a solution in 10 mL of CH2Cl2. The mixture is stirred with ice bath cooling for 20 min., the ice bath is removed and the mixture is stirred at rt for 2 h. After 2 h, the reaction mixture is diluted with heptane (60 mL), concentrated, re-suspended in heptane and filtered. The filtrate is evaporated to give 1-(3-bromo-1-methylpropyl)-4-chlorobenzene (0.719 g, 57%) as an oil. 1HNMR (CDCl3) δ 7.24 (m, 4H), 3.32 (m, 1H), 3.17 (m, 1H), 2:97 (m, 1H), 2.10 (m, 2 H), 1.28 (m, 3H).


Intermediate N
5-(4-Methoxybutyl)-4-methyl-N-(3-phenylpropyl)benzene-1,2-diamine



embedded image


Step 1 Preparation of N-(5-bromo-4-methyl-2-nitrophenyl)acetamide



embedded image


A mixture of N-(3-bromo-4-methylphenyl)acetamide (12.93 g, 56.69 mmol) (Lee et al, Adv. Syn. Cat. 2005, 347, 1921, the contents of which are incorporated by reference in their entirety) is heated in nitric acid (70% aqueous, 100 mL) at 50° C. for 2 h. The reaction is cooled to rt, poured over ice (100 g) and extracted with ethyl acetate. The combined organic extracts are washed with water, saturated, aqueous NaHCO3, brine, dried (sodium sulfate), filtered and concentrated. The residue is purified by flash chromatography (230-400 mesh, hexanes/ethyl acetate (5 to 15% containing 0.1% isopropanol) as eluant) to afford 6.33 g (41%) of the desired product as a yellow solid. 1H NMR (CDCl3) δ 2.31 (s, 3H), 2.44 (s, 3H), 8.09 (s, 1H), 9.08 (s, 1H), 10.27 (br s, 1H); MS (ESI+) for C9H9BrN2O3 m/z 274.1 (M)+.


Step 2 Preparation of 5-bromo-4-methyl-2-nitroaniline



embedded image


To a suspension of N-(5-bromo-4-methyl-2-nitrophenyl)acetamide (0.970 g, 3.55 mmol) in methanol (24.46 mL) is added 8.0 M aqueous HCl (19.54 mL, 156.3 mmol). The mixture is heated at 70° C. for 3 h, cooled, and the pH of the solution is adjusted to approximately 10 with solid NaHCO3. The mixture is extracted with ethyl acetate and the combined organic extracts are washed with saturated, aqueous NaHCO3, brine, dried (sodium sulfate), filtered and concentrated to afford 816 mg (99%) of the desired product as a yellow solid which is used without further purification. 1H NMR (CDCl3) δ 2.34 (s, 3 H), 5.9 (very broad exchangeable signal integrating for less than 2H), 7.10 (s, 1H), 7.99 (s, 1H). MS (ESI+) for C7H7BrN2O2 m/z 233.1 (M+H)+.


Step 3 Preparation of 5-bromo-4-methyl-2-nitro-N-(3-phenylpropybaniline



embedded image


To a cooled (0-5° C.) solution of 5-bromo-4-methyl-2-nitroaniline (0.400 g, 1.73 mmol) in DMF (20 mL) is added sodium hydride (0.077 g, 1.92 mmol). After 5 min., the ice bath is removed and the mixture is stirred at ambient temperature for 30 min. A solution of 1-bromo-3-phenylpropane (0.290 mL, 1.90 mmol) in DMF (5 mL) is added and the mixture is stirred overnight at rt. Acetic acid (3 mL) is added and the mixture is concentrated. The residue is purified by flash chromatography (230-400 mesh, hexanes/ethyl acetate (0 to 1% containing 0.1% isopropanol) as eluant) to afford 0.540 g (89%) of the desired product as a yellow solid. 1H NMR (CDCl3) δ 2.08 (m, 2H), 2.33 (s, 3H), 2.80 (t, 2H), 3.29 (q, 2 H), 7.03 (s, 1H), 7.27 (m, 5H), 7.91 (br t, 1H), 8.03 (s, 1H).


Step 4 Preparation of 5-allyl-4-methyl-2-nitro-N-(3-phenylpropyl)aniline



embedded image


A solution of 5-bromo-4-methyl-2-nitro-N-(3-phenylpropyl)aniline (0.540 g, 1.55 mmol) in N,N-dimethylformamide (7 mL) is sparged for 20 min. with N2. To this solution is added bis(triphenylphosphine)palladium(II) chloride (0.043 g, 0.06 mmol). After an additional 5 min. of N2 sparging, allyltributyltin (0.623 mL, 2.01 mmol) is added and the mixture is heated in a sealed tube for 3 h at 105° C. The mixture is diluted with water and extracted with ethyl acetate. The organic layer is washed with water, aqueous KF, brine, dried (sodium sulfate), filtered and concentrated. The residue is purified by flash chromatography (230-400 mesh, hexanes/ether (0 to 0.5%) as eluant) to afford 0.423 g (88%) of the desired product as an oil. 1H NMR (CDCl3) δ 2.06 (m, 2H), 2.21 (s, 3H), 2.79 (t, 3H), 3.32 (m, 4H), 5.16 (m, 2H), 5.91 (m, 1H), 6.59 (s, 1H), 7.28 (m, 5H), 7.97 (s, 1H), 8.04 (br m, 1H); MS (ESI+) for C19H22N2O2 m/z 311.4 (M+H)+.


Step 5 Preparation of 5-[(2E)-4-methoxybut-2-en-1-yl]-4-methyl-2-nitro-N-(3-phenylpropyl)aniline



embedded image


A solution of 5-allyl-4-methyl-2-nitro-N-(3-phenylpropyl)aniline (0.092 g, 0.30 mmol) and 10-camphorsulfonic acid (0.069 g, 0.30 mmol) in DCM (4 mL) is degassed by 3 cycles of freeze (liquid N2), pump, thaw. To this solution is added 3-methoxyprop-1-ene (0.55 mL, 5.93 mmol) followed by Grubbs second generation catalyst (0.025 g, 0.030 mmol) under an atmosphere of nitrogen. After 18 h at rt, the mixture is concentrated and the residue purified by flash chromatography (230-400 mesh, hexanes/ether (0.2 to 0.6%) as eluant) to afford 0.061 g (58%) of the desired product as an orange oil. 1H NMR (CDCl3) δ 2.06 (m, 2H), 2.18 (s, 3H), 2.79 (t, 2H), 3.32 (m, 7H), 3.91 (d, 2H), 5.56 (m, 1H), 5.79 (m, 1H), 6.56 (s, 1H), 7.25 (m, 5H), 7.96 (s, 1H), 8.03 (br t, 1H); MS (ESI+) for C21H26N2O3 m/z 355.4 (M+H)+.


Step 6 Preparation of 5-(4-methoxybutyl)-4-methyl-N-(3-phenylpropyl)benzene-1,2-diamine



embedded image


A slurry of 5-[(2E)-4-methoxybut-2-en-1-yl]-4-methyl-2-nitro-N-(3-phenylpropyl)aniline (0.060 g, 0.17 mmol) and Raney Nickel (ca. 20 mg) in ethanol (15 mL) is stirred at rt under 1 atm of hydrogen gas (balloon) for 18 h. The reaction mixture is diluted with ethanol (25 mL), filtered through celite and concentrated to give 0.055 g (72%) of the desired product as a tan solid. 1H NMR (CDCl3) δ 1.26 (m, 2H), 1.59 (m, integration obscured by water peak), 2.00 (m, 2H), 2.17 (s, 3H), 2.52 (t, 2H), 2.79 (t, 2H), 3.14 (t, 2 H), 3.35 (s, 3H), 3.41 (t, 2H), 6.42 (s, 1H), 6.53 (s, 1H), 7.28 (m, 5H); MS (ESI+) for C21H30N2O m/z 327.4 (M+H)+.


Intermediate 0
3-(4-Chlorophenyl)-2,2-dimethylpropan-1-amine



embedded image


Step 1 Preparation of ethyl 3-(4-chlorophenyl)-2,2-dimethylpropanoate



embedded image


To a cooled (−78° C.) solution of N,N-diisopropylamine (1.327 mL, 9.47 mmol) in THF (6.0 mL) is added n-butyllithium (3.788 ml of a 2.500 M solution in hexane, 9.47 mmol). The solution is stirred at −78° C. for 20 min. and then allowed to warm with stirring to approximately −15° C. (iPrOH/ice) for 20 min. The pale, yellow solution is re-cooled to −78° C. and a solution of 2-methylpropanoic acid, ethyl ester (1.151 mL, 8.60 mmol) in THF (2.0 mL) is added. The solution is stirred at −78° C. for 5 min. then stirred at approximately −15° C. for an additional 20 min. The solution is re-cooled to −78° C. and a solution of 1-(bromomethyl)-4-chlorobenzene (1.946 g, 9.47 mmol) in THF (2 mL) is added. After 1 h, the dry ice bath is removed and the reaction mixture is allowed to stir at ambient temperature for 16 h. Saturated, aqueous NH4Cl is added and the mixture is diluted with ether. The layers are separated and the organic layer washed with water, brine, dried (sodium sulfate), filtered and concentrated. The residue is purified by flash chromatography (230-400 mesh, hexanes/ether (0 to 5%) as eluant) to afford 1.80 g (87%) of the desired product as an oil. 1H NMR (CDCl3) δ 1.18 (s, 6H), 1.25 (t, 3H), 2.84 (s, 2 H), 4.12 (q, 2H), 7.06 (d, 2H), 7.24 (d, 2H); MS (ESI+) for C13H17ClO2 m/z 241.1 (M+H)+.


Step 2 Preparation of 3-(4-chlorophenyl)-2,2-dimethylpropan-1-ol



embedded image


To a cooled (0-5° C.) slurry of LAH (0.175 g, 4.61 mmol) in THF (10 mL) is slowly added a solution of ethyl 3-(4-chlorophenyl)-2,2-dimethylpropanoate (1.00 g, 4.15 mmol) in THF (5 mL). The reaction mixture is allowed to warm to rt and is stirred overnight. The reaction is quenched by the sequential slow addition of water (0.175 mL), 15% aqueous NaOH (0.175 mL) followed by water (0.525 mL) with virorous stirring. The mixture is stirred for 1 h, diluted with ethyl ether and filtered through Celite. The salts are washed with ethyl ether and the combined organics are dried (sodium sulfate), filtered, and concentrated to afford 0.796 g (96%) of a pale, yellow oil which is used without further purification.


Step 3 Preparation of 1-(3-azido-2,2-dimethylpropyl)-4-chlorobenzene



embedded image


To a cooled (0-5° C.) solution of 3-(4-chlorophenyl)-2,2-dimethylpropan-1-ol (0.430 g, 2.16 mmol) in DCM (10 mL) is added triethylamine (0.528 mL, 3.79 mmol) followed by methanesulfonyl chloride (10 mL, 100 mmol) dropwise. After 1 h at 0-5° C., the reaction mixture is diluted with additional DCM and washed with ice cold water, cold 0.1 N aqueous HCl, saturated, aqueous NaHCO3, brine, dried (sodium sulfate), filtered and concentrated to afford the crude intermediate mesylate which is used without further purification.


To a solution of the mesylate described above in DMF (6 mL) is added sodium azide (1.120 g, 17.3 mmol). The mixture is heated in a sealed tube at 125° C. for 16 h, cooled to rt and diluted with ethyl acetate. The organic layers are washed with water and brine, dried (sodium sulfate), filtered and concentrated. The residue is purified by flash chromatography (230-400 mesh, hexane/ethyl acetate (5%) as eluant) to afford 0.162 g (79%) of the desired product as an oil. 1H NMR (CDCl3) δ 0.93 (s, 6H), 2.55 (s, 2H), 3.07 (s, 2H), 7.08 (d, 2H), 7.27 (d, 2H).


Step 4 Preparation of 3-(4-chlorophenyl)-2,2-dimethylpropan-1-amine



embedded image


To a cold (0-5° C.) well-stirred solution of 1-(3-azido-2,2-dimethylpropyl)-4-chlorobenzene (0.220 g, 0.983 mmol) in tetrahydrofuran (4.9 mL) is added trimethylphosphine (1.48 mL of a 1.00 M solution in THF, 1.48 mmol). After 90 min. at 0-5° C., water (0.5 mL) is added, the ice bath is removed and stirring is continued for 2 h. The reaction is partitioned between brine and ethyl acetate, the layers are separated and the aqueous layer is extracted with ethyl acetate. The combined organic layers are dried (sodium sulfate), filtered and concentrated. The residue is purified by flash chromatography (230-400 mesh, DCM/2% 0.07 N methanolic ammonia as eluant) to afford 0.124 g (64%) of the desired product as an oil. 1H NMR (CDCl3) δ 0.84 (s, 6H), 1.33 (br s, 2H), 2.48 (s, 2H), 2.51 (s, 2H), 7.08 (d, 2H), 7.27 (d, 2H); MS (ESI+) for C11H16ClN m/z 198.1 (M+H)+.


Intermediate P
N-(3-{4-[(2,6-Dimethylmorpholin-4-yl)methyl]phenyl}propyl)-4,5-dimethyl-2-nitroaniline



embedded image


Step 1 Preparation of ethyl 3-{4-[(2,6-dimethylmorpholin-4-yl)methyl]phenyl}propanoate



embedded image


To a solution of ethyl 3-(4-formylphenyl)propanoate (Najera, C., Botella, L. Tetrahedron 2005 61, 9688, the contents of which are incorporated by reference in their entirety) (1.010 g, 4.90 mmol) in 1,2-dichloroethane (20 mL) is added 2,6-dimethyl-morpholine (0.603 mL, 4.90 mmol). The solution is stirred for 30 min. and sodium triacetoxyborohydride (1.297 g, 6.12 mmol) is added. After 16 h, the mixture is diluted with ethyl acetate and the organic layers are washed with saturated, aqueous NaHCO3, brine, dried (sodium sulfate), filtered and concentrated. The residue is purified by flash chromatography (230-400 mesh, DCM/0.07 N methanolic ammonia (0.5-1%) as eluant) to afford 0.849 g (56%) of the desired product as an oil. The product is isolated as an approximately equal mixture of diastereomers. 1H NMR (CDCl3) δ 1.15 (d, 3H), 1.25 (m, 6H), 1.76 (m, 1H), 2.16 (m, 1 H), 2.46 (m, 1H), 2.63 (t, 2H), 2.70 (m, 1H), 2.96 (t, 2H), 3.43 (m, 2H), 3.71 (m, 1H), 4.04 (m, 1H), 4.15 (m, 2H), 7.17 (m, 2H), 7.27 (m, 2H); MS (ESI+) for C18H27NO3 m/z 306.3 (M+H)+.


Step 2 Preparation of 3-{4[(2,6-dimethylmorpholin-4-yl)methyl]phenyl}propan-1-ol



embedded image


To a cooled (0-5° C.) slurry of LAH (0.109 g, 2.88 mmol) in THF (10 mL) is slowly added a solution of ethyl 3-{4-[(2,6-dimethylmorpholin-4-yl)methyl]phenyl}propanoate (1.840 g, 2.74 mmol) in THF (5 mL). The reaction is allowed to warm to rt and stirred overnight. The reaction is quenched by the sequential slow addition of water (0.110 mL), 15% aqueous NaOH (0.110 mL), followed by water (0.330 mL) with virorous stirring. The mixture is stirred for 1 h, diluted with ethyl ether and filtered through Celite. The salts are washed with ethyl ether and the combined organics are dried (sodium sulfate), filtered, and concentrated to afford 0.720 g (95%) of oil as an equal mixture of diastereomers which is used without further purification. 1H NMR (CDCl3) δ 1.16 (d, 3H), 1.25 (d, 3H), 1.91 (m, 2H), 2.16 (m, 1H), 2.46 (m, 1H), 2.72 (m, 3H), 3.43 (m, 2H), 3.70 (m, 3H), 4.03 (m, 1H), 7.20 (m, 4H); MS (ESI+) for C16H25NO2 m/z 364.3 (M+H)+.


Step 3 Preparation of N-(3-{4-[(2,6-dimethylmorpholin-4-ynmethyl]phenyl}propyl)-4,5-dimethyl-2-nitroaniline



embedded image


To a cooled (0-5° C.) solution of 3-{4-[(2,6-dimethylmorpholin-4-yl)methyl]phenyl}propan-1-ol (0.790 g, 3.00 mmol) in DCM (10 mL) is added triphenylphosphine dibromide (1.384 g, 3.15 mmol). The mixture is stirred at 0-5° C. for 10 min. and then at ambient temperature for an additional 3 h. The reaction is quenched by the addition of water. The mixture is diluted with additional DCM and the layers are separated. The organic layer is washed with water, then saturated, aqueous NaHCO3, brine, dried (sodium sulfate), filtered, and partially concentrated (with a bath temperature not exceeding 25° C.) to a final volume of approximately 10 mL. DMF (10 mL) is added and the remaining DCM removed at reduced pressure at 25° C. The intermediate bromide is used without further purification in the next step.


To a cold (0-5° C.) solution of 4,5-dimethyl-2-nitroaniline (0.548 g, 3.30 mmol) in DMF (15 mL) was added sodium hydride (0.132 g, 3.30 mmol) portion wise. The mixture was stirred for 5 min. at 0-5° C. and an additional 20 min. at ambient temperature. To this mixture is added the DMF solution of bromide prepared above and the mixture is stirred at rt for 16 h. The reaction is quenched by the addition of acetic acid (3 mL). The mixture is concentrated and the residue is then concentrated twice from CHCl3 containing 0.07 N methanolic ammonia. The residue is purified by flash chromatography (230-400 mesh, DCM/0.07 N methanolic ammonia (0.25-1%) as eluant) to provide diastereomers. Faster eluting isomer (234 mg, 19%): 1H NMR (CDCl3) δ 1.25 (d, 6H), 2.06 (m, 2H), 2.18 (m, 5 H), 2.25 (s, 3H), 2.47 (m, 2H), 2.77 (t, 2H), 3.35 (m, 4H), 4.03 (m, 2H), 6.57 (s, 1H), 7.18 (d, 2H), 7.28 (d, 2H), 7.93 (s, 1H), 8.04 (br t, 1H); MS (ESI+) for C24H33N3O3 m/z 412.3 (M+H)+. Slower eluting isomer (248 mg, 20%): 1H NMR (CDCl3) δ 1.15 (d, 6H), 1.81 (m, 2H), 2.09 (m, 2H), 2.19 (s, 3H), 2.26 (s, 3H), 2.78 (m, 4H), 2.32 (m, 2H), 3.53 (m, 2H), 3.75 (br m, 2H), 6.57 (s, 1H), 7.24 (m, 4H), 7.94 (s, 1H), 8.04 (br m, 1 H).


Intermediate Q
4-Isopropyl-2-nitroaniline



embedded image


Step 1 Preparation of 2,2,2-trifluoro-N-(4-isopropyl-2-nitrophenyl)acetamide



embedded image


To a well-stirred solution of trifluoroacetic anhydride (50 mL) at 0° C. under nitrogen is added p-isopropylaniline (5.06 mL, 37.0 mmol) dropwise via syringe. Stirring at 0° C. is continued for 30 min. and potassium nitrate (4.12 g, 40.8 mmol) is added as a solid. The slurry is stirred at 0° C. for 1 h and is allowed to warm to rt overnight. This mixture is poured onto ice (200 g) and extracted with ethyl acetate (4×100 mL). The organic layers are combined, dried with anhydrous sodium sulfate and concentrated. The residue is subjected to silica gel chromatography (230-400 mesh, 350 g, elution with 10 and 15% ethyl acetate/hexane) to give 6.3 g (62%) of 2,2,2-trifluoro-N-(4-isopropyl-2-nitrophenyl)acetamide as a yellow solid. 1H NMR (CDCl3) δ 1.30 (6H, d), 3.02 (1H, hep), 7.63 (1H, dd), 8.15 (1H, d), 8.63 (1H, d), 11.28 (1H, br s); MS (ESI+) for C11H11F3N2O3 m/z 275.4 (M−H); HPLC retention time: 4.48 min. (Method D).


Step 2 Preparation of 4-isopropyl-2-nitroaniline



embedded image


To a well-stirred solution of 2,2,2-trifluoro-N-(4-isopropyl-2-nitrophenyl)acetamide (2.1 g, 7.6 mmol) in MeOH (40 mL) is added water (20 mL) and potassium carbonate (0.5 g, 4 mmol). The reaction mixture is stirred at rt for 18 h and partitioned between ethyl acetate and brine (50 mL each). The layers are separated and the aqueous layer is extracted with ethyl acetate (3×25 mL). The organic layers are combined, dried with anhydrous sodium sulfate and concentrated. The residue is subjected to silica gel chromatography (230-400 mesh, 150 g, elution with 20 and 30% ethyl acetate/hexane) to give 1.18 g (61%) of 4-isopropyl-2-nitroaniline as an orange oil. 1H NMR (CDCl3) δ 1.23 (6H, d), 2.85 (1H, hep), 6.77 (1H, d), 7.28 (1H, dd), 7.96 (1H, d); MS (ESI+) for C9H12N2O2 m/z 181.2 (M+H)+; HPLC retention time: 3.97 min. (Method D).


Intermediate R
N-[3-(4-Chlorophenyl)-2-methylpropyl]-4-isopropyl-2-nitroaniline



embedded image


A vial containing 4-isopropyl-2-nitroaniline (0.274 g, 1.52 mmol), 1-(3-bromo-2-methylpropyl)-4-chlorobenzene (0.500 g, 1.76 mmol), tetra-n-butylammonium iodide (0.16 g, 0.43 mmol) and DIPEA (4 mL) is shaken at 130° C. After 18 h, additional 1-(3-bromo-2-methylpropyl)-4-chlorobenzene (0.300 g, 1.05 mmol) is added and the mixture is shaken for 6 h at 130° C., followed by overnight at 120° C. The mixture is cooled to rt and then chromatographed on silica gel using heptane to 1% EtOAc/heptane, giving the desired product as a red oil (199 mg; 25%). MS (ESI+) for C19H23ClN2O2 m/z 347.1 (M+H)+. HPLC retention time 6.2 min. (method D).


Intermediate S
4,5-dimethyl-2-nitro-N-(2-phenylethyl)aniline



embedded image


A mixture of 4,5-dimethyl-2-nitroaniline (0.325 g, 1.90 mmol), 1-bromo-2-phenylethane (1 mL, 7 mmol) and DIPEA (0.50 mL, 2.9 mmol) is shaken at 130° C. After 3 h, additional DIPEA (0.2 mL, 1 mmol) is added and heating is continued. After 4 h, the mixture is cooled to rt, diluted with EtOAc (50 mL)/Et2O (100 mL), washed with water, and the organic layer is separated and concentrated. The residue is chromatographed on silica gel using 2.5% EtOAc/heptane to give desired product as a red liquid (193 mg; 37%). MS (ESI+) for C16H18N2O2 m/z 271.2 (M+H)+.


Intermediate T
1-(3-Bromo-2-ethoxypropyl)-4-chlorobenzene



embedded image


A solution of triphenylphosphine (3.6 g, 14 mmol) in DCM (200 mL) is cooled at 0° C. and a solution of bromine (0.72 mL, 14 mmol) in DCM (10 mL) is added slowly over a period of 30 min. A solution of 3-(4-chlorophenyl)-2-ethoxypropan-1-ol (2.72 g, 12.7 mmol) in DCM (20 mL) is then added and the reaction allowed to warm to rt and is stirred for 24 h. The reaction is then transferred to a separatory funnel, washed with saturated, aqeous sodium bicarbonate, water and brine. The organic layer is dried with anhydrous sodium sulfate and concentrated. The residue is subjected to silica gel chromatography (230-400 mesh, 350 g, elution with 5% ethyl acetate/hexane) to give a total of 3.18 g of the product as a clear colorless oil. 1H NMR (400 MHz, CDCl3) δ ppm 1.17 (3H, t), 2.85 (1H, dd), 2.96 (2H, dd), 3.41 (3H, m), 3.62 (2H, m), 7.20 (2H, d), 7.29 (2H, d); HPLC retention time: 5.18 min. (Method D).


Intermediate U
4-Cyclopentyl-2-nitroaniline



embedded image


To a well-stirred solution of trifluoroacetic anhydride (20 mL, 200 mmol) at 0° C. under nitrogen is added 4-cyclopentylaniline (2.50 g, 15.5 mmol) dropwise via syringe. Stirring at 0° C. is continued for 30 min. The cyclopentylaniline does not dissolve. CH2Cl2 (20 mL) is added and the mixture is stirred at 0° C. for 30 min. Potassium nitrate (1.96 g, 19.4 mmol) is added as a solid. The slurry is stirred at 0° C. for 1 h and at rt for 4 h. The mixture is poured onto ice (200 g) and stirred at rt for 0.5 hour. The solid is collected by filtration and washed with water (3×200 mL). Air drying at rt for 0.5 hr gives a red solid. The solid is taken up in MeOH (300 mL) and potassium carbonate (3.21 g, 23.2 mmol) is added. The resulting slurry is stirred at rt for 4 h. The MeOH is evaporated and the residue is partitioned between 200 mL of CH2Cl2 and 200 mL of water. The water layer is extracted with 2×200 mL of CH2Cl2. The combined organic layers are dried over Na2SO4 and evaporated. The remaining oil is chromatographed in 50% CH2Cl2/hexane on 150 g of silica gel to give 1.7 g of 4-cyclopentyl-2-nitroaniline as an orange solid. 1H NMR (400 MHz, CDCl3) δ ppm 7.99 (d, 1H), 7.23-7.34 (m, 1H), 6.77 (d, 1H), 5.93 (br s, 2H), 2.87-3.00 (m, 1H), 1.94-2.14 (m, 2H), 1.71 (m, 2H), 1.65-1.87 (m, 2H), 1.54 (m, 2 H).


Intermediate V
1-(3-Bromo-2-ethoxypropyl)-4-methylbenzene



embedded image


Step 1 Preparation of ethyl-2-ethoxy-3-(4-methylphenyl)acrylate



embedded image


To a cooled (0-5° C.) solution of ethoxyacetic acid, ethyl ester (1.50 mL, 11.01 mmol) and p-tolualdehyde (0.87 mL, 7.34 mmol) in tetrahydrofuran (20 mL) is added potassium tert-butoxide (988 mg, 8.81 mmol) portionwise. After 1 h, the ice bath is removed and the solution is stirred at ambient temperature overnight. The mixture is diluted with ethyl acetate and washed with saturated, aqueous NH4C1, 0.1 N HCl, saturated, aqueous NaHCO3, brine, dried with anhydrous sodium sulfate, filtered and concentrated. The residue is purifed by flash chromatography (hexane/dichloromethane 20-50% as eluent) to afford 905 mg of the title compound as an oil. 1H NMR (CDCl3) δ 1.39 (overlapping m, 6 H), 2.38 (s, 3H), 4.01 (q, 2H), 4.32 (q, 2H), 7.00 (s, 1H), 7.20 (d, 2H), 7.71 (d, 2H); MS (ESI−) for C14H18O3 m/z 233.1 (M−H).


Step 2 Preparation of ethyl 2-ethoxy-3-(4-methylphenyl)propanoate



embedded image


To a flask containing ethyl 2-ethoxy-3-(4-methylphenyl)acrylate (905 mg, 3.86 mmol) and 10% Pd/C (90 mg) is added ethyl acetate (25 mL). The mixture is stirred under 1 atm of H2 overnight, filtered through celite and concentrated to provide 868 mg of the title compound as an oil which is used without further purification. 1H NMR (CDCl3) δ 1.18 (t, 3H), 1.24 (t, 3H), 2.33 (s, 3H), 2.99 (d, 2H), 3.47 (m, 2H), 4.01 (t, 1H), 4.19 (q, 2 H), 7.13 (q, 4H); HPLC retention time: 4.97 min. (Method G).


Step 3 Preparation of 2-ethoxy-3-(4-methylphenyl)propan-1-ol



embedded image


To a cooled (0-5° C.) flask containing lithium aluminum hydride (155 mg, 4.08 mmol) is slowly added tetrahydrofuran (10 mL). The mixture is stirred for 10 min at rt then cooled (0-5° C.). A solution of ethyl 2-ethoxy-3-(4-methylphenyl)propanoate (868 mg, 3.67 mmol) in THF (5 mL) is added dropwise and the mixture is stirred an additional 5 min. at 0-5° C. The ice bath is removed and the reaction mixture is stirred at rt overnight. The reaction is quenched with vigorous stirring by the sequential addition of water (0.15 mL), 15% aqueous NaOH (0.15 mL), and water (0.45 mL). The solids are removed by filtration through a pad of Celite and the filtrate dried (anhydrous sodium sulfate), filtered and concentrated at reduced pressure to provide 640 mg of the title compound as an oil which is used without further purification. 1H NMR (CDCl3) δ 1.21 (t, 3H), 1.97 (m, 1 H), 2.34 (s, 3H), 2.79 (m, 2H), 3.51 (overlapping m, 5H), 7.11 (s, 4H); HPLC retention time: 5.17 min. (Method G).


Step 4 Preparation of 1-(3-bromo-2-ethoxypropyl)-4-methylbenzene



embedded image


To a cooled (0-5° C.) solution of triphenylphosphine (1.296 g, 4.94 mmol) in DCM (10 mL) is added bromine (0.254 mL, 4.94 mmol) dropwise. After 10 min, additional triphenylphosphine (130 mg, 0.49 mmol) is added leading to the formation of a colorless solution. A solution of 2-ethoxy-3-(4-methylphenyl)propan-1-ol (640 mg, 3.29 mmol) in DCM (3 mL) is then added and the reaction is allowed to warm to rt and is stirred for 3 h. The reaction mixture is then transferred to a separatory funnel; washed with saturated, aqueous sodium bicarbonate, water and brine; and the combined organic layers are dried with anhydrous sodium sulfate and concentrated. The residue is purified by flash chromatography (hexane/ethyl acetate 1-5% as eluent) to give 733 mg of the title compound as an oil. 1H NMR (CDCl3) δ 1.97 (t, 3H), 2.34 (s, 3H), 2.91 (m, 2H), 3.43 (overlapping m, 5H), 7.14 (m, 4H); HPLC retention time: 5.49 min. (Method G).


Intermediate W
3-(4-Chlorophenyl)-2-ethoxypropan-1-amine



embedded image


Step 1 Preparation of ethyl 3-(4-chlorophenyl)-2-ethoxyacrylate



embedded image


To a cooled (0-5° C.) solution of ethoxyacetic acid, ethyl ester (0.750 mL, 5.50 mmol) and 4-chlorobenzaldehyde (516 mg, 3.67 mmol) in DMF (15 mL) is added potassium tert-butoxide (494 mg, 4.40 mmol) portionwise. After 1 h, the ice bath is removed and the solution is stirred at rt overnight. The reaction mixture is diluted with ethyl acetate and washed with saturated aqueous NH4Cl, 0.1 N HCl, saturated NaHCO3, brine, dried with anhydrous sodium sulfate, filtered and concentrated. The residue is purified by flash chromatography (hexane/dichloromethane 20-30% as eluent) to afford 510 mg of the title compound as an oil. 1H NMR (CDCl3) δ 1.38 (overlapping m, 6H), 4.03 (q, 2H), 4.32 (q, 2H), 6.93 (s, 1H), 7.35 (d, 2H), 7.74 (d, 2H); HPLC retention time: 5.55 min. (Method G).


Step 2 Preparation of ethyl 3-(4-chlorophenyl)-2-ethoxypropanoate



embedded image


To a flask containing ethyl 3-(4-chlorophenyl)-2-ethoxyacrylate (300 mg, 1.18 mmol), zinc dibromide (53 mg, 0.24 mmol) and 10% palladium on carbon (20 mg, 0.19 mmol) is added ethyl acetate (10 mL). The mixture is stirred under an atmosphere of H2 overnight. The flask is evacuated, recharged with an atmosphere of H2 and is stirred overnight. The mixture is filtered through celite and washed with water, brine, dried (sodium sulfate), filtered and concentrated to afford 300 mg of the title compound as an oil which is used without further purification. 1H NMR (CDCl3) δ 1.20 (t, 3H), 1.27 (t, 3H), 3.02 (m, 2H), 3.51 (m, 1H), 3.70 (m, 1H), 4.04 (t, 1H), 4.23 (q, 2H), 7.21 (d, 2H), 7.28 (d, 2H); HPLC retention time: 5.05 min. (Method G).


Step 3 Preparation of 3-(4-chlorophenyl)-2-ethoxypropan-1-ol



embedded image


To a cooled (0-5° C.) flask containing lithium aluminum hydride (49 mg, 1.29 mmol) is slowly added tetrahydrofuran (4 mL). The mixture is stirred for 10 min. at rt then cooled (0-5° C.). A solution of ethyl 3-(4-chlorophenyl)-2-ethoxypropanoate (300 mg, 1.17 mmol) in THF (5 mL) is added dropwise and the mixture is stirred an additional 5 min. at 0-5° C. The ice bath is removed and the reaction is stirred at rt overnight. With vigorous stirring the reaction is quenched by the sequential addition of water (0.05 mL), 15% aqueous NaOH (0.05 mL), and water (0.15 mL). The solids are removed by filtration through a pad of Celite and the filtrate is dried (anhydrous sodium sulfate), filtered and concentrated at reduced pressure to provide 243 mg of the title compound as a pale yellow oil which is used without further purification. 1H NMR (CDCl3) δ 1.19 (t, 3H), 1.96 (br t, 1H), 2.80 (m, 2H), 3.50 (overlapping m, 5H), 7.16 (d, 2H), 7.28 (d, 2H); HPLC retention time: 3.85 min. (Method G).


Step 4 Preparation of 1-(3-azido-2-ethoxypropyl)-4-chlorobenzene



embedded image


To a cooled (0-5° C.) solution of 3-(4-chlorophenyl)-2-ethoxypropan-1-ol (240 mg, 1.12 mmol) in DCM (8 mL) is added triethylamine (0.234 mL, 1.68 mmol) followed by methanesulfonyl chloride (0.108 mL, 1.40 mmol) dropwise. After 1 h, the ice bath is removed and the mixture is stirred at rt for 30 min. The reaction mixture is diluted with additional DCM and quenched by the addition of ice cold, saturated, aqueous NH4Cl. The organic layer is separated and washed with cold water, cold 0.1 N HCl, cold saturated, aqueous NaHCO3, dried (sodium sulfate), filtered and concentrated to afford an oil which is used without further purification.


To a solution of the crude mesylate prepared above in DMF (3 mL) is added sodium azide (581 mg, 8.94 mmol). The mixture is heated in a sealed tube at 65° C. overnight. The mixture is cooled to room temperature, diluted with ethyl acetate and washed with water, brine, dried (sodium sulfate), filtered and concentrated. The residue is purified by flash chromatography (hexane/ethyl acetate 10%) to afford 150 mg of the title compound as an oil. 1H NMR (CDCl3) δ 1.19 (t, 3H), 2.85 (m, 2H), 2.23 (m, 2H), 3.54 (overlapping m, 3 H), 7.16 (d, 2H), 7.28 (d, 2H); HPLC retention time: 5.30 min. (Method G).


Step 4 Preparation of 3-(4-chlorophenyl)-2-ethoxypropan-1-amine



embedded image


To a cold (0-5° C.), well-stirred solution of 1-(3-azido-2-ethoxypropyl)-4-chlorobenzene (620 mg, 2.59 mmol) in dry THF (13 mL) is added trimethylphosphine (3.88 mL of a 1.00 M solution in THF, 3.88 mmol). After 2 h, water (0.5 mL) is added, the ice bath is removed and stirring is continued for 2 h at rt. The reaction mixture is partitioned between brine and ethyl acetate, the layers separated and the aqueous layer extracted several times with ethyl acetate. The combined organic layers are dried (sodium sulfate), filtered and concentrated. The residue is purified by flash chromatography (DCM/MeOH 1-3% 0.07 NH3) to afford 335 mg of the title compound as a solid. 1H NMR (CDCl3) δ 1.18 (t, 3H), 1.31 (br s, 2H), 2.75 (overlapping m, 4H), 3.45 (overlapping m, 3H), 7.15 (d, 2H), 7.27 (d, 2H); HPLC retention time: 3.02 min. (Method G).


Intermediate X
1-[(1R)-3-Bromo-1-methylpropyl]-4-chlorobenzene



embedded image


Step 1 Preparation of triethyl (2S)-2-(4-chlorophenyl)propane-1,1,1-tricarboxylate



embedded image


To a well-stirred solution of (1R)-1-(4-chlorophenyl)ethanol (1.00 g, 6.38 mmol) and triethylmethanetricarboxylate (2.69 mL, 12.8 mmol) in dry toluene (12.8 mL) under dry nitrogen is added a 1M solution of trimethylphosphine in THF (12.8 mL, 12.8 mmol) via syringe. The mixture is cooled at −78° C. and DIAD (2.51 mL, 12.8 mmol) is added slowly over a period of 15 min. The reaction is stirred at −78° C. for 1 h, the bath is removed and stirring is continued as the bath warmed to rt for an additional 4 h. The reaction mixture is concentrated, dissolved in diethyl ether (100 mL) and washed with 1N NaOH (2×50 mL) and 1N HCl (1×50 mL). The organics are dried with anhydrous sodium sulfate, concentrated and the residue is subjected to silica gel chromatography (230-400 mesh, 150 g, elution with 5 and 10% ethyl acetate/hexane) to give 1.90 g of triethyl (2S)-2-(4-chlorophenyl)propane-1,1,1-tricarboxylate as an oil. 1H NMR (400 MHz, CDCl3) δ ppm 1.20 (9H, t), 1.47 (3H, d), 3.82 (1H, q), 4.17 (6H, m), 7.24 (2H, d), 7.36 (2H, d); MS (ESI+) for C18H23ClO6 m/z 371.1 (M+H)+; HPLC retention time: 5.20 min. (Method D).


Step 2 Preparation of (3R)-3-(4-chlorophenyl)butanoic acid



embedded image


A solution of triethyl (2S)-2-(4-chlorophenyl)propane-1,1,1-tricarboxylate (1.90 g, 5.12 mmol) and 3.30 M sodium hydroxide (9.3 mL, 31 mmol) in MeOH (10 mL) is heated at 70° C. for 18 h. The reaction mixture is concentrated and re-dissolved in AcOH (30 mL). The mixture is heated at 120° C. for 18 h, cooled to rt, concentrated and azeotroped with toluene (3×) to remove any residual acetic acid. The reaction mixture is then partitioned between 10% citric acid and ethyl acetate (50 mL each), the layers are separated and the aqueous layer is extracted with ethyl acetate (3×30 mL). The combined organic layers are combined, dried with anhydrous sodium sulfate and concentrated to give 0.976 g of (3R)-3-(4-chlorophenyl)butanoic acid as an oil that solidified on standing. 1H NMR (400 MHz, CDCl3) δ ppm 1.30 (3H, d), 2.61 (2H, m), 3.26 (1H, m), 7.16 (2H, d), 7.27 (2H, d); MS (ESI−) for C11H11ClO2 m/z 197.0 (M−H)−; HPLC retention time: 3.69 min. (Method D).


Step 3 Preparation of (3R)-3-(4-chlorophenyl)butan-1-ol



embedded image


A slurry of LAH (0.669 g, 17.6 mmol) in dry THF (70 mL) is stirred at 0° C. under nitrogen and a solution of (3R)-3-(4-chlorophenyl)butanoic acid (1.75 g, 8.81 mmol) in THF (20 mL) added slowly. The reaction mixture is allowed to warm to rt and is stirred overnight. The reaction mixture is cooled at 0° C. and sodium sulfate decahydrate (200 mg) is added carefully. The mixture is then stirred at rt for 4 h. Water (2.0 mL) is added, the mixture is diluted with ether and is filtered through Celite. The salts are washed with ether and the filtrate is concentrated. The residue is subjected to silica gel chromatography (230-400 mesh, 350 g, elution with 20% ethyl acetate/hexane) to give 1.19 g of (3R)-3-(4-chlorophenyl)butan-1-ol as an oil that solidified on standing. 1H NMR (400 MHz, CDCl3) δ ppm 1.27 (3H, d), 1.83 (2H, m), 2.90 (1H, m), 3.56 (2H, m), 7.15 (2H, d), 7.26 (2H, d); HPLC retention time: 3.77 min. (Method D); optical rotation [α]D26 −37.5 (c=1.36, EtOH).


Step 4 Preparation of 1-[(1R)-3-bromo-1-methylpropyl]-4-chlorobenzene



embedded image


A solution of triphenylphosphine (1.6 g, 6.0 mmol) in DCM (40 mL, 600 mmol) is cooled at 0° C. and a solution of bromine (0.31 mL, 6.0 mmol) in DCM (10 mL) is added slowly over a period of 30 min. A solution of (3R)-3-(4-chlorophenyl)butan-1-ol (1.0 g, 5.4 mmol) in DCM (10 mL) is then added and the reaction mixture is allowed to warm to rt and is stirred for 24 h. The reaction mixture is then transferred to a separatory funnel; washed with saturated, aquous sodium bicarbonate, water and brine; the organics are dried with anhydrous sodium sulfate and concentrated. The residue is subjected to silica gel chromatography (230-400 mesh, 150 g, elution with 5% ethyl acetate/hexane) to give a total of 1.26 g of 1-[(1R)-3-bromo-1-methylpropyl]-4-chlorobenzene as a clear, colorless oil. 1H NMR (400 MHz, CDCl3) δ ppm 1.26 (3H, d), 2.08 (2H, m), 2.96 (1H, m), 3.15 (1 H, m), 3.32 (1H, m), 7.14 (2H, d), 7.28 (2H, d); HPLC retention time: 5.44 min.


Intermediate Y
1-[(1S)-3-Bromo-1-methylpropyl]-4-chlorobenzene



embedded image


Step 1 Preparation of triethyl (2R)-2-(4-chlorophenyl)propane-1,1,1-tricarboxylate



embedded image


To a well-stirred solution of (1S)-1-(4-chlorophenyl)ethanol (2.00 g, 12.8 mmol) and triethyl methanetricarboxylate (5.37 mL, 25.5 mmol) in dry toluene (25 mL) under dry nitrogen is added a 1M solution of trimethylphosphine in THF (25.5 mL, 25.5 mmol) via syringe. The mixture is cooled at −78° C. and DIAD (5.03 mL, 25.5 mmol) is added slowly over a period of 15 min. The reaction mixture is stirred at −78° C. for 1 h, the bath is removed and stirring is continued as the bath warmed to rt for an additional 4 h. The reaction mixture is concentrated, dissolved in diethyl ether (200 mL) and washed with 1N NaOH (2×100 mL) and 1N HCl (1×100 mL). The organic layer is dried with anhydrous sodium sulfate, concentrated and the residue is subjected to silica gel chromatography (230-400 mesh, 350 g, elution with 5 and 10% ethyl acetate/hexane) to give 3.97 g of triethyl (2R)-2-(4-chlorophenyl)propane-1,1,1-tricarboxylate as an oil. 1H NMR (400 MHz, CDCl3) δ ppm 1.20 (9H, t), 1.47 (3H, d), 3.82 (1H, q), 4.17 (6H, m), 7.24 (2H, d), 7.36 (2H, d); MS (ESI+) for C18H23ClO6 m/z 371.1 (M+H)+; HPLC retention time: 5.20 min. (Method D).


Step 2 Preparation of (3S)-3-(4-chlorophenyl)butanoic acid



embedded image


A solution of triethyl (2R)-2-(4-chlorophenyl)propane-1,1,1-tricarboxylate (3.97 g, 10.7 mmol) and 3.30 M sodium hydroxide (20 mL, 66 mmol) in MeOH (30 mL) is heated at 70° C. for 18 h. The reaction mixture is concentrated and re-dissolved in AcOH (60 mL). This mixture is heated at 120° C. for 18 h, cooled to rt, concentrated and azeotroped with toluene (3×) to remove any residual acetic acid. The reaction mixture is then partitioned between 10% citric acid and ethyl acetate (100 mL each), the layers are separated and the aqueous layer is extracted with ethyl acetate (3×630 mL). The organic layers are combined, dried with anhydrous sodium sulfate and concentrated to give 2.1 g of (3S)-3-(4-chlorophenyl)butanoic acid as an oil that solidifies on standing. 1H NMR (400 MHz, CDCl3) δ ppm 1.30 (3H, d), 2.61 (2H, m), 3.26 (1H, m), 7.16 (2H, d), 7.27 (2H, d); MS (ESI) for C11H11ClO2 m/z 197.0 (M−H); HPLC retention time: 3.69 min. (Method D).


Step 3 Preparation of (3S)-3-(4-chlorophenyl)butan-1-ol



embedded image


A slurry of LAH (0.80 g, 21.1 mmol) in dry THF (70 mL) is stirred at 0° C. under nitrogen and a solution of (3S)-3-(4-chlorophenyl)butanoic acid (2.10 g, 10.6 mmol) in THF (20 mL) added slowly. The reaction mixture is allowed to warm to rt and is stirred overnight. The reaction is cooled at 0° C. and sodium sulfate decahydrate (3 g) is added carefully. The mixture is then stirred at rt for 4 h. Water (2.0 mL) is added, the mixture is diluted with ether and filtered through Celite. The salts are washed with ether and the filtrate concentrated. The residue is subjected to silica gel chromatography (230-400 mesh, 350 g, elution with 20% ethyl acetate/hexane) to give 1.35 g of (35)-3-(4-chlorophenyl)butan-1-ol as an oil that solidified on standing. 1H NMR (400 MHz, CDCl3) δ ppm 1.27 (3H, d), 1.83 (2H, m), 2.90 (1H, m), 3.56 (2H, m), 7.15 (2H, d), 7.26 (2H, d); HPLC retention time: 3.77 min. (Method D); optical rotation [α]D26 +38.3 (C=1.31, EtOH).


Step 4 Preparation of 1-[(1S)-3-bromo-1-methylpropyl]-4-chlorobenzene



embedded image


A solution of triphenylphosphine (1.6 g, 6.0 mmol) in DCM (40 mL, 600 mmol) is cooled at 0° C. and a solution of bromine (0.31 mL, 6.0 mmol) in DCM (10 mL) is added slowly over a period of 30 min. A solution of (3S)-3-(4-chlorophenyl)butan-1-ol (1.0 g, 5.4 mmol) in DCM (10 mL) is then added and the reaction is allowed to warm to rt and is stirred for 24 h. The reaction mixture is then transferred to a separatory funnel; washed with saturated, aqueous sodium bicarbonate, water and brine. The organic layer is dried with anhydrous sodium sulfate and concentrated. The residue is subjected to silica gel chromatography (230-400 mesh, 150 g, elution with 5% ethyl acetate/hexane) to give 1.15 g of 1-[(1S)-3-bromo-1-methylpropyl]-4-chlorobenzene as a clear colorless oil. 1H NMR (400 MHz, CDCl3) δ ppm 1.26 (3H, d), 2.08 (2H, m), 2.96 (1H, m), 3.15 (1H, m), 3.32 (1H, m), 7.14 (2H, d), 7.28 (2H, d); HPLC retention time: 5.44 min.


Example 1
7,8-Dimethyl-10-(3-phenylpropvl)benzo[g]pteridine-2,4(3H,10H)-dione



embedded image


Step 1 Preparation of 4,5-dimethyl-2-nitro-N-(3-phenylpropyl)aniline



embedded image


To a 0° C. solution of 4,5-dimethyl-2-nitroaniline (3.0 g, 0.018 mol) in dry DMF (80 mL) is added sodium hydride (722 mg, 0.0180 mol) portion wise (gas evolution). After 15 min., the cooling bath is removed and solution is stirred 30 min. at rt. To this solution is added 1-bromo-3-phenylpropane (3.29 mL, 0.0217 mol) dropwise via syringe. After 18 h at rt, the reaction is concentrated in vacuo to remove DMF and the residue partitioned between DCM and saturated ammonium chloride solution (200 mL each). The layers are separated, the aqueous layer is extracted with DCM (3×100 mL), and the organics are combined, dried with anhydrous sodium sulfate and concentrated. The residue is subjected to silica gel chromatography (230-400 mesh, 350 g, elution with 5% EtOAc/hexane) to give 3.51 g (68%) of the desired product as an orange oil. 1H NMR (400 MHz, CDCl3) δ 2.06 (2H, m), 2.18 (3H, s), 2.24 (3H, s), 2.78 (2H, t), 3.30 (2H, t), 6.54 (1H, s), 7.23 (3H, m), 7.31 (2H, m), 7.93 (1H, s), 8.04 (1H, br s); MS (ESI+) for C17H20N2O2 m/z 285.2 (M+H)+, HPLC retention time: 5.54 min. (Method A).


Step 2 Preparation of 4,5-dimethyl-N-(3-phenylpropyl)benzene-1,2-diamine



embedded image


A slurry of 4,5-dimethyl-2-nitro-N-(3-phenylpropyl)aniline (2.31 g, 8.12 mmol) and Raney Nickel (200 mg, 3 mmol) in ethanol (50 mL) is stirred at rt under 1 atm of hydrogen gas (balloon) for 18 h. The reaction mixture is diluted with ethyl acetate (50 mL), filtered through Celite and concentrated to give 2.0 g (96%) of the desired product as a white solid. 1H NMR (400 MHz, DMSO-d6) δ 1.86 (2H, m), 1.98 (3H, s), 2.01 (3H, s), 2.69 (2H, t), 2.97 (2H, t), 6.15 (1H, s), 6.33 (1H, s), 7.23 (5H, m); MS (ESI+) for C17H22N2 m/z 255.3 (M+H)+, HPLC retention time: 3.36 min. (Method A).


Step 3 Preparation of 7,8-dimethyl-10-(3-phenylpropyl)benzo[g]pteridine-2,4(3H,10H)-dione



embedded image


To a mixture of 4,5-dimethyl-N-(3-phenylpropyl)benzene-1,2-diamine (1.00 g, 3.93 mmol), alloxan (0.63 g, 3.9 mmol) and boric acid (0.73 g, 12 mmol) is added acetic acid (10 mL). The reaction is then stirred at rt for 18 h. The acetic acid is removed in vacuo and the reaction is partitioned between DCM and brine (200 mL each). The layers are separated and the aqueous layer is extracted with DCM (5×50 mL). The organics are combined, dried with anhydrous sodium sulfate and concentrated. The residue is subjected to silica gel chromatography (adsorbed onto 40 g of silica gel; column, 230-400 mesh, 150 g, elution with 1 and 1.5% MeOH/CHCl3) to give 645 mg (45%) of the desired product as an amorphous yellow solid. 1H NMR (400 MHz, DMSO-d6) δ 2.03 (2H, m), 2.38 (3H, s), 2.44 (3H, s), 2.80 (2H, t), 4.59 (2H, m), 7.26 (5H, m), 7.54 (1H, s), 7.89 (1H, s), 11.30 (1H, s); MS (ESI+) for C21H20N4O2 m/z 361.2 (M+H)+, HPLC retention time: 3.51 min. (Method A).


Example 2
12-(3-Phenylpropyl)-8,9-dihydrol[1,4]benzodioxino[6,7-g]pteridine-2,4(3H,12H)-dione



embedded image


Step 1 Preparation of 7-nitro-N-(3-phenylpropyl)-2,3-dihydro-1,4-benzodioxin-6-amine



embedded image


To a 0° C. solution of 7-nitro-2,3-dihydro-1,4-benzodioxin-6-amine (0.500 g, 2.55 mmol) in dry DMF (12 mL, 150 mmol) is added sodium hydride (0.102 g, 2.55 mmol) portion wise (gas evolution). After 15 min, cooling bath is removed and solution stirred 30 min at rt. To this solution is added 1-bromo-3-phenylpropane (0.465 mL, 3.06 mmol) dropwise via syringe. After 18 h at rt, the reaction is concentrated in vacuo to remove DMF and the residue is partitioned between DCM and saturated ammonium chloride (50 mL each). The layers are separated, the aqueous is extracted with DCM (3×200 mL), and the organics are combined, dried with anhydrous sodium sulfate and concentrated. The residue is subjected to silica gel chromatography (230-400 mesh, 150 g, elution with 5, 10 and 20% EtOAc/hexane) to give 0.695 g (87%) of the desired product as an orange oil. 1H NMR (400 MHz, CDCl3) δ 2.05 (2H, m), 2.77 (2H, t), 3.22 (2H, m), 4.22 (2H, m), 4.33 (2H, m), 6.19 (1H, s), 7.22 (3H, m), 7.31 (2H, m), 7.74 (1H, s), 8.02 (1H, br s); MS (ESI+) for C17H18N2O4 m/z 315.1 (M+H)+, HPLC retention time: 4.92 min. (Method A).


Step 2 Preparation of N-(3-phenylpropyl)-2,3-dihydro-1,4-benzodioxine-6,7-diamine (2B)



embedded image


A mixture of 7-nitro-N-(3-phenylpropyl)-2,3-dihydro-1,4-benzodioxin-6-amine (675 mg, 2.15 mmol) and Raney nickel (50 mg, 0.8 mmol) in ethanol (15 mL, 260 mmo) is stirred at rt under 1 atm of hydrogen gas (balloon) for 24 h. The mixture is filtered through Celite, the filter pad is washed with ethyl acetate and the filtrate is concentrated to give 590 mg (96%) of the desired product as an oil. MS (ESI+) for C17H20N2O2 m/z 285.3 (M+H)+, HPLC retention time: 3.07 min. (Method A).


Step 3 Preparation of 12-(3-phenylpropyl)-8,9-dihydro[1,4]benzodioxino[6,7-g]pteridine-2,4(3H,12H)-dione



embedded image


To a mixture of N-(3-phenylpropyl)-2,3-dihydro-1,4-benzodioxine-6,7-diamine (0.590 g, 2.07 mmol), boric acid (0.385 g, 6.22 mmol) and alloxan (0.349 g, 2.18 mmol) is added acetic acid (10 mL). The reaction is then stirred at rt for 18 h. The acetic acid is removed in vacuo, and the reaction is partitioned between DCM and brine (100 mL each), the layers are separated and the aqueous layer is extracted with DCM (5×30 mL). The organics are combined, dried with anhydrous sodium sulfate and concentrated. The residue is subjected to silica gel chromatography (adsorbed onto 40 g of silica gel; column, 230-400 mesh, 50 g, elution with 1 and 2% MeOH/CHCl3) to give 169 mg (20%) of the desired product as an amorphous orange solid. 1H NMR (400 MHz, DMSO-d6) δ 2.00 (2H, t), 2.78 (2H, m), 4.40 (2H, m), 4.50 (2H, m), 4.57 (2H, d), 7.18 (1H, m), 7.26 (4H, m), 7.38 (1H, s), 7.59 (1H, s), 11.24 (1H, s); MS (ESI) for C21H180N4O4 m/z 391.1 (M+H)+, HPLC retention time: 3.08 min. (Method A).


Example 3
7-Methyl-10-(2-phenoxyethyl)benzo[g]pteridine-2,4(3H,10H)-dione



embedded image


Step 1 Preparation of 4-methyl-2-nitro-N-(2-phenoxyethyl)aniline



embedded image


To a 0° C. solution of 3-nitro-4-aminotoluene (1.02 g, 6.70 mmol) in dry DMF (20 mL) is added sodium hydride (0.295 g, 7.37 mmol) portion wise (gas evolution). After 15 min., the cooling bath is removed and solution is stirred 30 min. at rt. To this solution is added (2-bromoethoxy)benzene (1.62 g, 8.04 mmol) dropwise via syringe. After 18 h at rt, the reaction is concentrated in vacuo to remove DMF and the residue is partitioned between DCM and saturated, aqueous ammonium chloride (50 mL each). The layers are separated, the aqueous is extracted with DCM (3×20 mL), and the organics are combined, dried with anhydrous sodium sulfate and concentrated. The residue is subjected to silica gel chromatography (230-400 mesh, 150 g, elution with 5, 10 and 20% EtOAc/hexane) to give 1.22 g (66%) of the desired product as an orange oil. 1H NMR (400 MHz, CDCl3) δ 2.28 (3H, s), 3.73 (2H, q), 4.24 (2H, t), 6.86 (1H, d), 6.94 (2H, d), 6.99 (1H, t), 7.31 (3H, t), 8.00 (1H, s), 8.23 (1H, br s); MS (ESI+) for C15H16N2O3 m/z 273.1 (M+H)+, HPLC retention time: 4.94 min. (Method A).


Step 2 Preparation of 4-methyl-N1-(2-phenoxyethyl)benzene-1,2-diamine



embedded image


A slurry of 4-methyl-2-nitro-N-(2-phenoxyethyl)aniline (0.260 g, 0.955 mmol) and Raney nickel (30 mg, 0.5 mmol) in ethanol (10 mL) is stirred at rt under 1 atm of hydrogen gas for 18 h. The reaction is filtered through Celite, the filer pad is washed with ethyl acetate, and the filtrate is concentrated to give 227 mg (98%) of the desired product as an oil. MS (ESI+) for C15H18N2O m/z 243.3 (M+H)+, HPLC retention time: 3.11 min. (Method A).


Step 3 Preparation of 7-methyl-10-(2-phenoxyethyl)benzo[g]pteridine-2,4(3H,10H)-dione



embedded image


To a mixture of 4-methyl-N1-(2-phenoxyethyl)benzene-1,2-diamine (110.0 mg, 0.4540 mmol), alloxan (76.3 mg, 0.477 mmol) and boric acid (84.2 mg, 1.36 mmol) is added acetic acid (4.0 mL). The reaction is then stirred at rt for 48 h. The acetic acid is removed in vacuo, the reaction is partitioned between DCM and saturated sodium bicarbonate solution (50 mL each), the layers are separated and the aqueous layer is extracted with DCM (5×20 mL). The organics are combined, washed with 10% citric acid, dried with anhydrous sodium sulfate and concentrated. The residue is subjected to silica gel chromatography (adsorbed onto 40 g of silica gel; column; 230-400 mesh, 40 g, elution with 2 to 3% EtOH/CHCl3) to give 96 mg of the impure product as an amorphous orange-yellow solid. The product is re-crystallized from ethanol to give 24 mg (15%) of the purified product as a yellow crystalline solid. 1H NMR (400 MHz, DMSO-d6) δ 4.39 (2 H, t), 5.00 (2H, t), 6.85 (2H, d), 6.90 (1H, t), 7.24 (2H, t), 7.80 (1H, dd), 7.93 (1H, s), 8.08 (1H, d), 11.38 (1H, s); MS (ESI+) for C19H160N4O3 m/z 349.1 (M+H)+, HPLC retention time: 3.19 min. (Method A).


Example 4
10-[3-(2,6-Difluorophenybpropyl]-7,8-dimethylbenzo[g]pteridine-2,4(3H,10H)-dione



embedded image


Step 1 Preparation of N-[3-(2,6-difluorophenyl)propyl]-4,5-dimethylbenzene-1,2-diamine



embedded image


A well-stirred slurry of 1-bromo-3-(2,6-difluorophenyl)propane (250 mg, 1.1 mmol), 4,5-dimethyl-o-phenylenediamine (0.58 g, 4.2 mmol), sodium bicarbonate (0.18 g, 2.1 mmol) and tetra-n-butylammonium iodide (0.039 g, 0.11 mmol) in toluene (10 mL) is heated at 70° C. under nitrogen for 18 h. The reaction is cooled to rt, partitioned between water and ethyl acetate (50 mL each), the layers are separated and the aqueous layer is extracted with ethyl acetate (3×20 mL). The organics are combined, dried with anhydrous sodium sulfate and concentrated. The residue is subjected to silica gel chromatography (230-400 mesh, 40 g, elution with 5% ethyl acetate/hexane) to give 160 mg (51%) of the desired product as an oil. 1H NMR (400 MHz, CDCl3) δ 1.95 (2H, m), 2.13 (3H, s), 2.17 (3H, s), 2.82 (2H, t), 3.13 (2H, t), 6.44 (1H, s), 6.53 (1H, s), 6.86 (2H, t), 7.15 (1H, m); MS (ESI+) for C17H20F2N2 m/z 291.1 (M+H)+, HPLC retention time: 3.48 min. (Method A).


Step 2 Preparation of 10-[3-(2,6-difluorophenyl)propyl]-7,8-dimethylbenzo[g]pteridine-2,4(3H,10H)-dione



embedded image


To a mixture of N-[3-(2,6-difluorophenyl)propyl]-4,5-dimethylbenzene-1,2-diamine (158 mg, 0.54 mmol), alloxan (91.5 mg, 0.57 mmol) and boric acid (101 mg, 1.63 mmol) is added acetic acid (5 mL). The reaction is then stirred at rt for 72 h. The acetic acid is removed in vacuo. The reaction is slurried in water and filtered. The solid is triturated with hot ethanol, cooled and the precipitate is collected by filtration. The resulting solid provides 121 mg (56%) of the desired product as an amorphous orange solid. 1H NMR (400 MHz, DMSO-d6) δ 1.98 (2H, m), 2.32 (3H, s), 2.47 (3H, s), 2.86 (2H, t), 4.65 (2 H, t), 7.09 (2H, m), 7.33 (1H, m), 7.62 (1H, s), 7.90 (1H, s), 11.30 (1H, s); MS (ESI+) for C21H18F2N4O2 m/z 397.1 (M+H)+, HPLC retention time: 3.57 min. (Method A).


Example 5
10-(3-{4-[2-(Dimethylamino)ethoxy]phenyl}propyl)-7,8-dimethyl benzo[g]pteridine-2,4(3H,10H)-dione



embedded image


Step 1 Preparation of methyl 3-{4-[2-(dimethylamino)ethoxy]phenyl}propanoate



embedded image


To a well-stirred solution of methyl 3-(4-hydroxyphenyl)propanoate (1.15 g, 6.38 mmol), N,N-dimethylaminoethanol (0.70 mL, 7.02 mmol) and triphenylphosphine (1.84 g, 7.02 mmol) in dry THF (50 mL) at rt is added DIAD (1.38 mL, 7.02 mmol) dropwise. The reaction mixture is stirred at rt for 18 h. The reaction is concentrated and subjected to silica gel chromatography (230-400 mesh, 150 g, elution with 20% THF/CHCl3 followed by 2% MeOH (saturated with NH3)/CHCl3) to give 950 mg (59%) of the desired product as a clear colorless oil. 1H NMR (400 MHz, CDCl3) δ 2.30 (6H, s), 2.59 (2H, t), 2.71 (2 H, t), 2.88 (2H, t), 3.66 (3H, s), 4.03 (2H, t), 6.85 (2H, d), 7.10 (2H, d); MS (ESI+) for C14H21NO3 m/z 252.2 (M+H)+, HPLC retention time: 2.41 min. (Method A).


Step 2 Preparation of 3-{4-[2-(dimethylamino)ethoxy]phenyl}propan-1-ol



embedded image


To a well-stirred solution of methyl 3-{4-[2-(dimethylamino)ethoxy]phenyl}propanoate (310 mg, 1.2 mmol) in dry THF (10 mL) at rt is added LiBH4 (110 mg, 4.9 mmol). After 18 h at rt, the reaction is quenched with saturated ammonium chloride (10 mL), extracted with ethyl acetate (20 mL each) and the organics are combined, dried with anhydrous sodium sulfate and concentrated. The residue is subjected to silica gel chromatography (230-400 mesh, 50 g, elution with 1:1 ethyl acetate/hexane) to give 106 mg (38%) of the desired product as a clear colorless oil that solidified on standing. 1H NMR (400 MHz, CDCl3) δ 1.87 (2H, m), 2.67 (2H, m), 2.72 (6H, s), 3.20 (2H, t), 3.68 (2H, m), 4.37 (2 H, t), 6.84 (2H, m), 7.13 (2H, d); MS (ESI+) for C13H21NO2 m/z 224.3 (M+H)+, HPLC retention time: 3.43 min. (Method A).


Step 3 Preparation of N-(3-{4-[2-(dimethylamino)ethoxy]phenyl}propyl)-N-(4,5-dimethyl-2-nitrophenyl)-2,2,2-trifluoroacetamide



embedded image


To a well stirred solution of 3-{4-[2-(dimethylamino)ethoxy]phenyl}propan-1-ol (106 mg, 0.47 mmol), N-(4,5-dimethyl-2-nitrophenyl)-2,2,2-trifluoroacetamide (0.124 g, 0.47 mmol) [Synthetic Commun. 1996 26, 4065] and triphenylphosphine (0.136 g, 0.52 mmol) in dry 1,2-dimethoxyethane (5.0 mL) at 0° C. is added DIAD (102 uL, 0.52 mmol) slowly via syringe. The reaction is allowed to stir at 0° C. for 30 min. and is warmed to rt overnight. The reaction is concentrated and the residue is subjected directly to silica gel chromatography (230-400 mesh, 50 g, elution with 2, 3, 4 and 5% MeOH (saturated with NH3)/DCM) to give 120 mg (54%) of the product as an oil. MS (ESI+) for C23H28F3N3O4 m/z 480.2 (M+Na)+, HPLC retention time: 4.60 min. (Method A).


Step 4 Preparation of N-(3-{4-[2-(dimethylamino)ethoxy]phenyl}propyl)-4,5-dimethyl-2-nitroaniline



embedded image


A solution of N-(3-{4-[2-(dimethylamino)ethoxy]phenyl}propyl)-N-(4,5-dimethyl-2-nitrophenyl)-2,2,2-trifluoroacetamide (120 mg, 0.26 mmol) and K2CO3 (0.106 g, 0.770 mmol) in MeOH (3.0 mL) is stirred at rt for 18 h. The reaction mixture is partitioned between 5% sodium carbonate and DCM (50 mL each), the layers are separated and the aqueous layer is extracted with DCM (3×20 mL). The organics are combined, dried with anhydrous sodium sulfate and concentrated. The residue is subjected to silica gel chromatography (230-400 mesh, 50 g, elution with 2 and 3% MeOH (saturated with NH3)/DCM) to give 36 mg (38%) of the desired product as an oil. 1H NMR (400 MHz, CDCl3) δ 2.02 (2H, m), 2.17 (3H, s), 2.24 (3H, s), 2.70 (2H, m), 2.71 (6H, s), 3.20 (2H, t), 3.29 (2H, m), 4.38 (2H, t), 6.55 (1H, s), 6.84 (2H, d), 7.14 (2H, d), 7.92 (1H, s), 8.00 (1H, br s); MS (ESI+) for C21H29N3O3 m/z 372.2 (M+H)+, HPLC retention time: 5.38 min. (Method A).


Step 5 Preparation of N-(3-{4-[2-(dimethylamino)ethoxy]phenyl}propyl)-4,5-dimethylbenzene-1,2-diamine



embedded image


A slurry of N-(3-{4-[2-(dimethylamino)ethoxy]phenyl}propyl)-4,5-dimethyl-2-nitroaniline (36 mg, 0.097 mmol) and Raney nickel (20 mg, 0.3 mmol) in ethanol (5.0 mL, 86 mmol) is subjected to 1 atm of hydrogen gas for 18 h. The reaction mixture is filtered through Celite, the filter pad is washed with ethyl acetate and the organics are combined and concentrated to give 24 mg (72%) of desired product as a colorless oil. 1H NMR (400 MHz, CDCl3) δ 1.86 (2H, m), 2.04 (3H, s), 2.07 (3H, s), 2.27 (6H, s), 2.62 (2H, t), 2.69 (2H, t), 3.04 (2H, m), 4.00 (2H, t), 6.33 (1H, s), 6.44 (1H, s), 6.77 (2H, d), 7.04 (2 H, d); MS (ESI+) for C21H31N3O m/z 342.3 (M+H)+, HPLC retention time: 2.54 min. (Method A).


Step 6 Preparation of 10-(3-[4-[2-(dimethylamino)ethoxy]phenyl]propyl)-7,8-dimethylbenzo[g]pteridine-2,4(3H,10H)-dione



embedded image


To a mixture of N-(3-{4-[2-(dimethylamino)ethoxy]phenyl}propyl)-4,5-dimethylbenzene-1,2-diamine (24.0 mg, 0.070 mmol), alloxan (11.2 mg, 0.070 mmol) and boric acid (13.0 mg, 0.211 mmol) is added acetic acid (2.0 mL). The reaction is then stirred at rt for 72 h. The acetic acid is removed in vacuo and the residue is subjected to silica gel chromatography (230-400 mesh, 50 g, elution with 5% MeOH/DCM then 5% MeOH (saturated with NH3)/DCM) to give 21 mg (66%) of the desired product as an amorphous yellow solid. 1H NMR (400 MHz, DMSO-d6) δ 1.99 (2H, m), 2.20 (6H, s), 2.38 (3H, s), 2.44 (3H, s), 2.60 (2H, t), 2.72 (2H, t), 4.00 (2H, t), 4.57 (2H, m), 6.86 (2H, d), 7.17 (2 H, d), 7.49 (1H, s), 7.89 (1H, s), 11.30 (1H, s); MS (ESI+) for C25H29N5O3 m/z 448.2 (M+H)+, HPLC retention time: 2.54 min. (Method A).


Example 6
10-[3-(4-Chlorophenyl)propyl]-7,8-dimethylbenzo[g]pteridine-2,4(3H,10H)-dione



embedded image


Step 1 Preparation of N-[3(4-chlorophenyl)propyl]-4,5-dimethyl-2-nitroaniline



embedded image


A well-stirred slurry of 1-bromo-4,5-dimethyl-2-nitrobenzene (2.24 g, 9.72 mmol) [prepared by the method of Martin Langner, Chemistry—A European Journal, 2005, 11, 6254, the contents of which are incorporated by reference in their entirety], 3-(4-chlorophenyl)propan-1-amine (1.10 g, 6.48 mmol), cesium carbonate (4.22 g, 13.0 mmol) and (oxydi-2,1-phenylene)bis[diphenylphosphine] (1.05 g, 1.94 mmol) in toluene (10.4 mL, 97.2 mmol) is sparged with dry nitrogen for 5 min. Tris(dibenzylideneacetone)dipalladium(0) (0.594 g, 0.648 mmol) is added and sparging continued for an additional 5 min. The mixture is then heated in a 90° C. oil bath overnight. The mixture is cooled to rt, partitioned between 5% sodium carbonate and chloroform (50 mL each), the layers are separated and the aqueous layer is extracted with chloroform (3×20 mL). The organic layers are combined, dried with anhydrous sodium sulfate and is concentrated. The residue is subjected to silica gel chromatography (230-400 mesh, 50 g, elution with 30% CH2Cl2/hexane) to give 0.900 mg (74%) of desired product as a red solid. 1H NMR (400 MHz, CDCl3) δ 8.06 (br s, 1H), 7.95 (s, 1H), 7.26-7.31 (m, 2H), 7.16 (d, 2H), 6.55 (s, 1H), 3.30 (m, 2H), 2.77 (t, 2H), 2.26 (s, 3H), 2.20 (s, 3H), 2.06 (t, 2H); MS (ESI+) for C17H19ClN2O2 m/z 319 (M+H)+.


Step 2 Preparation of N-[3-(4-chlorophenyl)propyl]-4,5-dimethylbenzene-1,2-diamine



embedded image


N-[3-(4-chlorophenyl)propyl]-4,5-dimethyl-2-nitroaniline (2.90 g, 9.10 mmol) is added as a solution in 10 mL of EtOH to nickel (0.267 g, 4.55 mmol) and the mixture is stirred at rt under 1 atm of H2. After 3 h, the nickel is removed by filtration through Celite and the filtrate is evaporated to provide 2.6 g (98%) of N-[3-(4-chlorophenyl)propyl]-4,5-dimethylbenzene-1,2-diamine that is used as is in the next step.


Step 3 Preparation of 10-[3-(4-chlorophenyl)propyl]-7,8-dimethylbenzo[g]pteridine-2,4(3H,10H)-dione



embedded image


To a mixture of N-[3-(4-chlorophenyl)propyl]-4,5-dimethylbenzene-1,2-diamine (2.90 g, 10.0 mmol), alloxan (1.69 g, 10.5 mmol) and boric acid (1.86 g, 30.1 mmol) is added 25 mL of HOAc. The mixture is then shaken at rt for 18 h. The mixture is concentrated on the rotovap to ½ of its volume and then diluted with 100 mL of water. The mixture is stirred at rt for 15 minutes and the solid is collected by filtration. Chromatography on silica gel (230-400 mesh) in 3% MeOH/CH2Cl2 gives 0.6 g (40%) of desired product as a red solid. 1H NMR (400 MHz, DMSO-d6) δ 11.31 (s, 1H), 7.89 (s, 1H), 7.58 (s, 1H), 7.33 (d, 2H), 7.29-7.37 (d, 2H), 4.60 (br s, 2H), 2.80 (t, 2H), 2.47 (s, 3H), 2.39 (s, 3H), 2.02 (d, 2 H); MS (ESI+) for C21H19ClN4O2 m/z 395 (M+H)+, HPLC retention time: 5.63 min. (Method B).


Example 7
Preparation of 10-[3-(4-hydroxyphenyl)propyl]-7,8-dimethylbenzo[g]pteridine-2,4(3H,10H)-dione



embedded image


To a 0° C. mixture of 10-[3-(4-methoxyphenyl)propyl]-7,8-dimethylbenzo[g]pteridine-2,4(3H,10H)-dione (0.039 g, 0.10 mmol) in DCM (10 mL) under nitrogen is added 1.00 M of boron tribromide in DCM (1.00 mL). After 2.5 h, ice (3 mL) is added followed by cold water (5 mL), and the mixture is stirred for 10 min. The reaction mixture is filtered and the solid is washed with water (4×2 mL), and then DCM (4×3 mL) to give an orange brown solid that is adsorbed onto silica gel and chromatographed on silica gel (230-400 mesh) using 6% MeOH/DCM giving the desired product as an orange solid (0.012 g, 32%); MS (ESI−) for C21H20N4O3 m/z 375.3 (M−H), HPLC retention time: 3.76 min. (Method B).


Example 8
Preparation of 10-[3-(3-hydroxyphenyl)propyl]-7,8-dimethylbenzo[g]pteridine-2,4(3H,10H)-dione



embedded image


To a 0° C. mixture of 10-[3-(3-methoxyphenyl)propyl]-7,8-dimethylbenzo[g]pteridine-2,4(3H,10H)-dione (0.059 g, 0.15 mmol) in DCM (10 mL) under nitrogen is added 1.00 M of boron tribromide in DCM (1.5 mL, 1.5 mmol). After 2.5 h, ice (3 mL) is added followed by cold water (5 mL), and the mixture is stirred for 10 min. The reaction mixture is filtered and the solid is washed with water (4×2 mL) and then DCM (4×3 mL) to give product as an orange brown solid. The solid is dissolved in minimal DMSO and chromatographed (preparative reverse phase on C18 silica gel, Method L) using a gradient from 0% MeCN (1% TFA)/100% H2O (1% TFA) to 55% MeCN (1% TFA)/45% H2O (1% TFA). The desired product is isolated as a yellow solid (0.022 g, 39%). MS (ESI+) for C21H20N4O3 m/z 377.09 (M+H)+, HPLC retention time: 3.85 min. (Method B).


Example 9
8-Chloro-7-methyl-10-(3-phenylpropyl)benzo[g]pteridine-2,4(3H,10H)-dione



embedded image


Step 1 Preparation of 5-chloro-4-methyl-2-nitro-N-(3-phenylpropyl)aniline



embedded image


To a 0-5° C. solution of 4-amino-2-chloro-5-nitrotoluene (2.50 g, 0.013 mol) in DMF (60 mL) is added sodium hydride (536 mg, 0.0134 mol) portion wise (gas evolution). After 15 min, the cooling bath is removed and the solution is stirred 30 min. at rt. To this solution is added 1-bromo-3-phenylpropane (2.44 mL, 0.016 mol) dropwise via syringe. After 18 h at rt, the reaction is concentrated in vacuo and the residue is partitioned between ethyl acetate and saturated aqueous ammonium chloride. The layers are separated and the organic layer is washed with brine, dried (anhydrous sodium sulfate), filtered and concentrated at reduced pressure. The residue is purified by flash chromatography (230-400 mesh, hexane/ethyl acetate (20%) as eluant) to afford 3.88 g (95%) of the desired product as an orange oil. 1H NMR (400 MHz, CDCl3) δ 2.07 (p, 2H), 2.29 (s, 3H), 2.79 (t, 2H), 3.27 (m, 2H), 6.81 (s, 1H), 7.27 (m, 5H), 7.94 (br t, 1H), 8.05 (s, 1H); MS (ESI+) for C16H17ClN2O2 m/z 305.1 (M+H)+, HPLC retention time: 7.88 min. (System A).


Step 2 Preparation of 5-chloro-4-methyl-N-(3-phenylpropyl)benzene-1,2-diamine



embedded image


A slurry of 5-chloro-4-methyl-2-nitro-N-(3-phenylpropyl)aniline (3.80 g, 12.5 mmol) and Raney nickel (400 mg, 6 mmol) in ethanol (70 mL) is stirred at rt under 1 atm of hydrogen gas (balloon) for 18 h. The reaction mixture is diluted with ethanol (70 mL), filtered through a pad of Celite and concentrated to give 3.09 g (90%) of desired product as a colorless solid that is used immediately in the next step. HPLC retention time: 5.63 min. (System A).


Step 3 Preparation of 8-chloro-7-methyl-10-(3-phenylpropyl)benzo[g]pteridine-2,4(3H,10H)-dione



embedded image


To a mixture of 5-chloro-4-methyl-N-(3-phenylpropyl)benzene-1,2-diamine (3.09 g, 11.2 mmol), alloxan (1.80 g, 11.2 mmol) and boric acid (0.85 g, 22 mmol) is added acetic acid (40 mL). After 18 h at rt, volatiles are removed in vacuo and the residue is partitioned between ethyl acetate and saturated aqueous sodium bicarbonate. The layers are separated and the organic layer is washed with brine, dried (anhydrous sodium sulfate), filtered and concentrated at reduced pressure. The residue is purified by flash chromatography (230-400 mesh, CHCl3/methanol (1-2%) as eluant) to afford 1.42 g (33%) of the desired product as an amorphous yellow solid. 1H NMR (400 MHz, DMSO-d6) δ 2.02 (p, 2H), 2.48 (s, 3H), 2.80 (t, 2H), 4.59 (br t, 2H), 7.23 (m, 5H), 7.95 (s, 1H), 8.13 (s, 1H), 11.42 (s, 1H); MS (ESI+) for C20H17ClN4O2 m/z 381.1 (M+H)+; HPLC retention time: 5.65 min. (System A).


Example 10
Preparation of 8-(cyclopentylamino)-7-methyl-10-(3-phenylpropyl)-benzo[g]pteridine-2,4(3H,10H)-dione



embedded image


To a pressure tube containing a solution of 8-chloro-7-methyl-10-(3-phenylpropyl)benzo[g]pteridine-2,4(3H,10H)-dione (100 mg, 0.26 mmol) in DMF (3 mL) is added cyclopentanamine (0.259 mL, 2.62 mmol). The tube is sealed and the mixture is stirred for 16 h at 80° C. Concentration of the reaction mixture at reduced pressure provides a residue that is purified by flash chromatography (230-400 mesh, CH2Cl2/0.07 N methanolic ammonia (0-2%) as eluant) to afford 30 mg (26%) of the desired product as an amorphous red solid. 1H NMR (400 MHz, DMSO-d6) δ 1.67 (m, 6H), 1.99 (m, 4H), 2.27 (s, 3H), 2.81 (t, 2H), 3.92 (m, 1H), 4.58 (m, 2H), 6.28 (s, 1H), 6.64 (d, 1H), 7.25 (m, 5H), 7.64 (s, 1H), 10.95 (s, 1H); MS (ESI+) for C25H27N5O2 m/z 430.3 (M+H)+; HPLC retention time: 5.69 min. (System A).


Example 11
Preparation of 8-methoxy-7-methyl-10-(3-phenylpropyl)benzo[g]pteridine-2,4(3H,10H)-dione



embedded image


To a 0-5° C. cooled solution of 8-chloro-7-methyl-10-(3-phenylpropyl)benzo[g]pteridine-2,4(3H,10H)-dione (75 mg, 0.20 mmol) in methanol (3 mL) is added sodium methoxide (224 mg, 3.94 mmol). The ice bath is removed and the mixture is stirred for 16 h at 80° C. After cooling to rt, the reaction is quenched by the addition of a slight excess (based on sodium methoxide) of acetic acid. Concentration at reduced pressure provided a residue that is purified by flash chromatography (230-400 mesh, CHCl3/methanol (0-2%) as eluant) to afford 57 mg (77%) of the desired product as an amorphous yellow solid. 1H NMR (400 MHz, DMSO-d6) δ 2.09 (p, 2H), 2.29 (s, 3H), 2.82 (t, 2H), 3.96 (s, 3H), 4.66 (br t, 2H), 6.93 (s, 1H), 7.24 (m, 5H), 7.91 (s, 1H), 11.25 (s, 1H); MS (ESI+) for C21H20N4O3 m/z 377.2 (M+H)+; HPLC retention time: 5.34 min. (System A).


Example 12
Preparation of 8-(cyclopropylamino)-7-methyl-10-(4-phenylbutyl)benzo[g]pteridine-2,4(3H,10H)-dione



embedded image


To a pressure tube containing 8-chloro-7-methyl-10-(4-phenylbutyl)benzo[g]pteridine-2,4(3H,10H)-dione (prepared as described for 8-chloro-7-methyl-10-(3-phenylpropyl)benzo[g]pteridine-2,4(3H,10H)-dione from 4-amino-2-chloro-5-nitrotoluene and 1-bromo-4-phenylbutane) (75 mg, 0.19 mmol) is added cyclopropylamine (0.132 mL, 1.90 mmol) and NMP (2.7 mL). The tube is sealed and the mixture is stirred for 8 h at 80° C. Concentration in vacuo provides a residue that is purified by flash chromatography (230-400 mesh, CH2Cl2/0.07 N methanolic ammonia (0-2%) as eluant) to afford 60 mg (76%) of the desired product as an amorphous red solid. 1H NMR (400 MHz, DMSO-d6) δ 0.61 (m, 2H), 0.86 (m, 2H), 1.78 (m, 4H), 2.23 (s, 3H), 2.61 (m, 1H), 2.69 (br t, 2 H), 4.59 (m, 2H), 6.83 (s, 1H), 7.21 (m, 5H), 7.40 (s, 1H), 7.65 (s, 1H), 10.98 (s, 1H); MS (ESI+) for C24H25N5O2 m/z 416.2 (M+H)+; HPLC retention time: 5.39 min. (System A).


Example 13
Preparation of 7-methyl-10-(3-phenylpropyl)benzo[g]pteridine-2,4(3H, 10H)-dione



embedded image


A mixture of 8-chloro-7-methyl-10-(3-phenylpropyl)benzo[g]pteridine-2,4(3H,10H)-dione (70 mg, 0.18 mmol), triethylamine (31 μL, 0.22 mmol) and palladium on carbon (10%, 10 mg) in isopropanol (70 mL) is stirred at rt under 1 atm of hydrogen gas (balloon) for 18 h. The reaction mixture is diluted with ethanol (70 mL), filtered through a pad of Celite and concentrated at reduced pressure. The residue is purified by flash chromatography (230-400 mesh, CHCl3/methanol (0-2%) as eluant) to afford 19 mg (30%) of the desired product as an amorphous orange solid. 1H NMR (400 MHz, DMSO-d6) δ 2.03 (m, 2H), 2.80 (t, 2H), 4.63 (br t, 2H), 7.22 (m, 5H), 7.78 (m, 2H), 7.94 (s, 1H), 11.36 (s, 1H); MS (ESI+) for C20H18N4O2 m/z 347.2 (M+H)+; HPLC retention time: 5.17 min. (System A).


Example 14
Preparation of 10-(2-Amino-3-phenylpropyl)-7,8-dimethylbenzo[g]pteridine-2,4(3H,10H)-dione



embedded image


Step 1 Preparation of tert-butyl (1-((4,5-dimethyl-2-nitrophenyl)amino)-3-phenylpropan-2-yl)carbamate



embedded image


tert-Butyl (1-((4,5-dimethyl-2-nitrophenyl)amino)-3-phenylpropan-2-yl)carbamate is prepared by heating a solution of 1-bromo-4,5-dimethyl-2-nitrobenzene (115 mg, 0.5 mmol) and tert-butyl (1-amino-3-phenylpropan-2-yl)carbamate (138 mg, 0.55 mmol) (commercially available from Accela Chembio Inc.) in DMSO (1 ml) at 130° C. for 1 h. The resulting mixture is diluted in DCM (40 ml), washed successively with H2O (40 ml) and brine (40 ml), and then dried over Na2SO4, filtered and concentrated. The crude product is purified by column chromatography (mobile phase 0-40% EtOAc/Hex) to give desired product (123 mg, 62%) as a yellow powder. LC-MS m/z 399.9 [M+H], retention time 7.83 min.


Step 2 Preparation of tert-butyl (1-((2-amino-4,5-dimethylphenyl)amino)-3-phenylpropan-2-yl)carbamate



embedded image


tert-Butyl (1-((2-amino-4,5-dimethylphenyl)amino)-3-phenylpropan-2-yl)carbamate is prepared from tert-butyl (1-((4,5-dimethyl-2-nitrophenyl)amino)-3-phenylpropan-2-yl)carbamate (123 mg, 0.31 mmol) by catalytic reduction with Pd/C (10% Pd/C, 4% Pd w/w) and NaBH4 (35 mg, 0.93 mmol) in a mixture of MeOH (5 ml) and EtOAc (5 ml) at room temperature under Ar. After 20 min, the reaction mixture is filtered through celite using MeOH (15 ml) and EtOAc (15 ml) to elute the product. The solvent is then evaporated to give desired product (quantitative) as a mixture of borate salts which is taken onto the next step without further purification.


Step 3 Preparation of tert-butyl (1-(7,8-dimethyl-2,4-dioxo-3,4-dihydrobenzo[g]pteridin-10(2H)-yl)-3-phenylpropan-2-yl)carbamate



embedded image


tert-Butyl (1-(7,8-dimethyl-2,4-dioxo-3,4-dihydrobenzo[g]pteridin-10(2H)-yl)-3-phenylpropan-2-yl)carbamate is prepared by stirring the crude tert-butyl (1-((2-amino-4,5-dimethylphenyl)amino)-3-phenylpropan-2-yl)carbamate (0.31 mmol), alloxan monohydrate (53 mg, 0.33 mmol) and boric acid (38 mg, 0.62 mmol) in AcOH (10 ml) at rt for 1.5 h. The reaction mixture is then evaporated to dryness, and the crude product is purified by column chromatography (mobile phase 0-100% EtOAc in hexanes, then 0-15% MeOH in DCM). The desired product is isolated as a bright orange powder (127 mg, 86%). LC-MS m/z 476.1 [M+H], retention time 6.91 min.


Step 4 Preparation of 10-(2-amino-3-phenylpropyl)-7,8-dimethylbenzo[g]pteridine-2,4(3H,10H)-dione



embedded image


tert-Butyl (1-(7,8-dimethyl-2,4-dioxo-3,4-dihydrobenzo[g]pteridin-10(2H)-yl)-3-phenylpropan-2-yl)carbamate (71 mg, 0.15 mmol) is dissolved in DCM (6 ml) at room temperature, and then TFA (1.5 ml) is added in one portion and the solution is stirred at room temperature for 45 min. The reaction mixture is evaporated and the resulting crude product is lyophilized. The mixture is dry-loaded onto silica gel, and then is purified by column chromatography (0 to 15% MeOH in DCM) to give 10-(2-amino-3-phenylpropyl)-7,8-dimethylbenzo[g]pteridine-2,4(3H,10H)-dione (47 mg, 83%) as a yellow powder. 1H NMR (400 MHz, DMSO-d6) δ 2.27 (s, 3H), 2.36 (s, 3H), 3.08 (s, 2H), 3.79 (s, 1H), 4.40 (d, 1H), 5.15 (m, 1H), 6.60 (s, 1H), 7.37 (s, 5H), 7.68 (br s, 2H), 7.91 (s, 1H), 11.45 (s, 1H). LC-MS m/z 376.1 [M+H], retention time 5.69 min.


Example 15
8-Cyclopropyl-7-methyl-10-(3-phenylpropyl)benzo[g]pteridine-2,4(3H,10H)-dione



embedded image


Step 1 Preparation of 4-amino-2-cyclopropyl-5-nitrotoluene



embedded image


A well-stirred slurry of 4-amino-2-chloro-5-nitrotoluene (640 mg, 3.4 mmol), cyclopropylboronic acid (585 mg, 6.81 mmol) and cesium carbonate (3.3 g, 10.2 mmol) in anhydrous 1,4-dioxane (12 mL) is sparged with nitrogen for 10 min. [1,1′-Bis(diphenylphosphino)ferrocene]dichloropalladium(II) complex with dichloromethane (1:1) (560 mg, 0.68 mmol) is added and sparging is continued for another 10 min. The reaction is then heated at 90° C. for 24 h. The reaction is cooled, diluted with DCM (100 mL) and filtered through Celite. The organics are washed with saturated bicarbonate solution, brine, dried with anhydrous sodium sulfate and concentrated. The residue is chromatographed on silica gel (Silicycle, 230-400 mesh, 150 g, elution with 5 then 7.5% ethyl acetate/hexane) to give desired product (380 mg, 57%) as an orange solid. 1H NMR (400 MHz, CDCl3) δ ppm 0.68 (2H, m), 1.04 (2H, m), 1.88 (1H, m), 2.34 (3H, s), 5.92 (2H, br s), 6.33 (1H, s), 7.89 (1H, s); MS (ESI+) for C10H12N2O2 m/z 193.2 (M+H)+, retention time: 4.17 min. (Method D).


Step 2 Preparation of 5-cyclopropyl-4-methyl-2-nitro-N-(3-phenylpropyl)aniline



embedded image


To a 0° C. solution of 4-amino-2-cyclopropyl-5-nitrotoluene (0.775 g, 4.03 mmol) in dry DMF (20 mL) is added sodium hydride (161 mg, 4.03 mmol) portionwise. After 15 min, the cooling bath is removed and the solution is stirred at rt for 30 min. To this solution is added 1-bromo-3-phenylpropane (0.736 mL, 4.84 mmol) dropwise via syringe. After 18 h at rt, the reaction is concentrated in vacuo to remove DMF and the residue partitioned between DCM and saturated ammonium chloride (100 mL each). The layers are separated, the aqueous layer is extracted with DCM (3×40 mL), and the organics combined, dried with anhydrous sodium sulfate and concentrated. The residue is subjected to silica gel chromatography (Silicycle, 230-400 mesh,150 g, elution with 10% EtOAc/hexane) to give desired product (1.16 g, 92%) as an orange oil. 1H NMR (400 MHz, CDCl3) δ ppm 0.66 (2H, m), 1.04 (2H, m), 1.90 (1H, m), 2.06 (2H, m), 2.34 (3H, s), 2.80 (2H, t), 3.31 (2H, m), 6.32 (1H, s), 7.30 (5H, m), 7.96 (1H, s), 8.09 (1H, br s); MS (ESI+) for C19H22N2O2 m/z 311.1 (M+H)+, retention time: 5.68 min. (Method D).


Step 3 Preparation of 5-cyclopropyl-4-methyl-N-(3-phenylpropyl)benzene-1,2-diamine



embedded image


A slurry of 5-cyclopropyl-4-methyl-2-nitro-N-(3-phenylpropyl)aniline (1.12 g, 3.61 mmol) and Raney nickel (0.0424 g, 0.722 mmol) in ethanol (25 mL) is stirred and exposed to 1 atm of hydrogen gas (balloon) for 18 h. The slurry is diluted with ethyl acetate (50 mL) and filtered through Celite. The filter pad is washed with ethyl acetate (2×25 mL) and the filtrate is concentrated to give desired product (980 mg, 96%) as an oil. 1H NMR (400 MHz, CDCl3) δ ppm 0.54 (2H, m), 0.84 (2H, m), 1.80 (1H, m), 1.99 (2H, m), 2.29 (3H, s), 2.77 (2H, t), 3.12 (2H, t), 6.33 (1H, s), 6.54 (1H, s), 7.29 (5H, m); MS (ESI+) for C19H24N2 m/z 281.2 (M+H)+, retention time: 3.62 min. (Method D).


Step 4 Preparation of 8-cyclopropyl-7-methyl-10-(3-phenylpropyl)-benzo[g]pteridine-2,4(3H,10H)-dione



embedded image


A slurry of 5-cyclopropyl-4-methyl-N-(3-phenylpropyl)benzene-1,2-diamine (1.0 g, 3.6 mmol), alloxan (0.599 g, 3.74 mmol) and boric acid (0.662 g, 10.7 mmol) in acetic acid (20 mL) is stirred under nitrogen for 18 h. The reaction is concentrated, suspended in water and filtered. The solids are washed with water, diethyl ether and air dried. This solid was adsorbed onto silica gel (30 g) and subjected to silica gel chromatography (Silicycle, 230-400 mesh, 150 g, elution with 1, 2 and 3% EtOH/CHCl3) to give 755 mg (54%) of the product as an orange solid. 1H NMR (400 MHz, DMSO-d6) 0.77 (2H, m), 1.11 (2H, m), 2.00 (2H, m), 2.13 (1H, m), 2.53 (3H, s), 2.78 (2H, t), 4.60 (2H, m), 7.01 (1H, s), 7.26 (5H, m), 7.90 (1H, s), 11.30 (1H, s); MS (ESI+) for C23H22N4O2 m/z 387.1 (M+H)+, retention time: 3.79 min. (Method D).


Example 16
7,8-Dimethyl-5-(3-phenylpropyl)pyrido[3,4-b]quinoxaline-1,3(2H,5H)-dione



embedded image


Step 1 Preparation of ethyl (3Z)-3-(2-ethoxy-2-oxoethylidene)-6,7-dimethyl-4-(3-phenylpropyl)-3,4-dihydroquinoxaline-2-carboxylate




embedded image


Cesium carbonate (5.38 g, 16.5 mmol) is added to a solution of 4,5-dimethyl-N-(3-phenylpropyl)benzene-1,2-diamine (0.600 g, 2.36 mmol) in 40 mL of 1:1 DMF/CH2Cl2 followed by diethyl 2-bromo-3-oxopentanedioate (4.64 g, 16.5 mmol) and the mixture is stirred at rt under N2 overnight. The mixture is evaporated to dryness and the residue is partitioned between 50 mL of CH2Cl2 and 50 mL of water. The layers are separated and the aqueous phase is extracted with 2×50 mL of CH2Cl2. The combined organic layers are extracted with 3×50 mL of water. Drying over Na2SO4 and evaporation gives 3.5 g of a red oil. Chromatography on 150 g of silica gel in 30% EtOAc/hexane gives desired product (0.57 g, 56%) as a red solid. 1H NMR (400 MHz, CDCl3) δ ppm 7.53 (s, 1H), 7.38 (d, 1H), 7.41 (d, 1H), 7.27-7.34 (m, 3H), 6.49 (s, 1H), 5.06 (s, 1H), 4.40 (q, 2H), 4.15 (q, 2H), 3.80 (q, 2H), 2.84 (q, 2H), 2.24 (m, 6H), 2.15 (m, 2H), 1.43 (t, 3H), 1.31 (t, 3H); MS (ESI+) for C26H30N2O4 m/z 435 (M+H)+.


Step 2 Preparation of 7,8-dimethyl-5-(3-phenylpropyl)pyrido[3,4-b]ouinoxaline-1,3(2H,5H)-dione



embedded image


Ethyl (3Z)-3-(2-ethoxy-2-oxoethyl idene)-6,7-dimethyl-4-(3-phenylpropyl)-3,4-dihydroquinoxaline-2-carboxylate (0.300 g, 0.690 mmol) is taken up in 20 mL of MeOH and the solution is cooled in an ice water bath. Ammonia gas is bubbled through the solution for 5 minutes in a pressure tube. The solution is stirred at rt overnight in the capped pressure tube. The pressure tube is opened slowly to allow NH3 to evolve. The remaining solution is evaporated to give 0.2 g of a dark solid. The solid is adsorbed onto silica gel and chromatographed on 50 g of silica gel. The column is eluted with 1% MeOH/DCM (IL) followed by 1.5% MeOH/CH2Cl2 (1.5 L). The product elutes in the 1.5% MeOH/DCM. Evaporation of the fractions containing product gives 0.07 g of a purple solid. Crystallization from CH3CN (25 mL) gives 12 mg of the product as a purple solid. 1H NMR (400 MHz, DMSO-d6) δ ppm 11.17 (s, 1H), 7.63 (s, 1H), 7.20-7.36 (m, 6H), 5.27 (d, 1H), 4.01 (br s, 2H), 2.82 (t, 2H), 2.35 (s, 3H), 2.29 (s, 3H), 1.93 (br s, 2H); MS (ESI+) for C22H21N3O2 m/z 360 (M+H)+, HPLC retention time: 3.84 min. (Method D).


Example 17
10-(2-Isopropoxy-3-phenylpropv-1)-7,8-dimethylbenzo[g]pteridine-2,4(3H,10H)-dione



embedded image


Step 1 Preparation of N-(2-isopropoxy-3-phenylpropyl)-4,5-dimethyl-2-nitroaniline



embedded image


A well-stirred slurry of 1-bromo-4,5-dimethyl-2-nitrobenzene (0.295 g, 1.28 mmol), (3-amino-2-isopropoxypropyl)benzene (0.177 g, 0.916 mmol), Cs2CO3 (597 mg, 1.83 mmol) and (oxydi-2,1-phenylene)bis[diphenylphosphine] (74.0 mg, 0.137 mmol) in toluene (8 mL, 80 mmol) is sparged with dry nitrogen for 5 min. Tris(dibenzylideneacetone)-dipalladium(0) (41.9 mg, 0.0458 mmol) is added and sparging is continued for an additional 5 min. The reaction is then heated at 90° C. for 18 h. The reaction is cooled to rt, partitioned between water and DCM (50 mL each), the layers are separated and the aqueous layer is extracted with DCM (3×20 mL). The organics are combined, dried with anhydrous sodium sulfate and concentrated. The residue is subjected to silica gel chromatography (230-400 mesh, 150 g, elution with DCM) to give 91 mg (29%) of N-(2-isopropoxy-3-phenylpropyl)-4,5-dimethyl-2-nitroaniline as an orange oil. 1H NMR (400 MHz, CDCl3) δ 1.15 (3H, d), 1.19 (3H, d), 2.17 (3H, s), 2.19 (3H, s), 2.81 (1H, dd), 3.00 (1H, dd), 3.18 (1H, m), 3.36 (1H, m), 3.70 (1H, hep), 3.83 (1H, m), 6.40 (1H, s), 7.25-7.37 (5H, m), 7.93 (1H, s), 8.23 (1H, br t); MS (ESI+) for C20H26N2O3 m/z 343.4 (M+H)+; HPLC retention time: 5.54 min. (Method D).


Step 2 Preparation of N-(2-isopropoxy-3-phenylpropyl)-4,5-dimethylbenzene-1,2-diamine



embedded image


A slurry of N-(2-isopropoxy-3-phenylpropyl)-4,5-dimethyl-2-nitroaniline (91.0 mg, 0.266 mmol) and Raney Nickel (0.0156 g, 0.266 mmol) in EtOH (5 mL, 80 mmol) is subjected to 1 atm of hydrogen gas for 4 h. The mixture is diluted with ethyl acetate (20 mL), filtered through Celite and the filter pad is washed with additional ethyl acetate (20 mL). The filtrates are combined and concentrated to give 68 mg (82%) of N-(2-isopropoxy-3-phenylpropyl)-4,5-dimethylbenzene-1,2-diamine as an oil. MS (ESI+) for C20H28N2O m/z 313.4 (M+H)+; HPLC retention time: 3.65 min. (Method D).


Step 3 Preparation of 10-(2-isopropoxy-3-phenylpropyl)-7,8-dimethylbenzo[g]pteridine-2,4(3H,10H)-dione



embedded image


To a well-stirred solution of N-(2-isopropoxy-3-phenylpropyl)-4,5-dimethylbenzene-1,2-diamine (68 mg, 0.22 mmol) and alloxan (38.3 mg, 0.239 mmol) in acetic acid (3.0 mL) is added boric acid (40.4 mg, 0.653 mmol). The reaction mixture is then stirred at rt for 18 h, concentrated and azeotroped with toluene. The yellow solid is adsorbed onto silica gel (5 g) and subjected to silica gel chromatography (230-400 mesh, 50 g, elution with 1, 1.5 and 2% MeOH/DCM) to give 60 mg (66%) of 10-(2-isopropoxy-3-phenylpropyl)-7,8-dimethylbenzo[g]pteridine-2,4(3H,10H)-dione as an amorphous yellow solid. 1H NMR (400 MHz, DMSO-d6) δ 0.42 (3H, m), 0.62 (3H, d), 2.39 (3H, s), 2.86 (2H, m), 3.08 (1 H, m), 4.12 (1H, m), 4.64 (2H, m), 7.24 (5H, m), 7.76 (1H, s), 7.88 (1H, s), 11.34 (1H, s); MS (ESI+) for C24H26N4O3 m/z 419.5 (M+H)+; HPLC retention time: 3.85 min. (Method D).


Example 18
8-[(2,6-Dimethylmorpholin-4-yl)methyl]-7-methyl-10-(3-phenylpropyl)benzo[g]pteridine-2,4(3H,10H)-dione



embedded image


Step 1 Preparation of 8-(bromomethyl)-7-methyl-10-(3-phenylpropyl)benzo[g]pteridine-2,4(3H,10H)-dione



embedded image


To a well-stirred solution of 7,8-dimethyl-10-(3-phenylpropyl)benzo[g]pteridine-2,4(3H,10H)-dione (231.0 mg, 0.6409 mmol) in 1,4-dioxane (10 mL, 100 mmol) at rt under nitrogen is added benzoyl peroxide (77.63 mg, 0.3205 mmol) as a solid. The reaction is brought to reflux and after 15 min., a solution of Br2 (72.64 uL, 1.410 mmol) in dioxane (5 mL) is added in one portion. Refluxing is continued for 48 h and the reaction mixture is allowed to cool to rt. The mixture is concentrated, adsorbed directly onto silica gel (5 g) and subjected to silica gel chromatography (230-400 mesh, 40 g, elution with 1, 2 and 3% MeOH/DCM) to give 84 mg (30%) of 8-(bromomethyl)-7-methyl-10-(3-phenylpropyl)benzo[g]pteridine-2,4(3H,10H)-dione as a solid. 1H NMR (400 MHz, CDCl3) δ 2.22 (2H, m), 2.52 (3H, m), 2.88 (2H, t), 4.34 (2H, s), 4.64 (2H, m), 6.84 (1H, s), 7.22-7.45 (5H, m), 8.06 (1H, s), 8.74 (1H, br. s); MS (ESI+) for C21H19BrN4O2 m/z 439.0 and 441.0 (M+H)+; HPLC retention time: 3.74 min. (Method D).


Step 2 Preparation of 8-[2,6-dimethylmorpholin-4-yl)methyl]-7-methyl-10-(3-phenylpropyl)benzo[g]pteridine-2,4(3H,10H)-dione



embedded image


To a well-stirred solution of 8-(bromomethyl)-7-methyl-10-(3-phenylpropyl)benzo[g]pteridine-2,4(3H,10H)-dione (30 mg, 0.07 mmol) in THF (3.0 mL, 37 mmol) is added 2,6-dimethylmorpholine (17 uL, 0.14 mmol). The reaction is stirred at rt under nitrogen for 4 h, diluted with DCM (50 mL) and is washed with saturated, aqueous sodium bicarbonate (20 mL). The layers are separated and the aqueous layer is extracted with DCM (2×20 mL). The organic layers are combined, dried with anhydrous sodium sulfate and concentrated. The residue is triturated with diethyl ether and the solid collect by filtration to give 16 mg (50%) of 8-[(2,6-dimethylmorpholin-4-yOmethyl]-7-methyl-10-(3-phenylpropyl)benzo[g]pteridine-2,4(3H,10H)-dione as a red solid. 1H NMR (400 MHz, DMSO-d6) δ 1.01 (6H, m), 2.02 (2H, m), 2.47 (3H, s), 2.67 (2H, m), 2.79 (3 H, m), 3.55 (4H, m), 7.23 (5H, m), 7.64 (1H, s), 7.92 (1H, s), 11.34 (1H, s); MS (ESI+) for C27H31N5O3 m/z 474.3 (M+H)+; HPLC retention time: 2.65 min. (Method D).


Example 19
[7-Methyl-2,4-dioxo-10-(3-phenylpropyl)-2,3,4,10-tetrahydrobenzo[g]pteridin-8-yl]methyl acetate



embedded image


Sodium acetate (0.0140 g, 0.171 mmol) is added to a mixture of 8-(bromomethyl)-7-methyl-10-(3-phenylpropyl)benzo[g]pteridine-2,4(3H,10H)-dione (0.0500 g, 0.114 mmol) in 5 mL of DMF and the mixture is stirred at rt overnight. The DMF is evaporated and the product is purified by preparative TLC on a 0.5 mm silica gel plate in 50% EtOAc/hexane to give 3.8 mg (8%) of [7-methyl-2,4-dioxo-10-(3-phenylpropyl)-2,3,4,10-tetrahydrobenzo[g]pteridin-8-yl]methyl acetate as red solid. 1H NMR (400 MHz, CDCl3) δ 8.55 (s, 1H), 8.11 (s, 1H), 7.33 (d, 3H), 7.34 (m, 2H), 7.25 (s, 1H), 5.17 (s, 2H), 4.75 (br s, 2H), 2.91 (t, 2H), 2.52 (s, 3H), 2.25 (d, 2H), 2.17 (s, 3H); MS (ESI+) for C23H22N4O4 m/z 419.2 (M+H)+; HPLC retention time: 3.41 min. (System D).


Example 20
7-Methyl-10-(3-phenylpropyl)-8-propylbenzo[g]pteridine-2,4(3H,10H)-dione



embedded image


Step 1 Preparation of 5-chloro-4-methyl-2-nitro-N-(3-phenylpropyl)aniline



embedded image


A stirring, N2 flushed solution of 4-amino-2-chloro-5-nitrotoluene (1.03 g, 5.36 mmol) in dry DMF (10 mL) is cooled in an ice bath. To this solution is added sodium hydride (0.21 g, 5.3 mmol), followed at 1 h with 1-bromo-3-phenylpropane (0.815 mL, 5.36 mmol). After 18 h, additional sodium hydride (0.02 g, 0.5 mmol) is added. At 21 h, the reaction is quenched with ice (10 g) followed by water (50 mL) and Et2O (100 mL). The mixture is shaken and the organic layer is washed with water (3×30 mL) and concentrated to provide red oil. The residue is chromatographed on silica gel using 3% EtOAc/heptane to give 5-chloro-4-methyl-2-nitro-N-(3-phenylpropyl)aniline (1.36 g, 83%) as a red oil that slowly solidified on standing. 1H NMR (300 MHz, CDCl3) δ 8.05 (s, 1H), 7.94 (br s, 1H), 7.27 (m, 5H), 6.81 (s, 1H), 3.27 (m, 2H), 2.79 (m, 2H), 2.29 (s, 3H), 2.07 (m, 2H); MS (ESI+) for C16H17ClN2O m/z 305.09 (M+H)+.


Step 2 Preparation of 4-methyl-2-nitro-N-(3-phenylpropyl)-5-propylaniline



embedded image


To an N2 flushed 40 mL vial containing 5-chloro-4-methyl-2-nitro-N-(3-phenylpropyl)aniline (0.355 g, 1.1 mmol) and 1,4-dioxane (25 mL) is added Cs2CO3 (1.82 g, 5.5 mmol), KF (0.254 g, 4.4 mmol), propylboronic acid (0.392 g, 4.5 mmol), and bis(tri-tert-butylphosphine)palladium(0) (0.096 g, 0.18 mmol). The reaction mixture is shaken at 100° C. for 24 h. The mixture is cooled to rt and filtered through a silica gel column (2×4 cm), using DCM (50 mL). The filtrate is concentrated and chromatographed on silica gel (4×14 cm column, using a gradient from heptane to 20% DCM/heptane) to provide 165 mg (48%) of 4-methyl-2-nitro-N-(3-phenylpropyl)-5-propylaniline as a red oil. MS (ESI+) for C19H24N2O2 m/z 313.3 (M+H)+.


Step 3 Preparation of 4-methyl-N-(3-phenylpropyl)-5-propylbenzene-1,2-diamine



embedded image


A slurry of 4-methyl-2-nitro-N-(3-phenylpropyl)-5-propylaniline (0.081 g, 0.26 mmol), EtOH (40 mL), and Raney Nickel (100 mg) is flushed with N2 and then stirred under 1 atmosphere of H2 for 18 h. The mixture is filtered through Solka Floc® (5×5 mL EtOH rinses) and concentrated to give 4-methyl-N-(3-phenylpropyl)-5-propylbenzene-1,2-diamine (52 mg, 71%) as a white solid. MS (ESI+) for C19H26N m/z 283.29 (M+H)+. HPLC retention time 3.84 min. (method D).


Step 4 Preparation of 7-methyl-10-(3-phenylpropyl)-8-propylbenzo[g]pteridine-2,4(3H,10H)-dione



embedded image


To a mixture of 4-methyl-N-(3-phenylpropyl)-5-propylbenzene-1,2-diamine (0.052 g, 0.18 mmol), alloxan (29 mg, 0.18 mmol) and boric acid (34.6 mg, 0.560 mmol) is added acetic acid (5.1 mL, 9 mmol). The reaction is flushed with N2 and stirred at rt for 2 h. The reaction mixture is then mixed with toluene (5 mL) and evaporated to dryness. The residue is dissolved in DCM (30 mL) and filtered through Celite. The filtrate is washed with water (1×10 mL) and aqueous NaHCO3 (10 mL), and the organic layer is concentrated. This residue is chromatographed on silica gel (1% MeOH/DCM) to give 7-methyl-10-(3-phenylpropyl)-8-propylbenzo[g]pteridine-2,4(3H,10H)-dione (31 mg; 43%) as an orange solid: 1H NMR (300 MHz, DMSO-d6) δ 11.32 (s, 1H), 7.90 (s, 1H), 7.29 (m, 6H), 4.59 (m, 2H), 2.80 (m, 2H), 2.71 (m, 2H), 2.42 (s, 3H), 2.03 (m, 2H), 1.56 (m, 2H), 0.98 (t, 3H); MS (ESI+) for C23H24N4O2 m/z 389.26 (M+H)+; HPLC retention time 4.08 min. (method D).


Example 21
7,8-Dimethyl-10-(2-(phenylsulfonyyl)ethyl)benzo[g]pteridine-2,4(3H,10H)-dione



embedded image


To a stirred mixture of 7,8-dimethyl-10-[2-(phenylthio)ethyl]benzo-[g]pteridine-2,4(3H,10H)-dione (0.0760 g, 0.201 mmol) and DCM (20 mL) under nitrogen is added a solution of MCPBA (0.0900 g, 0.402 mmol) in EtOH (2 mL). At 3 h, additional MCPBA (0.020 g, 0.089 mmol) is added as a solution in EtOH (1 mL). After 45 minutes, aqueous NaHCO3 (8 mL) is added, and the reaction mixture is stirred for 1 h and filtered. The solid is washed successively with water (3×5 mL), ethanol (2×2 mL) and DCM (2×3 mL) and dried in vacuo to give 7,8-dimethyl-10-[2-(phenylsulfonyl)ethyl]benzo[g]pteridine-2,4(3H,10H)-dione (45 mg, 52%) as an orange solid. 1H NMR (DMSO-d6) δ 11.38 (s, 1 H), 7.97-7.64 (m, 6H), 7.35 (s, 1H), 4.84 (m, 2H), 3.87 (m, 2H), 2.42 (s, 3H), 2.39 (s, 3 H); MS (ESI−) for C20H18N4O4S m/z 409.08 (M−H).


Example 22
10-(3-(4-Chlorophenyl)-2-hydroxypropyl)-8-methylbenzo[g]pterodome-2,4(3H,10H)-dione



embedded image


Step 1 Preparation of 1-(4-Chlorophenyl)-3-[(5-methyl-2-nitrophenyl)amino]-propan-2-ol



embedded image


A slurry of 2-(4-chlorobenzyl)oxirane (0.280 g, 1.66 mmol), 5-methyl-2-nitroaniline (0.277 g, 1.82 mmol) and ytterbium(III) triflate (0.206 g, 0.33 mmol) in dry CH3CN (10 mL) is stirred at rt for 18 h. The reaction is concentrated and chromatographed on silica gel using 8% EtOAc/heptanes to provide 1-(4-chlorophenyl)-3-[(5-methyl-2-nitrophenyl)amino]propan-2-ol (0.31 g, 58%) as a red oil. MS (ESI+) for C16H17ClN2O3 m/z 321.02 (M+H)+.


Step 2 Preparation of 1-[(2-amino-5-methylphenyl)amino]-3-(4-chlorophenyl)propan-2-ol



embedded image


A stirred mixture of 1-(4-chlorophenyl)-3-[(5-methyl-2-nitrophenyl)amino]propan-2-ol (0.209 g, 0.652 mmol), EtOH (20 mL), and Raney Nickel (100 mg) is flushed with N2 and then stirred under 1 atm of H2 (balloon). After overnight stirring, the mixture is filtered through Solka Floc® (5×5 mL EtOH rinses) and the filtrate is evaporated to give 1-[(2-amino-5-methylphenyl)amino]-3-(4-chlorophenyl)propan-2-ol (0.114 g, 60%) as a white solid. MS (ESI+) for C16H19ClN2O m/z 291.04 (M+H)+.


Step 3 Preparation of 10-(3-(4-chlorophenyl)-2-hydroxypropyl)-8-methylbenzo-[g]pteridine-2,4(3H,10H)-dione



embedded image


To a well-stirred mixture of 1-[(2-amino-5-methylphenyl)amino]-3-(4-chlorophenyl)propan-2-ol (0.1136 g, 0.3907 mmol), alloxan (65.67 mg, 0.4102 mmol) and boric acid (72.47 mg, 1.172 mmol) under nitrogen is added AcOH (7 mL). After 72 h, the reaction mixture is filtered and the solid is washed successively with AcOH (4×2 mL), water (5×15 mL) and 90% MeOH/DCM (4×40 mL). The solid is dried at 60° C. under high vacuum to give (10-[3-(4-chlorophenyl)-2-hydroxypropyl]-8-methylbenzo[g]pteridine-2,4(3H,10H)-dione (0.125 g, 78%) as a yellow solid. 1H NMR (DMSO-d6) δ 11.39 (s, 1H), 7.99 (d, 1H), 7.73 (s, 1H), 7.47 (d, 1H), 7.33 (m, 4H), 5.02 (m, 1H), 4.64 (m, 2H), 4.30 (m, 1H), 2.90 (m, 2H), 2.55 (s, 3H); MS (ESI+) for C20H17ClN4O3 m/z 397.14 (M+H)+.


Example 23
N-{10-[3-(4-Chlorophenyl)propyl]-7-methyl-2,4-dioxo-2,3,4,10-tetrahydrobenzo[g]-pteridin-8-yl}propanamide



embedded image


Step 1 Preparation of N-[3-(4-chlorophenyl)propyl]-4-methyl-3-nitroaniline




embedded image


A N2 flushed solution of 4-methyl-3-nitro-aniline (1.51 g, 9.92 mmol), 1-(3-bromopropyl)-4-chlorobenzene (1.31 g, 5.61 mmol), and DIPEA (3 mL) is shaken at 70° C. for 18 h. The reaction is concentrated and chromatographed on silica gel using 2% EtOAc/heptane to provide N-[3-(4-chlorophenyl)propyl]-4-methyl-3-nitroaniline (1.34 g; 78%) as an orange solid. MS (ESI+) for C16H17ClN2O2 m/z 305.2 (M+H)+.


Step 2 Preparation of N1-[3-(4-chlorophenyl)propyl]-4-methylbenzene-1,3-diamine



embedded image


A stirred mixture of N-[3-(4-chlorophenyl)propyl]-4-methyl-3-nitroaniline (1.34 g, 4.41 mmol), EtOH (40 mL), and Raney Nickel (100 mg) is stirred under 1 atmosphere of H2 (balloon). After 18 h, the mixture is filtered through Solka Floc® (5×5 mL EtOH rinses) and the filtrate is concentrated to provide N1-[3-(4-chlorophenyl)propyl]-4-methylbenzene-1,3-diamine (1.23 g, 96%) as a white solid. MS (ESI+) for C16H19ClN2 m/z 275.20 (M+H)+.


Step 3 Preparation of 8-amino-10-[3-(4-ehlorophenvnpropyl]-7-methylbenzo[g]pteridine-2,4(3H,10H)-dione



embedded image


To a well-stirred mixture of N1-[3-(4-chlorophenyl)propyl]-4-methylbenzene-1,3-diamine (1.23 g, 4.25 mmol) and violuric acid monohydrate (740 mg, 4.2 mmol) is added AcOH (70 mL). The reaction is flushed with N2, heated at 115° C. for 45 min. and is allowed to cool to rt overnight. The precipitate is collected by filtration, washed with AcOH (5×2 mL), DCM (3×20 mL) and dried overnight under high vacuum at 55° C. to provide 8-amino-10-[3-(4-chlorophenyl)propyl]-7-methylbenzo[g]pteridine-2,4(3H,10H)-dione (1.399 g, 83%) as a red solid. 1H NMR (300 MHz, DMSO-d6) δ 10.93 (s, 1H), 7.66 (s, 1 H), 7.32 (m, 4H), 7.19 (br s, 2H), 6.77 (s, 1H), 4.48 (m, 2H), 2.77 (m, 2H), 2.23 (s, 3 H), 2.02 (m, 2H); MS (ESI+) for C20H18ClN5O2 m/z 396.19 (M+H)+.


Step 4 Preparation of N-{10-[3-(4-chlorophenyl)propyl]-7-methyl-2,4-dioxo-2,3,4,10-tetrahydrobenzo[g]pteridin-8-yl}propanamide



embedded image


To a well-stirred mixture of 8-amino-10-[3-(4-chlorophenyl)propyl]-7-methylbenzo[g]pteridine-2,4(3H,10H)-dione (0.071 g, 0.18 mmol) and DMF (5 mL) is added propanoyl chloride (2 mL, 20 mmol). After shaking overnight at rt, the temperature is increased to 40° C. and shaking is continued for 48 h. The mixture is quenched with ice water (5 mL), shaken for 30 min. and filtered. The solids are washed with water (3×2 mL) and MeOH (6×2 mL) and dried at 70° C. under high vacuum to give N-{10-[3-(4-chlorophenyl)propyl]-7-methyl-2,4-dioxo-2,3,4,10-tetrahydrobenzo[g]-pteridin-8-yl}propanamide (63 mg, 76%) as an orange solid. 1H NMR (DMSO-d6) δ 11.29 (s, 1H), 9.55 (s, 1H), 8.37 (s, 1H), 7.97 (s, 1H), 7.31 (s, 4H), 4.55 (m, 2H), 2.78 (m, 2H), 2.55 (m, 2H), 2.44 (s, 3H), 2.08 (m, 2H), 1.16 (t, 3H); MS (ESI+) for C23H22ClN5O3 m/z 452.19 (M+H)+.


Example 24
7,8-Dimethyl-10-(1-methyl-3-phenylpropyl)benzo[g]pteridine-2,4(3H,10H)-dione



embedded image


Step 1 Preparation of 3-bromobutyl)benzene



embedded image


To a cold (0° C.), well-stirred solution of triphenylphosphine dibromide [freshly prepared from bromine (0.686 mL, 13.3 mmol) and triphenylphosphine (3.49 g, 13.3 mmol)] in 30 mL of CH2Cl2 is added 4-phenylbutan-2-ol (2.11 mL, 13.3 mmol) dropwise as a solution in 10 mL of CH2Cl2. The ice bath is allowed warm to rt overnight, diluted with heptane (60 mL) and filtered. The solids are washed with heptane (4×15 mL) and the filtrates are combined, concentrated and chromatographed on silica gel, using heptane as the eluent, to give (3-bromobutyl)benzene a colorless liquid (1.93 g, 68%). HPLC retention time 5.25 min. (method D).


Step 2 Preparation of 4,5-dimethyl-N-(1-methyl-3-phenylpropyl)benzene-1,2-diamine



embedded image


A well-stirred slurry of (3-bromobutyl)benzene (0.400 g, 1.88 mmol), 4,5-dimethyl-o-phenylenediamine (1.02 g, 7.51 mmol), tetra-n-butylammonium iodide (0.0693 g, 0.188 mmol) and sodium bicarbonate (0.315 g, 3.75 mmol) in dry toluene (30 mL) is heated at 100° C. After 47 h, additional tetra-n-butylammonium iodide (0.040 g, 0.11 mmol) is added and stirring is continued for 2 h. The reaction mixture is cooled to rt, partitioned between water and toluene (100 mL each). EtOAc (20 mL) is added and the organic layer is washed with water (3×40 mL) and concentrated. The residue is subjected to silica gel chromatography (230-400 mesh, 150 g, elution with 15% ethyl acetate/heptane) to give the 4,5-dimethyl-N-(1-methyl-3-phenylpropyl)benzene-1,2-diamine (0.120 g; 23%) as a reddish brown oil. MS (ESI+) for C18H24N2 m/z 269.20 (M+H)+.


Step 3 Preparation of 7,8-dimethyl-10-(1-methyl-3-phenylpropyl)benzo[g]pteridine-2,4(3H,10H)-dione



embedded image


To a mixture of 4,5-dimethyl-N-(1-methyl-3-phenylpropyl)benzene-1,2-diamine (0.109 g, 0.406 mmol), alloxan (68.26 mg, 0.4264 mmol) and boric acid (75.33 mg, 1.218 mmol) is added acetic acid (8 mL, 100 mmol). The reaction mixture is flushed N2 and stirred at rt for 18 h. The reaction mixture is then azeotroped with toluene (2×30 mL), and the residue is slurried with DCM (80 mL), filtered and the filtrate washed with water (20 mL). The organic layer is concentrated and dried overnight under high vacuum to give 7,8-dimethyl-10-(1-methyl-3-phenylpropyl)benzo[g]pteridine-2,4(3H,10H)-dione (0.120 g, 78%) as a yellow solid. 1H NMR (300 MHz, DMSO-d6) δ 11.29 (m, 1H), 7.80 (m, 2H), 7.09 (m, 5 H), 5.21-6.33 (m, 1H), 2.94 (m, 1H), 2.43 (s, 3H), 2.38 (s, 3H), 1.68 (m, 3H); MS (ESI+) for C22H22N4O2 m/z 375.09 (M+H)+.


Examples 25 and 26
(10Z)-14-methyl-1,17,20,22-tetraazapentacyclo[11.10.2.25,8.016,24.018,23]heptacosa-5,7,10,13(25),14,16(24),17,22,26-nonaene-19,21-dione

and


(10E)-14-methyl-1,17,20,22-tetraazapentacyclo[11.10.2.25,8.016,24.018,23]heptacosa-5,7,10,13(25),14,16(24),17,22,26-nonaene-19,21-dione



embedded image


Step 1: Preparation of 2-allyl-1-methyl-4-nitrobenzene



embedded image


A mixture of 2-bromo-1-methyl-4-nitrobenzene (2.42 g, 11.2 mmol), allyltributylstannane (4.26 g, 12.8 mmol) and tetrakis(triphenylphosphine)palladium(0) (480 mg, 0.04 mmol) in DMF (15 mL) is heated at 176° C. for 20 min. in a microwave. The solid is removed by filtration through a celite pad and the pad is washed with EtOAc. The filtrate is evaporated and the residue is purified by flash column chromatography using a gradient from 0 to 5% EtOAc in hexane as eluent. The product is isolated (1.6 g, 80%) as a green oil. 1H-NMR (400 MHz, DMSO-d6): δ 2.38 (s, 3H), 3.50 (d, 2H), 5.06 (d, 1H), 5.13 (d, 1H), 5.98 (ddt, 1H), 7.46 (s, 1H), 7.01 (m, 2H).


Step 2: Preparation of 3-allyl-4-methylaniline



embedded image


Acetic acid (19 mL) is slowly added to a round bottom flask charged with 2-allyl-1-methyl-4-nitrobenzene (3.39 g, 19.1 mmol) and zinc dust (12.5 g, 191 mmol) in DCM (260 mL) at 0° C. After 30 min., the reaction mixture is filtered through celite and washed liberally with DCM. Saturated, aqueous NaHCO3 (30 mL) is added to the filtrate, and the organic layer is dried over Na2SO4 and then concentrated. The desired product is isolated (2.98 g) as orange oil. 1H-NMR (400 MHz, CDCl3): δ 2.20 (s, 3H), 3.30 (d, 2H), 3.53 (s, 2H), 5.04 (d, 1H), 5.06 (d, 1H), 5.95 (ddt, 1H), 6.51 (dd, 1H), 6.54 (d, 1H), 6.95 (d, 1H). LC-MS m/z 148.0 [M+H]+.


Step 3: Preparation of methyl 3-(4-bromophenyl)propanoate



embedded image


A mixture of 3-(4-bromophenyl)propanoic acid and sulfuric acid (1 mL) is refluxed in methanol (100 mL) for 3 h. The reaction is made basic with saturated, aqueous Na2CO3 and is extracted with DCM. The organic layer is dried over Na2SO4, filtered, and concentrated under reduced pressure to obtain a crude product (4.25 g) as yellow oil. This material is used in the next step without further purification. 1H-NMR (400 MHz, DMSO-d6): δ 2.62 (t, 2H), 2.82 (t, 2H), 3.58 (s, 3H), 7.20 (d, 2H), 7.46 (d, 2H).


Step 4: Preparation of methyl 3-(4-allylphenyl)propanoate



embedded image


A mixture of methyl 3-(4-bromophenyl)propanoate (2.43 g, 10 mmol), potassium allyltrifluoroborate (1.63 g, 11 mmol), 1,1′-bis(di-tert-butylphosphino)ferrocene (1.42, 3 mmol), palladium (II) acetate (0.337 g, 1.5 mmol) and anhydrous K2CO3 (4.14 g, 30 mmol) is refluxed in anhydrous THF (100 mL) for 16 h. The reaction mixture is filtered through a celite pad and washed with EtOAc. The filtrate is evaporated and the residue is purified by flash column chromatography using a gradient from 0 to 20% EtOAc in hexane as the eluent. The desired product is isolated (1.54 g, 76%) as a green oil. 1H-NMR (400 MHz, CDCl3): δ 2.64 (t, 2H), 2.95 (t, 2H), 3.38 (d, 2H), 3.69 (s, 3H), 5.08 (d, 1H), 5.11 (d, 1H), 5.99 (ddt, 1H), 7.14 (m, 4H).


Step 5: Preparation of 3-(4-allylphenyl)propan-1-ol



embedded image


LAH (361 mg, 9.5 mmol) is added over 15 min. to a solution of methyl 3-(4-allylphenyl)propanoate (1048 mg, 5.1 mmol) in diethyl ether (100 mL) at 0° C. for 2 h. The reaction mixture is quenched with water at 0° C., the organic layer is collected, dried over Na2SO4, and concentrated under vacuum. The desired product is obtained (911 mg) as a colourless oil. 1H-NMR (400 MHz, CDCl3): δ 2.47 (m, 2H), 2.71 (t, 2H), 3.39 (d, 2H), 3.70 (d, 2H), 5.08 (d, 1H), 5.11 (d, 1H), 5.98 (ddt, 1H), 7.14 (m, 4H).


Step 6: Preparation of 1-allyl-4-(3-bromopropyl)benzene



embedded image


Triphenyl phosphine (1.56 g, 5.93 mmol) is added to a solution of 3-(4-allylphenyl)propan-1-ol (0.82 g, 4.63 mmol) and carbon tetrabromide (4.7 g, 14.1 mmol) in DCM (100 mL) at 0° C. The reaction is then slowly warmed to room temperature and stirred for a further 2 h. The reaction mixture is then concentrated, dry loaded on silica gel and purified by flash column chromatography using a gradient from 0 to 5% EtOAc in hexane as eluent. The desired product is obtained (0.942 g, 85% over two steps) as a colourless oil. 1H NMR (400 MHz, CDCl3): δ 2.18 (m, 2H), 2.78 (t, 2H), 3.41 (m, 4H), 5.09 (d, 1H), 5.11 (d, 1H), 5.99 (ddt, 1H), 7.15 (s, 4H).


Step 7: Preparation of 3-allyl-N-(3-(4-allylphenyl)propyl)-4-methylaniline



embedded image


A solution of 1-allyl-4-(3-bromopropyl)benzene (1.1 g, 4.8 mmol) and 3-allyl-4-methylaniline (1.2 g, 8.15 mmol) in DIPEA (0.68 g, 5.4 mmol) is heated at 100° C. for 3 h. The reaction mixture is then concentrated, dry loaded on silica gel and purified by flash column chromatography using a gradient from 0 to 30% Et2O in hexane as eluent. The desired product is isolated (1.05 g, 75% yield) as an orange oil. LC-MS m/z 306.2 [M+H]+.


Step 8: Preparation of 64(3-allyl-4-methylphenyl)(3-(4-allylphenyl)propynamino)pyrimidine-2,4(1H,3H)-dione



embedded image


A solution of 3-allyl-N-(3-(4-allylphenyl)propyl)-4-methylaniline (0.87 g, 2.8 mmol), DIPEA (0.5 mL, 2.8 mmol) and 6-chlorouracil (1.1 g, 7.6 mmol) in DMF (12 mL) in a microwave vial is set to 175° C. for 30 min. EtOAc is added and the organic phase is washed with water, then brine. The organic layer is dried over Na2SO4 and dried loaded on silica gel. The crude product is purified by flash column chromatography using a gradient from 0 to 20% EtOAc in hexane as the eluent, followed by 0 to 10% MeOH in DCM to obtain desired product (297 mg, 25%) as a yellow solid. LC-MS m/z 416.2 (M+H)+.


Step 9: Preparation of 8-allyl-10-(3-(4-allylphenyl)propyl)-7-methyl-2,4-dioxo-2,3,4,10-tetrahydrobenzoMpteridine 5-oxide



embedded image


6-((3-Allyl-4-methylphenyl)(3-(4-allylphenyl)propyl)amino)pyrimidine-2,4(1H,3H)-dione (329 mg, 0.79 mmol) and sodium nitrite (277 mg, 4 mmol) is dissolved in acetic acid (7 mL) and stirred at room temperature for 45 min. The reaction mixture is then concentrated under vacuum and the crude product (orange solid) is used in the next step. LC-MS m/z 443.1 [M+H]+.


Step 10: Preparation of 8-allyl-10-(3-(4-allylphenyl)propyl)-7-methylbenzo[g]pteridine-2,4(3H,10H)-dione



embedded image


8-Allyl-10-(3-(4-allylphenyl)propyl)-7-methyl-2,4-dioxo-2,3,4,10-tetrahydrobenzo[g]pteridine 5-oxide (0.79 mmol) is dissolved in EtOH (100 mL), and TEA (1 mL) is added, followed by a solution of Na2S2O4 (280 mg, 1.6 mmol) in water (20 mL). The resulting solution is stirred at room temperature for 15 min. The reaction mixture is then concentrated under vacuum and purified by preparative HPLC (Method M) to obtain product (35.2 mg, 10%) as a yellow solid. LC-MS m/z 427.2 [M+H]+.


Step 11: Preparation of (10Z)-14-methyl-1,17,20,22-tetraazapentacyclo[11.10.2.25,8.016,24.018,23]heptacosa-5,7,10,13(25),14,16(24),17,22,26-nonaene-19,21-dione and (10E)-14-methyl-1,17,20,22-tetraazapentacyclo[11.10.2.25,8.016,24.018,23]heptacosa-5,7,10,13(25),14,16(24),17,22,26-nonaene-19,21-dione



embedded image


Dry toluene (1200 mL) is refluxed in a round bottom flask equipped with a Dean-Stark condenser for 30 min. to remove excess water. Upon removing the Dean-Stark condenser, 8-allyl-10-(3-(4-allylphenyl)propyl)-7-methylbenzo[g]pteridine-2,4(3H,10H)-dione (30 mg, 0.07 mmol) in DCM (5 mL) and Grubbs 1 reagent (20 mg, 0.02 mmol) in toluene (5 mL) are added at reflux simultaneously. The mixture is stirred for a further 20 min. and quenched with DMSO (4 mL), cooled to room temperature, concentrated under vacuum, and purified by preparative HPLC (Method N) to obtain the desired products.


Data for Example 25

(10Z)-14-methyl-1,17,20,22-tetraazapentacyclo[11.10.2.25,8.016,24.018,23]heptacosa-5,7,10,13(25),14,16(24),17,22,26-nonaene-19,21-dione: yellow solid, 1H NMR (400 MHz, DMSO-d6): δ 1.06 (br s, 2H), 2.43 (s, 3H), 2.68 (br s, 1H), 2.99 (br s, 1H), 3.49 (s, 2H), 3.67 (br s, 1H), 4.55 (br s, 1H), 5.09 (s, 1H), 5.54 (dt, J=7.5, 7.5 Hz, 1H), 6.14 (dt, 1H), 7.39 (m, 4H), 7.83 (s, 1H), 11.32 (s, 1H); LC-MS m/z 399.1 [M+H].


Data for Example 26

(10E)-14-methyl-1,17,20,22-tetraazapentacyclo[11.10.2.25,8.016,24.018,23]heptacosa-5,7,10,13(25),14,16(24),17,22,26-nonaene-19,21-dione: yellow solid, 1H NMR (400 MHz, DMSO-d6): δ 1.81 (m, 2H), 2.31 (s, 3H), 2.80 (m, 2H), 3.26-3.62 (overlapping signals with water), 4.08 (s, 2H), 5.12 (dt, 1H, J=6.5, 15.5 Hz), 5.92 (s, 1H), 6.18 (dt, 1H), 7.27 (d, 2H), 7.31 (d, 2H), 7.85 (s, 1H), 11.3 (s, 1H). LC-MS m/z 399.1 [M+H].




embedded image


Preparation of 14-methyl-1,17,20,22-tetraazapentacyclo[11.10.2.25,8.016,24.018,23]heptacosa-5,7,13(25),14,16(24),17,22,26-octaene-19,21-dione

A solution of (10E)-14-methyl-1,17,20,22-tetraazapentacyclo[11.10.2.25,8.016,24.018,23]heptacosa-5,7,10,13(25),14,16(24),17,22,26-nonaene-19,21-dione (2 mg, 0.005 mmol) in EtOAc (8 mL) is purged with argon for 5 min. A catalytic amount of palladium on carbon (10% wt. on carbon) is added and the reaction mixture is placed under an atmosphere of hydrogen for 4 h. The reaction mixture is filtered through a celite pad and is washed with MeOH until no color is seen. The filtrate is concentrated under reduced pressure to dryness and purified by preparative TLC using 5% MeOH in DCM as the eluent to obtain desired product (0.7 mg, 35%) as a yellow solid. LC-MS m/z 401.1 [M+H]+.


Example 28
10-(2-(Benzylamino)-3-phenylpropyl)-7,8-dimethylbenzo[g]pteridine-2,4(3H,10H)-dione



embedded image


10-(2-Amino-3-phenylpropyl)-7,8-dimethylbenzo[g]pteridine-2,4(3H,10H)-dione (23 mg, 0.061 mmol) is dissolved in MeOH (5 mL) at room temperature, and then benzaldehyde (7 mg, 0.067 mmol) and AcOH (1 drop) are added. The reaction mixture is stirred at room temperature for 2.5 h, and then NaBH3CN (8 mg, 0.13 mmol) is added in one portion and the resulting mixture is stirred at room temperature for 4 h. The reaction is quenched with H2O (caution, 2 mL), and the reaction mixture is evaporated. The crude product is dissolved in DCM:MeOH [4:1] and purified using a preparative TLC plate [5% MeOH/DCM, then 10% MeOH/DCM] to afford the desired product, 10-(2-(benzylamino)-3-phenylpropyl)-7,8-dimethylbenzo[g]pteridine-2,4(3H,10H)-dione as a yellow solid. 1H NMR (400 MHz, DMSO-d6) δ 2.10 (3H, t), 2.33 (3H, t), 3.16-3.64 (2H, m's), 3.8-4.0 (1H, m), 4.24-4.48 (2H, m), 4.72-4.88 (1H, m), 5.44-5.64 (1H, m), 6.16-6.28 (1H, m), 7.32-7.56 (11H, m, s), 7.91 (s, 1H), 11.57 (s, 1H); MS (ESI+) for C10H12N2O2 m/z 466.27 (M+H)+.


Example 29
10-[3-(4-Chlorophenyl)-2-isobutoxypropyl]-7-isopropylbenzo[g]pteridine-2,4(3H,10H)-dione



embedded image


Step 1 Preparation of Isobutyl Isobutoxyacetate



embedded image


To a well-stirred solution of isobutyl alcohol (50 mL) at rt is added metallic sodium (1.00 g, 43.5 mmol) and the reaction mixture is heated at 50° C. for 18 h. The mixture is cooled to rt and a solidified mass of the sodium salt is obtained. THF (10 mL) is added at rt to give a solution, and tert-butyl α-bromoacetate (7.26 g, 37.2 mmol) is added. The mixture is stirred at rt for 5 h, diluted with 200 mL of water and extracted with hexane (4×150 mL). The combined organic layers are washed with brine, dried with anhydrous sodium sulfate and concentrated. The residue is subjected to atmospheric distillation (bath to 140° C.). The pot contained the product and excess alcohol. This is vacuum distilled at 20 torr @ 100 C to remove the remaining alcohol. The pot contained 4.61 g of isobutyl isobutoxyacetate as a liquid. 1H NMR (400 MHz, CDCl3) δ ppm 0.93 (12H, m), 1.94 (2 H, m), 3.30 (2H, d), 3.94 (2H, d), 4.09 (2H, s).


Step 2 Preparation of isobutyl 3-(4-chlorophenyl)-2-isobutoxyacrylate



embedded image


To a cold (0° C. ice bath) well-stirred solution of isobutyl isobutoxyacetate (1.17 g, 6.21 mmol) and 4-chlorobenzaldehyde (0.5824 g, 4.14 mmol) in dry THF (18 mL) is added solid potassium tert-butoxide (0.5579 g, 4.97 mmol) portionwise. After 1 h, the bath is removed and the reaction allowed to warm to rt and is stirred overnight. The reaction is quenched with saturated, aqueous ammonium chloride (5 mL) and diluted with ethyl acetate (100 mL). The layers are separated and the aqueous layer is extracted with ethyl acetate (3×50 mL). The organic layers are combined, dried with anhydrous sodium sulfate and concentrated. The residue is subjected to silica gel chromatography (230-400 mesh, 150 g, elution with 10% ethyl acetate/hexane) to give 720 mg of isobutyl 3-(4-chlorophenyl)-2-isobutoxyacrylate as an oil. 1H NMR (400 MHz, CDCl3) δ ppm 1.00 (12 H, m), 2.05 (2H, m), 3.69 (2H, d), 4.03 (2H, d), 6.89 (1H, s), 7.33 (2H, d), 7.70 (2H, d); HPLC retention time: 6.30 min. (Method D).


Step 3 Preparation of isobutyl 3-(4-chlorophenyl)-2-isobutoxypropanoate



embedded image


To a well-stirred slurry of isobutyl (2Z)-3-(4-chlorophenyl)-2-isobutoxyacrylate (0.720 g, 2.32 mmol) and zinc dibromide (0.104 g, 0.463 mmol) in ethyl acetate (20 mL, 200 mmol) is added 10% palladium on carbon (0.039 g, 0.37 mmol). The reaction mixture is charged with 1 atm of hydrogen gas (balloon; evacuate/charge 5×) and stirred at rt for 24 h. The hydrogen gas is replaced and stirring is continued for an additional 18 h. The reaction mixture is filtered through Celite, the filter pad is washed with ethyl acetate (4×25 mL) and the filtrates are combined. The solution is washed with saturated, aqueous sodium bicarbonate, water and brine and dried with anhydrous sodium sulfate. Concentration provided 720 mg of isobutyl 3-(4-chlorophenyl)-2-isobutoxypropanoate as a clear colorless oil. 1H NMR (400 MHz, CDCl3) δ ppm 0.86 (6H, d), 0.93 (6H, d), 1.83 (1H, m), 1.95 (1H, m), 3.01 (3H, m), 3.40 (1H, dd), 3.91 (2H, m), 3.99 (1H, m), 7.21 (2H, d), 7.29 (2H, d); HPLC retention time: 5.94 min. (Method D).


Step 4 Preparation of 3-(4-chlorophenyl)-2-isobutoxypropan-1-ol



embedded image


A slurry of LAH (0.175 g, 4.60 mmol) in dry THF (20 mL) is stirred at 0° C. under nitrogen and a solution of isobutyl 3-(4-chlorophenyl)-2-isobutoxypropanoate (0.72 g, 2.3 mmol) in dry THF (20 mL) is added slowly. The reaction is allowed to warm to rt and is stirred overnight. The reaction mixture is cooled at 0° C. and sodium sulfate decahydrate (200 mg) is added carefully. The mixture is then stirred at rt for 4 h. Water (2.0 mL) is added, the mixture is diluted with ether and filtered through Celite. The salts are washed with ether and the filtrate concentrated. The residue is subjected to silica gel chromatography (230-400 mesh, 50 g, elution with 10 and 20% ethyl acetate/hexane) to give 394 mg of 3-(4-chlorophenyl)-2-isobutoxypropan-1-ol as a clear colorless oil. 1H NMR (400 MHz, CDCl3) δ ppm 0.88 (6H, m), 1.81 (1H, m), 1.92 (1H, t), 2.73 (1H, m), 2.86 (1H, m), 3.29 (2H), 3.48 (2H, m), 3.64 (1H, m), 7.14 (2H, d), 7.25 (2H, d); MS (ESI+) for C13H19ClO2 m/z 265.1 (M+Na)+; HPLC retention time: 4.45 min. (Method D).


Step 5 Preparation of 1-(3-bromo-2-isobutoxypropyl)-4-chlorobenzene



embedded image


A solution of triphenylphosphine (460 mg, 1.8 mmol) in DCM (20 mL) is cooled at 0° C. and a solution of bromine (0.091 mL, 1.8 mmol) in DCM (10 mL) added slowly over a period of 30 min. A solution of 3-(4-chlorophenyl)-2-isobutoxypropan-1-ol (390 mg, 1.6 mmol) in DCM (10 mL) is then added and the reaction mixture is allowed to warm to rt and is stirred for 24 h. The reaction mixture is then transferred to a separatory funnel; washed with saturated, aqueous sodium bicarbonate, water and brine. The organic layer is dried with anhydrous sodium sulfate and concentrated. The residue is subjected to silica gel chromatography (230-400 mesh, 350 g, elution with 5% ethyl acetate/hexane) to give 470 mg of 1-(3-bromo-2-isobutoxypropyl)-4-chlorobenzene as a clear colorless oil. 1H NMR (400 MHz, CDCl3) δ ppm 0.87 (6H, m), 1.80 (1H, m), 2.86 (1H, dd), 2.96 (1H, dd), 3.11 (1H, dd), 3.31 (1H, dd), 3.37 (2H, m), 3.60 (1H, m), 7.20 (2H, d), 7.28 (2H, d); HPLC retention time: 5.85 min. (Method D).


Step 6 Preparation of N-[3-(4-chlorophenyl)-2-isobutoxypropy]-4-isopropyl-2-nitroaniline



embedded image


To a cold (at 0° C.) solution 4-isopropyl-2-nitroaniline (0.23 g, 1.3 mmol) in dry DMF (7.5 mL) is added sodium hydride (61 mg, 1.53 mmol) portionwise. After 15 min., the cooling bath is removed and the solution is stirred 30 min. at rt. To this solution is added 1-(3-bromo-2-isobutoxypropyl)-4-chlorobenzene (0.468 g, 1.53 mmol) dropwise via syringe. After 18 h at rt, the reaction mixture is heated at 60° C. for 8 h. This mixture is concentrated in vacuo to remove DMF and the residue is partitioned between DCM and saturated, aqueous ammonium chloride (50 mL each). The layers are separated, the aqueous layer is extracted with DCM (3×20 mL), and the combined organic layers are dried with anhydrous sodium sulfate and concentrated. The residue is subjected to silica gel chromatography (230-400 mesh, 150 g, elution with 5% EtOAc/hexane) to give 335 mg of N-[3-(4-chlorophenyl)-2-isobutoxypropyl]-4-isopropyl-2-nitroaniline as an orange oil. 1H NMR (400 MHz, CDCl3) δ ppm 0.89 (12H, m), 1.81 (2H, m), 6.67 (1H, d), 7.16 (3H, m), 7.32 (2H, m), 8.02 (1H, d); HPLC retention time: 6.50 min. (Method D).


Step 7 Preparation of N1-[3-(4-chlorophenyl)-2-isobutoxypropyl]-4-isopropylbenzene-1,2-diamine



embedded image


A slurry of N-[3-(4-chlorophenyl)-2-isobutoxypropyl]-4-isopropyl-2-nitroaniline (0.335 g, 0.827 mmol) and Raney Nickel (0.200 g, 3.41 mmol) in ethanol (20 mL) is subjected to 1 atm of hydrogen gas (balloon) for 2 h. The reaction mixture is diluted with ethanol (10 mL), and filtered through Celite. The filter pad is washed with ethanol (10 mL) and the filtrates are combined and concentrated. The residue is subjected to silica gel chromatography (230-400 mesh, 50 g, elution with 10, 15 and 20% ethyl acetate/hexane) to give 64 mg of N1-[3-(4-chlorophenyl)-2-isobutoxypropyl]-4-isopropylbenzene-1,2-diamine as a clear colorless oil. 1H NMR (400 MHz, CDCl3) δ ppm 0.78 (6H, d), 1.10 (6H, d), 1.67 (1H, m), 2.63 (1H, m), 2.81 (1H, m), 2.90 (1H, m), 2.99 (2H, m), 3.12 (1H, dd), 3.24 (1H, dd), 3.65 (1H, m), 4.10 (1H, t), 4.42 (2H, br s), 6.27 (1H, d), 6.34 (1H, dd), 6.45 (1H, s), 7.27 (2H, d), 7.33 (2H, d); MS (ESI+) for C22H31ClN2O m/z 375.2 (M+H)+; HPLC retention time: 4.53 min. (Method D).


Step 8 Preparation of 10-[3-(4-chlorophenyl)-2-isobutoxypropyl]-7-isopropylbenzo[g]pteridine-2,4(3H,10H)-dione



embedded image


To a well-stirred solution of N1-[3-(4-chlorophenyl)-2-isobutoxypropyl]-4-isopropylbenzene-1,2-diamine (155.0 mg, 0.4134 mmol) and alloxan (72.8 mg, 0.455 mmol) in acetic acid (10 mL) is added boric acid (76.7 mg, 1.24 mmol). The reaction mixture is then stirred at rt for 18 h. The reaction is concentrated in vacuo, suspended in 10% MeOH/DCM (10 mL) and filtered. The yellow solution is concentrated to provide a a solid. This solid is dissolved in DCM, adsorbed onto silica gel (10 g) and subjected to silica gel chromatography (230-400 mesh, 50 g, elution with 0.5, 1, 1.5% MeOH/DCM) to give 132 mg of 10-[3-(4-chlorophenyl)-2-isobutoxypropyl]-7-isopropylbenzo[g]pteridine-2,4(3H,10H)-dione as an oil. 1H NMR (400 MHz, DMSO-d6) δ ppm 0.40 (6H, m), 0.85 (1H, m), 1.28 (6H, m), 2.77 (1H, m), 2.96 (3H, m), 3.10 (1H, m), 4.05 (1H, m), 4.67 (2H, br. s), 7.34 (4H, s), 7.84 (1H, dd), 7.91 (2H, m), 11.39 (1 H, s); MS (ESI+) for C26H29ClN4O3 m/z 481.0 (M+H)+; HPLC retention time: 4.91 min. (Method D).


Example 30
10-[2-(Benzyloxy)-3-phenylpropyl]-7,8-dimethylbenzo[g]pteridine-2,4(3H,10H)-dione



embedded image


Step 1 Preparation of [(2-azido-1-benzylethoxy)methyl]benzene



embedded image


To a cold (at 0° C.) solution of 1-azido-3-phenylpropan-2-ol (0.5 g, 3 mmol) in dry THF (21 mL) under nitrogen is added sodium hydride (0.135 g, 3.38 mmol) as a solid. This mixture is stirred an additional 30 min. at 0° C. and benzyl bromide (0.420 mL, 3.53 mmol) added via syringe. The reaction is then allowed to warm to rt and is stirred overnight. The reaction mixture is partitioned between saturated, aqueous ammonium chloride and ethyl acetate (30 mL each), the layers are separated and the aqueous layer is extracted with ethyl acetate (3×20 mL). The organic layers are combined, dried with anhydrous sodium sulfate and concentrated. The residue is subjected to silica gel chromatography (230-400 mesh,40 g, elution with 10% ethyl acetate/hexane) to give 614 mg of [(2-azido-1-benzylethoxy)methyl]benzene as a clear colorless oil. 1H NMR (400 MHz, CDCl3) δ ppm 2.83 (1H, m), 2.96 (1H, m), 3.28 (2H, m), 3.77 (1H, m), 4.56 (2H, m), 7.29 (10H, m); HPLC retention time: 4.96 min. (Method D).


Step 2 Preparation of 2-(Benzyloxy)-3-phenylpropan-1-amine



embedded image


To a cold (at 0° C.) well-stirred solution of [(2-azido-1-benzylethoxy)methyl]benzene (0.614 g, 2.30 mmol) in dry THF (10 mL) is added a 1.00 M solution of trimethylphosphine in THF (3.44 mL, 3.44 mmol). After 30 min. at 0° C., the ice bath is removed and stirring is continued for 18 h at rt. The reaction mixture is cooled at 0° C. and water (0.5 mL) is added. The reaction mixture is then allowed to warm to rt and is stirred overnight. The reaction mixture is partitioned between brine and ethyl acetate (50 mL each), the layers are separated and the aqueous layer is extracted with ethyl acetate (3×25 mL). The organic layers are combined, dried with anhydrous sodium sulfate and concentrated. The residue is subjected to silica gel chromatography (230-400 mesh, 50 g, elution with 1 and 2% MeOH (containing 7M NH3)/DCM) to give 275 mg of 2-(benzyloxy)-3-phenylpropan-1-amine as an oil. 1H NMR (400 MHz, CDCl3) δ ppm 1.48 (2H, br s), 2.80 (3H, m), 3.00 (1H, dd), 3.65 (1H, m), 4.56 (2H, m), 7.35 (10H, m); MS (ESI+) for C16H19NO m/z 242.2 (M+H)+; HPLC retention time: 3.02 min. (Method D).


Step 3 Preparation of N-[2-(benzyloxy)-3-phenylpropyl]-4,5-dimethyl-2-nitroaniline



embedded image


A well-stirred slurry of 1-bromo-4,5-dimethyl-2-nitrobenzene (0.364 g, 1.58 mmol), 2-(benzyloxy)-3-phenylpropan-1-amine (0.273 g, 1.13 mmol), Cs2CO3 (737 mg, 2.26 mmol) and (oxydi-2,1-phenylene)bis[diphenylphosphine] (91.4 mg, 0.170 mmol) in toluene (10 mL) is sparged with dry nitrogen for 5 min. Tris(dibenzylideneacetone)dipalladium(0) (51.8 mg, 0.0566 mmol) is added and sparging is continued for an additional 5 min. The reaction mixture is then heated at 100° C. for 48 h. The mixture is cooled to rt, diluted with ethyl acetate (15 mL), filtered and the salts are washed with ethyl acetate (3×10 mL). The organic layers are combined, concentrated and the residue is subjected to silica gel chromatography (230-400 mesh, 150 g, elution with 10% ethyl acetate/hexane) which gives 198 mg of N-[2-(benzyloxy)-3-phenylpropyl]-4,5-dimethyl-2-nitroaniline as an orange oil. 1H NMR (400 MHz, CDCl3) δ ppm 2.16 (6H, s), 2.86 (1H, dd), 3.10 (1H, dd), 3.28 (1H, m), 3.40 (1H, m), 3.89 (1H, m), 4.59 (2H, m), 6.37 (1H, s), 7.30 (10H, m), 7.92 (1H, s), 8.25 (1H, m); MS (ESI+) for C24H26N2O3 m/z 391.3 (M+H)+; HPLC retention time: 5.57 min. (Method D).


Step 4 Preparation of N-[2-(benzyloxy)-3-phenylpropyl]-4,5-dimethylbenzene-1,2-diamine



embedded image


To a well-stirred solution of N-[2-(benzyloxy)-3-phenylpropyl]-4,5-dimethyl-2-nitroaniline (155 mg, 0.397 mmol) and solid ammonium chloride (210 mg, 4.0 mmol) in MeOH (20 mL) at 0° C. is added zinc (520 mg, 7.9 mmol) as a solid. After 5 min, the reaction is diluted with ethyl acetate and filtered through Celite. The solution is washed with water, dried with anhydrous sodium sulfate and concentrated to give 140 mg of N-[2-(benzyloxy)-3-phenylpropyl]-4,5-dimethylbenzene-1,2-diamine as an oil. 1H NMR (400 MHz, CDCl3) δ ppm 2.13 (6H, s), 2.91 (1H, dd), 3.09 (2H, m), 3.19 (1H, dd), 3.69 (3H, br. s), 4.08 (1H, m), 4.58 (2H, s), 6.51 (1H, s), 6.65 (1H, s), 7.32 (10H, m); MS (ESI+) for C24H28N2O m/z 361.1 (M+H)+; HPLC retention time: 4.00 min. (Method D).


Step 5 Preparation of 10-[2-(benzyloxy)-3-phenylpropyl]-7,8-dimethylbenzo[g]pteridine-2,4(3H,10H)-dione



embedded image


To a well-stirred solution of N-[2-(benzyloxy)-3-phenylpropyl]-4,5-dimethylbenzene-1,2-diamine (140.0 mg, 0.3884 mmol) and alloxan (68.4 mg, 0.427 mmol) in acetic acid (9 mL) is added boric acid (72.0 mg, 1.16 mmol). The reaction is stirred at rt for 18 h and concentrated in vacuo. The solid is dissolved in 10% MeOH/DCM, filtered, adsorbed onto silica gel (10 g) and subjected to silica gel chromatography (230-400 mesh, 50 g, elution with 0.5, 1, 1.5% MeOH/DCM) to give 121 mg of 10-[2-(benzyloxy)-3-phenylpropyl]-7,8-dimethylbenzo[g]pteridine-2,4(3H,10H)-dione as a orange-red solid. 1H NMR (400 MHz, DMSO-d6) δ ppm 2.36 (3H, s), 2.38 (3H, s), 3.09 (2H, d), 4.02 (1H, m), 4.24 (2 H, m), 4.58 (1H, m), 4.70 (1H, m), 6.62 (2H, d), 6.96 (2H, t), 7.05 (1H, m), 7.26 (1H, t), 7.35 (4H, m), 7.57 (1H, br s), 7.85 (1H, s), 11.26 (1H, s); MS (ESI+) for C28H26N4O3 m/z 467.2 (M+H)+; HPLC retention time: 4.02 min. (Method D).


The compounds of the invention particularly those compounds as set forth in Table 1 below which are disclosed and claimed either individually and/or collectively may generally be prepared using similar procedures as set forth in Examples 1-16 above. It is to be understood that the appropriate reagents, solvents and reaction condition for those reactions are used as apparent to one skilled in the art.















TABLE 1








HPLC







LC-MS
retention
HPLC






MH+
time
meth-




Entry
Structure
(m/z)
(min)
od
Preparation
Name





















1


embedded image


375.1
5.68
Meth- od F
Prepared using synthesis of Example 1 starting from 4,5-dimethyl-2- nitroaniline and (4- bromobutyl)benz- ene
7,8- dimethyl- 10-(4- phenylbutyl) benzo[g] pteridine- 2,4(3H,10H)- dione





2


embedded image


402.2
5.15
Meth- od F
Prepared using synthesis of Example 10 starting from 8- chloro-7-methyl- 10-(3- phenylpropyl) benzo[g]pteridine- 2,4(3H,10H)- dione and cyclopropylamine
8- (cyclopropyl- amino)-7- methyl 10- (3- phenylprop- yl)benzo[g] pteridine- 2,4(3H,10H)- dione





3


embedded image


390.2
5.24
Meth- od F
Prepared using synthesis of Example 10 starting from 8- chloro-7-methyl- 10-(3- phenylpropyl) benzo[g]pteridine- 2,4(3H,10H)- dione and dimethylamine
8- (dimethyl- amino)-7- methyl-10- (3- phenylprop- yl)benzo[g] pteridine- 2,4(3H,10H)- dione





4


embedded image


420.3
4.87
Meth- od F
Prepared using synthesis of Example 10 starting from 8- chloro-7-methyl- 10-(3- phenylpropyl) benzo[g]pteridine- 2,4(3H,10H)- dione and 2- methoxyethyl- amine
8-[(2- methoxy- ethyl)amino]- 7-methyl- 10-(3- phenylprop- yl) benzo[g] pteridine- 2,4(3H,10H)- dione





5


embedded image


436.2
4.02
Meth- od F
Prepared using synthesis of Example 10 starting from 8- chloro-7-methyl- 10-(3- phenylpropyl) benzo[g]pteridine- 2,4(3H,10H)- dione and 3- amino-1,2- propanediol
8-[(2,3- dihydroxy- propyl)amino]- 7- methyl-10- (3- phenylprop- yl) benzo[g] pteridine- 2,4(3H,10H)- dione





6


embedded image


406.3
4.27
Meth- od F
Prepared using synthesis of Example 10 starting from 8- chloro-7-methyl- 10-(3- phenylpropyl) benzo[g]pteridine- 2,4(3H,10H)- dione and ethanolamine
8-[(2- hydroxyeth- yl)amino]- 7-methyl- 10-(3- phenylprop- yl) benzo[g] pteridine- 2,4(3H,10H)- dione





7


embedded image


433.3
3.88
Meth- od F
Prepared using synthesis of Example 10 starting from 8- chloro-7-methyl- 10-(3- phenylpropyl) benzo[g]pteridine- 2,4(3H,10H)- dione and N,N- dimethyl-1,2- ethanediamine
8-{[2- (dimethyl- amino)ethyl] amino}-7- methyl-10- (3- phenylprop- yl) benzo[g] pteridine- 2,4(3H,10H)- dione





8


embedded image


432.2
2.94
Meth- od G
Prepared using synthesis of Example 10 starting from 8- chloro-7-methyl- 10-(3- phenylpropyl) benzo[g]pteridine- 2,4(3H,10H)- dione and 3- pyrrolidinol
8-(3- hydroxy- pyrrolidin-1- yl)-7- methyl-10- (3- phenylprop- yl) benzo[g] pteridine- 2,4(3H,10H)- dione





9


embedded image


361.2
3.91
Meth- od G
Prepared using synthesis of Example 13 starting from 8- chloro-7-methyl- 10-(4- phenylbutyl)benzo [g]pteridine- 2,4(3H,10H)- dione
7-methyl- 10-(4- phenylbutyl) benzo[g] pteridine- 2,4(3H,10H)- dione





10


embedded image


376.2
3.14
Meth- od G
Prepared using synthesis of Example 10 starting from 8- chloro-7-methyl- 10-(3- phenylpropyl) benzo[g]pteridine- 2,4(3H,10H)- dione and methylamine
7-methyl- 8- (methyl- amino)-10-(3- phenylprop- yl)benzo[g] pteridine- 2,4(3H,10H)- dione





11


embedded image


375.2
4.09
Meth- od G
Prepared using synthesis of Example 1 starting from 4,5-dimethyl-2- nitroaniline and 1-(3- bromopropyl)-4- methylbenzene
7,8- dimethyl- 10-[3-(4- methylphen- yl)propyl] benzo[g] pteridine- 2,4(3H,10H)- dione





12


embedded image


362.3
2.90
Meth- od G
Prepared using synthesis of Example 10 starting from 8- chloro-7-methyl- 10-(3- phenylpropyl) benzo[g]pteridine- 2,4(3H,10H)- dione and ammonium hydroxide
8-amino-7- methyl-10- (3- phenylprop- yl)benzo[g] pteridine- 2,4(3H,10H)- dione





13


embedded image


379.1
3.55
Meth- od D
Prepared using synthesis of Example 6 starting from 1- bromo-4,5- dimethyl-2- nitrobenzene and 3-(4- fluorophenyl) propan-1-amine
10-[3-(4- fluorophen- yl)propyl]- 7,8- dimethyl- benzo[g] pteridine- 2,4(3H,10H)- dione





14


embedded image


379.1
3.41
Meth- od D
Prepared using synthesis of Example 4 starting from 1- bromo-4,5- dimethyl-2- nitrobenzene and 1- phenylthio-2- bromoethane
7,8- dimethyl- 10-[2- (phenylthio) ethyl]benzo [g]pteridine- 2,4(3H,10H)- dione





15


embedded image


391.4
6.38
Meth- od C
Prepared using synthesis of Example 1 starting from 4,5-dimethyl-2- nitroaniline and 1-(3- bromopropyl)- 4- methoxybenzene
10-[3-(4- methoxy- phenyl)propyl]- 7,8- dimethyl- benzo[g] pteridine- 2,4(3H,10H)- dione





16


embedded image


362.4
4.22
Meth- od A
Prepared using synthesis of Example 1 starting from 4,5-dimethyl-2- nitroaniline and (2- bromoethoxy)- benzene
7,8- dimethyl- 10-(2- phenoxy- ethyl)benzo [g]pteridine- 2,4(3H,10H)- dione





17


embedded image


390.4
4.23
Meth- od A
Prepared using synthesis of Example 1 starting from 4,5-dimethyl-2- nitroaniline and 1-(3- bromopropyl)- 3- methoxybenzene
10-[3-(3- methoxy- phenyl)propyl]- 7,8- dimethyl- benzo[g] pteridine- 2,4(3H,10H)- dione





18


embedded image


396.1
4.47
Meth- od E
Prepared using synthesis of Example 1 starting from 4,5-dimethyl-2- nitroaniline and 1-(3- bromopropyl)- 3,5- difluorobenzene
10-[3-(3,5- difluoro- phenyl)propyl]- 7,8- dimethyl- benzo[g] pteridine- 2,4(3H,10H)- dione





19


embedded image


378.4
4.39
Meth- od E
Prepared using synthesis of Example 1 starting from 4,5-dimethyl-2- nitroaniline and 1-(3- bromopropyl)- 2- fluorobenzene
10-[3-(2- fluorophen- yl)propyl]- 7,8- dimethyl- benzo[g] pteridine- 2,4(3H,10H)- dione





21


embedded image


374.4
3.76
Meth- od E
Prepared using synthesis of Example 1 starting from 4,5-dimethyl-2- nitroaniline and 3-(3- methylphenyl) propylbromide
7,8- Dimethyl- 10-[3-(3- methyl- phenyl)propyl] benzo[g] pteridine- 2,4(3H,10H)- dione





22


embedded image


374.4
3.75
Meth- od E
Prepared using synthesis of Example 1 starting from 4,5-dimethyl-2- nitroaniline and 3-(2- methylphenyl) propylbromide
7,8- Dimethyl- 10-[3-(2- methyl- phenyl)propyl] benzo[g] pteridine- 2,4(3H,10H)- dione





23


embedded image


428.1
3.97
Meth- od E
Prepared using synthesis of Example 4 starting from 4,5-Dimethyl- o- phenylenedi- amine and 1-(3- bromopropyl)- 3- (trifluoromethyl) benzene
7,8- dimethyl- 10-{3-[3- (trifluoro- methyl)phen- yl]propyl} benzo[g] pteridine- 2,4(3H,10H)- dione





24


embedded image


394.8
5.57
Meth- od E
Prepared using synthesis of Example 1 starting from 4,5-dimethyl-2- nitroaniline and 1-(3- bromopropyl)- 3- chlorobenzene
10-[3-(3- chlorophen- yl)propyl]- 7,8- dimethyl- benzo[g] pteridine- 2,4(3H,10H)- dione





25


embedded image


378.4
4.39
Meth- od D
Prepared using synthesis of Example 1 starting from 4,5-dimethyl-2- nitroaniline and 1-(3- bromopropyl)- 3- fluorobenzene
10-[3-(3- fluorophen- yl)propyl]- 7,8- dimethyl- benzo[g] pteridine- 2,4(3H,10H)- dione





26


embedded image


412.8
3.82
Meth- od D
Prepared using synthesis of Example 1 starting from 4,5-dimethyl-2- nitroaniline and 4-(3- bromopropyl)- 2-chloro-1- fluorobenzene
10-[3-(3- chloro-4- fluorophen- yl)propyl]- 7,8- dimethyl- benzo[g] pteridine- 2,4(3H,10H)- dione





27


embedded image


444.4
4.06
Meth- od E
Prepared using synthesis of Example 4 starting from 4,5-Dimethyl-o- phenylenediamine and 1-(3- bromopropyl)-4- (trifluoromethoxy) benzene
7,8- dimethyl- 10-{3-[4- (trifluoro- methoxy)phen- yl]propyl} benzo[g] pteridine- 2,4(3H,10H)- dione





28


embedded image


444.4
4.03
Meth- od E
Prepared using synthesis of Example 4 starting from 4,5-Dimethyl-o- phenylenediamine and 1-(3- bromopropyl)-3- (trifluoromethoxy) benzene
7,8- dimethyl- 10-{3-[3- (trifluoro- methoxy)phen- yl]propyl} benzo[g] pteridine- 2,4(3H,10H)- dione





29


embedded image


429.3
4.04
Meth- od E
Prepared using synthesis of Example 4 starting from alkylation of 4,5-Dimethyl-o- phenylenediamine and 1-(3- bromopropyl)- 3,4- dichlorobenzene
10-[3-(3,4- dichloro- phenyl)propyl]- 7,8- dimethyl- benzo[g] pteridine- 2,4(3H,10H)- dione





30


embedded image


396.4
3.67
Meth- od E
Prepared using synthesis of Example 4 starting from 4,5-Dimethyl-o- phenylenediamine and 1-(3- bromopropyl)- 3,4- difluorobenzene
10-[3-(3,4- difluoro- phenyl)propyl]- 7,8- dimethyl- benzo[g] pteridine- 2,4(3H,10H)- dione





31


embedded image


377.1
3.29
C
Prepared using the synthesis of Example 14
10-(2- hydroxy-3- phenylprop- yl)-7,8- dimethyl- benzo[g] pteridine- 2,4(3H,10H)- dione





32


embedded image


377.3
2.53
C
Prepared using the synthesis of Example 14
10-(2- (Benzyloxy) ethyl)-7,8- dimethyl- benzo[g] pteridine- 2,4(3H,10H)- dione





33


embedded image


377.1
2.31
C
Prepared using the synthesis of Example 14
10-(3- hydroxy-3- phenylprop- yl)-7,8- dimethyl- benzo[g] pteridine- 2,4(3H,10H)- dione





34


embedded image


389.2
5.85
C
Prepared using the synthesis of Example 14
7,8- dimethyl- 10-(5- phenylpent- yl)benzo[g] pteridine- 2,4(3H,10H)- dione





35


embedded image


404.1
4.89
C
Prepared using the synthesis of Example 14
10-(2- (dimethyl- amino)-3- phenylprop- yl)-7,8- dimethyl- benzo[g] pteridine 2,4(3H,10H)- dione





36


embedded image


376.1
5.69
C
Prepared using the synthesis of Example 14
10-(2- amino-3- phenylprop- yl)-7,8- dimethyl- benzo[g] pteridine- 2,4(3H,10H)- dione










The compounds of the invention particularly those compounds as set forth in Table 2 below which are disclosed and claimed either individually and/or collectively may generally be prepared using similar procedures as set forth in Examples 1-30 above. It is to be understood that the appropriate reagents, solvents and reaction condition for those reactions are used as apparent to one skilled in the art.















TABLE 2








HPLC







LC-
re-







MS
tention
HPLC






MH+
time
meth-




Entry
Structure
(m/z)
(min)
od
Preparation
Name





















1


embedded image


417.0
4.30
D
Prepared using the synthesis of Example 6 starting with 1-bromo- 4,5-dimethyl-2- nitrobenzene and 2- benzyl-4- methylpentan-1- amine
10-(2-benzyl- 4- methylpentyl)- 7,8- dimethylbenzo [g]pteridine- 2,4(3H,10H)- dione





2


embedded image


423.0
4.37
D
Prepared using the synthesis of Example 1 starting with 4- isobutyl-2-nitroaniline and 1-(3- bromopropyl)-4- chlorobenzene
10-(3-(4- chlorophenyl) propyl)-7- isobutylbenzo [g]pteridine- 2,4(3H,10H)- dione





3


embedded image


423.2
4.58
G
Prepared using the synthesis of Example 1 starting with 1-(3- bromopropyl)-4- methylbenzene and 3- nitrobiphenyl-4-amine
7-phenyl-10- (3-(p- tolyl)propyl) benzo[g] pteridine- 2,4(3H,10H)- dione





4


embedded image


423.1
4.30
D
Prepared using the synthesis of example 1 using 4-tert-butyl-2- nitroaniline and intermediate B
7-(tert- butyl)-10-(3- (4- chlorophenyl) propyl)benzo [g]pteridine- 2,4(3H,10H)- dione





5


embedded image


467.1
4.42
G
Prepared using the synthesis of Example 1 starting with N-[3-(4- chlorophenyl)propyl]- 5-(4-methoxybutyl)-4- methylbenzene-1,2- diamine, prepared as described for intermediate N.
10-(3-(4- chlorophenyl) propyl)-8-(4- methoxybutyl)- 7- methylbenzo [g]pteridine- 2,4(3H,10H)- dione





6


embedded image


423.2
4.28
D
Prepared using the synthesis of example 1 starting with 4- isopropyl-2- nitroaniline and intermediate M
10-(3-(4- chlorophenyl) butyl)-7- isopropylbenzo [g]pteridine- 2,4(3H,10H)- dione





7


embedded image


437.2
4.87
G
Prepared using the synthesis of Example 17 starting with 3-(4- Chlorophenyl)-2,2- dimethylpropan-1- amine, intermediate O
10-(3-(4- chlorophenyl)- 2,2- dimethylprop- yl)-7- isopropylbenzo [g]pteridine- 2,4(3H,10H)- dione





8


embedded image


467.3
4.43
D
Prepared using synthesis of Example 17 starting from 2- bromo-5- isopropylnitrobenzene and 3-(4- chlorophenyl)-2- isopropoxypropan-1- amine
10-(3-(4- chlorophenyl)- 2- isopropoxy- propyl)-7- isopropylbenzo [g]pteridine- 2,4(3H,10H)- dione





9


embedded image


409.1
4.37
G
Prepared using the synthesis of Example 1 starting with 4,5- dimethyl-2- nitroaniline and 1-(4- bromobutyl)-4- chlorobenzene
10-(4-(4- chlorophenyl) butyl)-7,8- dimethylbenzo [g]pteridine- 2,4(3H,10H)- dione





10


embedded image


453.3
4.21
D
Prepared using synthesis of Example 17 starting from 2- bromo-5-ethyl-4- methylnitrobenzene and 3-(4- chlorophenyl)-2- ethoxypropan-1- amine
10-(3-(4- chlorophenyl)- 2- ethoxypropyl)- 7-ethyl-8- methylbenzo [g]pteridine- 2,4(3H,10H)- dione





11


embedded image


423.0
4.36
D
Prepared using the synthesis of Example 1 starting with 4-sec- butyl-2-nitroaniline and 1-(3- bromopropyl)-4- chlorobenzene
7-(sec-butyl)- 10-(3-(4- chlorophenyl) propyl)benzo [g]pteridine- 2,4(3H,10H)- dione





12


embedded image


423.2
4.29
D
Prepared using the synthesis of Example 1 starting with N-[3-(4- chlorophenyl)-2- methylpropyl]-2-nitro- 4-propylaniline prepared using the synthesis of intermediate R
10-(3-(4- chlorophenyl)- 2- methylpropyl)- 7- propylbenzo [g]pteridine- 2,4(3H,10H)- dione





13


embedded image


423.0
4.36
D
Prepared using the synthesis of Example 1 starting with 5-ethyl- 4-methyl-2- nitroaniline and 1-(3- bromopropyl)-4- chlorobenzene
10-(3-(4- chlorophenyl) propyl)-8- ethyl-7- methylbenzo [g]pteridine- 2,4(3H,10H)- dione





14


embedded image


423.2
4.24
D
Prepared using the synthesis of Example 1 starting with 4- isopropyp-2- nitroaniline and 1-(3- bromo-2- methylpropyl)-4- chlorobenzene
10-(3-(4- chlorophenyl)- 2- methylpropyl)- 7- isopropylbenzo [g]pteridine- 2,4(3H,10H)- dione





15


embedded image


423.2
4.19
D
Prepared using the synthesis of Example 1 starting with N-[3-(4- chlorophenyl)-2- methylpropyl]-2-nitro- 4-propylaniline prepared using the synthesis of intermediate R
10-(3-(4- chlorophenyl)- 2- methylpropyl)- 7-ethyl-8- methylbenzo [g]pteridine- 2,4(3H,10H)- dione





16


embedded image


465.3
5.61
G
Prepared using synthesis of Example 1 starting from 4-hexyl- 5-methyl-2- nitroaniline and 1-(3- bromopropyl)-4- chlorobenzene
10-(3-(4- chlorophenyl) propyl)-7- hexyl-8- methylbenzo [g]pteridine- 2,4(3H,10H)- dione





17


embedded image


407.0
3.92
D
Prepared using the synthesis of Example 1 starting with 4- cyclopropyl-2- nitroaniline and 1-(3- bromopropyl)-4- chlorobenzene
10-(3-(4- chlorophenyl) propyl)-7- cyclopropyl- benzo[g] pteridine- 2,4(3H,10H)- dione





18


embedded image


467.4
4.84
D
Prepared using synthesis of Example 17 starting from 2- bromo-5-ethyl-4- methylnitrobenzene and 3-(4- chlorophenyl)-2- isopropoxypropan-1- amine
10-(3-(4- chlorophenyl)- 2- isopropoxy- propyl)-7-ethyl- 8- methylbenzo [g]pteridine- 2,4(3H,10H)- dione





19


embedded image


465.3
5.58
G
Prepared using synthesis of Example 1 starting from 5-hexyl- 4-methyl-2-nitroanilin and 1-(3- bromopropyl)-4- chlorobenzene
10-(3-(4- chlorophenyl) propyl)-8- hexyl-7- methylbenzo [g]pteridine- 2,4(3H,10H)- dione





20


embedded image


409.3
4.10
D
Prepared using the synthesis of Example 1 starting with 5- isopropyl-2- nitroaniline and 1-(3- bromopropyl)-4- chlorobenzene
10-(3-(4- chlorophenyl) propyl)-8- isopropylbenzo [g]pteridine- 2,4(3H,10H)- dione





21


embedded image


403.4
4.37
D
Prepared using the synthesis of Example 1 starting with 4- methyl-5-propyl-2- nitroaniline and 1-(3- bromopropyl)-4- methylbenzene
7-methyl-8- propyl-10-(3- (p- tolyl)propyl) benzo[g] pteridine- 2,4(3H,10H)- dione





22


embedded image


423.2
4.25
D
Prepared using the synthesis of Example 1 starting with 4- methyl-5-propyl-2- nitroaniline and 1-(3- bromopropyl)-4- chlorobenzene
10-(3-(4- chlorophenyl) propyl)-7- methyl-8- propylbenzo [g]pteridine- 2,4(3H,10H)- dione





23


embedded image


405.0
3.77
D
Prepared using the synthesis of Example 1 starting with 4-ethyl- 5-methyl-2- nitroaniline and m-(3- bromopropyl)-Anisole
7-ethyl-10- (3-(3- methoxyphen- yl)propyl)-8- methylbenzo [g]pteridine- 2,4(3H,10H)- dione





24


embedded image


407.3
3.99
D
Prepared using the synthesis of Example 1 starting with 4- methyl-5-propyl-2- nitroaniline and 1-(3- bromopropyl)-4- fluorobenzene
10-(3-(4- fluorophenyl) propyl)-7- methyl-8- propylbenzo [g]pteridine- 2,4(3H,10H)- dione





25


embedded image


389.3
4.15
D
Prepared using the synthesis of Example 1 starting with 4- isopropyl-2- nitroaniline and 1-(3- bromopropyl)-4- methylbenzene
7-isopropyl- 10-(3-(p- tolyl)propyl) benzo[g] pteridine- 2,4(3H,10H)- dione





26


embedded image


393.4
4.22
G
Prepared using the synthesis of Example 1 starting with 4- isopropyl-2- nitroaniline and 1-(3- bromopropyl)-4- fluorobenzene
10-(3-(4- fluorophenyl) propyl)-7- isopropylbenzo [g]pteridine- 2,4(3H,10H)- dione





27


embedded image


393.3
4.15
G
Prepared using the synthesis of Example 1 starting with 5- methyl-2-nitro-4- vinylaniline and 1-(3- bromopropyl)-4- fluorobenzene
7-ethyl-10- (3-(4- fluorophenyl) propyl) 8- methylbenzo [g]pteridine 2,4(3H,10H)- dione





28


embedded image


437.0
4.57
D
Prepared using the synthesis of Example 1 starting with 5- isobutyl-4-methyl-2- nitroaniline and 1-(3- bromopropyl)-4- chlorobenzene
10-(3-(4- chlorophenyl) propyl)-8- isobutyl-7- methylbenzo [g]pteridine- 2,4(3H,10H)- dione





29


embedded image


449.3
3.69
D
Prepared using the synthesis of example 1 starting with 4-ethyl- 5-methyl-2- nitroaniline and 1-(3- bromopropyl)-3-(2- methoxyethoxy)benzene
7-ethyl-10- (3-(3-(2- methoxyeth- oxy)phenyl) propyl)-8- methylbenzo [g]pteridine- 2,4(3H,10H)- dione





30


embedded image


423.0
4.35
D
Prepared using the synthesis of Example 1 starting with 4- isopropyl-5-methyl-2- nitroaniline and 1-(3- bromopropyl)-4- chlorobenzene
10-(3-(4- chlorophenyl) propyl)-7- isopropyl-8- methylbenzo [g]pteridine- 2,4(3H,10H)- dione





31


embedded image


365.4
3.38
D
Prepared using the synthesis of Example 1 starting with 4- methyl-2-nitroaniline and 1-(3- bromopropyl)-4- fluorobenzene
10-(3-(4- fluorophenyl) propyl)-7- methylbenzo [g]pteridine- 2,4(3H,10H)- dione





32


embedded image


381.3
3.60
D
Prepared using the synthesis of Example 1 starting with 5- methyl-2-nitroaniline and 1-(3- bromopropyl)-4- chlorobenzene
10-(3-(4- chlorophenyl) propyl)-8- methylbenzo [g]pteridine- 2,4(3H,10H)- dione





33


embedded image


393.4
4.27
G
Prepared using the synthesis of Example 1 starting with2-nitro-4- propylaniline and 1-(3- bromopropyl)-4- fluorobenzene
10-(3-(4- fluorophenyl) propyl)-7- propylbenzo [g]pteridine- 2,4(3H,10H)- dione





34


embedded image


452.2
3.53
D
Prepared using the synthesis of example 23 starting with 8- amino-10-[3-(4- chlorophenyl)propyl]- 7- methylbenzo[g]pteridine- 2,4(3H,10H)-dione and propanoyl chloride
N-(10-(3-(4- chlorophenyl) propyl)-7- methyl-2,4- dioxo- 2,3,4,10- tetrahydro- benzo[g] pteridin-8- yl)propion- amide





35


embedded image


409.3
4.47
G
Prepared using the synthesis of Example 1 starting with 4- isopropyl-2- nitroaniline and 1-(3- bromopropyl)-4- chlorobenzene
10-(3-(4- chlorophenyl) propyl)-7- isopropylbenzo [g]pteridine- 2,4(3H,10H)- dione





36


embedded image


464.5 (ES−)
3.77
D
Prepared using the synthesis of example 23 starting with 8- amino-10-[3-(4- chlorophenyl)propyl]- 7- methylbenzo[g]pteridine- 2,4(3H,10H)-dione and isobutryl chloride
N-(10-(3-(4- chlorophenyl) propyl)-7- methyl-2,4- dioxo- 2,3,4,10- tetrahydrobenzo [g]pteridin- 8- yl)isobutyr- amide





37


embedded image


389.0
4.09
D
Prepared using the synthesis of Example 1 starting with 4-ethyl- 5-methyl-2- nitroaniline and 1-(3- bromopropyl)-4- methylbenzene
7-ethyl-8- methyl-10- (3-(p- tolyl)propyl) benzo[g] pteridine- 2,4(3H,10H)- dione





38


embedded image


389.3
4.46
G
Prepared using the synthesis of Example 1 starting with 4-propyl- 2-nitroaniline and 1- (3-bromopropyl)-4- methylbenzene
7-propyl-10- (3-(p- tolyl)propyl) benzo[g] pteridine- 2,4(3H,10H)- dione





39


embedded image


438.2
3.23
D
Prepared using the synthesis of example 23 starting with 8- amino-10-[3-(4- chlorophenyl)propyl]- 7- methylbenzo[g]pteridine- 2,4(3H,10H)-dione and acetyl chloride
N-(10-(3-(4- chlorophenyl) propyl)-7- methyl-2,4- dioxo- 2,3,4,10- tetrahydro- benzo [g]pteridin- 8- yl)acetamide





40


embedded image


433.4
4.10
G
Prepared using the synthesis of Example 1 starting with 5-(4- methoxybutyl)-4- methyl-N-(3- phenylpropyl)benzene- 1,2-diamine, intermediate N.
8-(4- methoxybutyl)- 7-methyl- 10-(3- phenylpropyl) benzo[g] pteridine- 2,4(3H,10H)- dione





41


embedded image


497.4
4.59
G
Prepared using the synthesis of Example 11 starting with 8- chloro-7-methyl-10- (3- phenylpropyl)benzo[g] pteridine-2,4(3H,10H)- dione and 2- (phenylmethoxy)- ethanol
8-(2- (benzyloxy) ethoxy)-7- methyl-10- (3- phenylpropyl) benzo[g] pteridine- 2,4(3H,10H)- dione





42


embedded image


518.3
4.05
D
Prepared using the synthesis of example 23 starting with 8- amino-10-[3-(4- chlorophenyl)propyl]- 7- methylbenzo[g]pteridine- 2,4(3H,10H)-dione and 4-fluorobenzoyl chloride
N-(10-(3-(4- chlorophenyl) propyl)-7- methyl-2,4- dioxo- 2,3,4,10- tetrahydro- benzo [g]pteridin- 8-yl)-4- fluorobenz- amide





43


embedded image


423.3
4.40
D
Prepared using the synthesis of Example 1 starting with (4-allyl-5- methyl-2-nitro- phenyl)-(3-(4- chlorophenyl)propyl)- amine prepared as described in the preparation of intermediate N.
10-(3-(4- chlorophenyl) propyl)-8- methyl-7- propylbenzo [g]pteridine- 2,4(3H,10H)- dione





44


embedded image


389.0
3.99
D
Prepared using the synthesis of Example 1 starting with 4-ethyl- 5-methyl-2- nitroaniline and (3- bromo-2- methylpropyl)benzene
7-ethyl-8- methyl-10- (2-methyl-3- phenylpropyl) benzo[g] pteridine- 2,4(3H,10H)- dione





45


embedded image


403.3
4.62
G
Prepared using the synthesis of Example 1 starting with (5-allyl-4- methyl-2-nitro- phenyl)-(3-m-tolyl- propyl)-amine prepared as described in the preparation of intermediate N.
7-methyl-8- propyl-10-(3- (m- tolyl)propyl) benzo[g] pteridine- 2,4(3H,10H)- dione





46


embedded image


403.4
4.34
D
Prepared using the synthesis of Example 1 starting with (4-allyl-5- methyl-2-nitro- phenyl)-(3-m-tolyl- propyl)-amine prepared as described in the preparation of intermediate N.
8-methyl-7- propyl-10-(3- (m- tolyl)propyl) benzo[g] pteridine 2,4(3H,10H)- dione





47


embedded image


389.3
4.43
G
Prepared using the synthesis of Example 1 starting with 2-nitro- 4-propylaniline and 1- (3-bromopropyl)-3- methylbenzene
7-propyl-10- (3-(m- tolyl)propyl) benzo[g] pteridine- 2,4(3H,10H)- dione





48


embedded image


375.0
3.85
D
Prepared using the synthesis of Example 1 starting with 4-ethyl- 5-methyl-2- nitroaniline and 1- Bromo-3- phenylpropane
7-ethyl-8- methyl-10- (3- phenylpropyl) benzo[g] pteridine- 2,4(3H,10H)- dione





49


embedded image


389.0
4.05
D
Prepared using the synthesis of Example 1 starting with 4-ethyl- 5-methyl-2- nitroaniline and 1-(3- bromopropyl)-3- methylbenzene
7-ethyl-8- ethyl-10- (3-(m- tolyl)propyl) benzo[g] pteridine- 2,4(3H,10H)- dione





50


embedded image


448.2
3.68
D
Prepared using the synthesis of Example 23 and using isopropyl chloroformate
isopropyl (7- methyl-2,4- dioxo-10-(3- phenylpropyl)- 2,3,4,10- tetrahydro- benzo [g]pteridin- 8- yl)carbamate





51


embedded image


445.2
4.29
G
Prepared using the synthesis of Example 11 starting with 8- chloro-7-methyl-10- (3- phenylpropyl)benzo[g] pteridine-2,4(3H,10H)- dione and 2,2,2- trifluoroethanol
7-methyl-10- (3- phenylpropyl)- 8-(2,2,2- trifluoroeth- oxy)benzo[g] pteridine- 2,4(3H,10H)- dione





52


embedded image


421.3
3.67
G
Prepared using the synthesis of Example 11 starting with 8- chloro-7-methyl-10- (3- phenylpropyl)benzo[g] pteridine-2,4(3H,10H)- dione and 2- Methoxyethanol
8-(2- methoxyeth- oxy)-7-methyl- 10-(3- phenylpropyl) benzo[g] pteridine- 2,4(3H,10H)- dione





53


embedded image


409.2
4.51
G
Prepared using the synthesis of Example 1 starting with 2-nitro- 4-propylaniline and 1- (3-bromopropyl)-4- chlorobenzene
10-(3-(4- chlorophenyl) propyl)-7- propylbenzo [g]pteridine- 2,4(3H,10H)- dione





54


embedded image


395.2
3.81
D
Prepared using the synthesis of Example 1 starting with 4-ethyl- 2-nitroaniline and 1- (3-bromopropyl)-3- chlorobenzene
10-(3-(3- chlorophenyl) propyl)-7- ethylbenzo [g]pteridine- 2,4(3H,10H)- dione





55


embedded image


409.2
4.02
D
Prepared using the synthesis of Example 1 starting with 4-ethyl- 5-methyl-2- nitroaniline and 1-(3- bromopropyl)-4- chlorobenzene
10-(3-(4- chlorophenyl) propyl)-7- ethyl-8- methylbenzo [g]pteridine- 2,4(3H,10H)- dione





56


embedded image


405.3
3.46
D
Prepared using the synthesis of Example 1 starting with methyl 5-amino-2-methyl-4- nitrobenzoate and 1- bromo-3- phenylpropane
methyl 7- methyl-2,4- dioxo-10-(3- phenylpropyl)- 2,3,4,10- tetrahydro- benzo [g]pteridine- 8- carboxylate





57


embedded image


375.4
4.11
G
Prepared using the synthesis of Example 1 starting with 4-ethyl- 2-nitroaniline and 1- (3-bromopropyl)-3- methylbenzene
7-ethyl-10- (3-(m- tolyl)propyl) benzo[g] pteridine- 2,4(3H,10H)- dione





58


embedded image


545.0
3.63
D
Prepared using the synthesis of Example 11 starting with 8- chloro-7-methyl-10- (3-(4- chlorophenyl)propyl) benzo[g]pteridine- 2,4(3H,10H)-dione and 2-[2-(2- methoxyethoxy)ethoxy]- ethanol
10-(3-(4- chlorophenyl) propyl)-8-(2- (2-(2- methoxyeth- oxy)ethoxy) ethoxy)-7- methylbenzo [g]pteridine- 2,4(3H,10H)- dione





59


embedded image


523.0
3.38
D
Prepared using the synthesis of Example 1 starting with 4,5- dimethyl-2- nitroaniline and 1-(3- bromopropyl)-3-{2-[2- (2- methoxyethoxy)ethoxy] ethoxy}benzene
10-(3-(3-(2- (2-(2- methoxyeth- oxy)ethoxy) ethoxy)phenyl) propyl)-7,8- dimethylbenzo [g]pteridine- 2,4(3H,10H)- dione





60


embedded image


509.2
3.61
G
Prepared using the synthesis of Example 11 starting with 8- chloro-7-methyl-10- (3- phenylpropyl)benzo[g] pteridine-2,4(3H,10H)- dione and 2-[2-(2- methoxyethoxy)ethoxy]- ethanol
8-(2-(2-(2- methoxyeth- oxy)ethoxy) ethoxy)-7- methyl-10- (3- phenylpropyl) benzo[g] pteridine- 2,4(3H,10H)- dione





61


embedded image


377.2
3.16
D
Prepared using the synthesis of Example 8, starting with 10-(3- (2- methoxyphenyl)propyl)- 7,8- dimethylbenzo[g] pteridine- 2,4(3H,10H)- dione
10-(3-(2- hydroxyphen- yl)propyl)- 7,8- dimethylbenzo [g]pteridine- 2,4(3H,10H)- dione





62


embedded image


395.1
3.98
D
Prepared using the synthesis of Example 4, starting with 3,4- Dimethyl-2- nitroaniline and intermediate B
10-(3-(4- chlorophenyl) propyl)-6,7- dimethylbenzo [g]pteridine- 2,4(3H,10H)- dione





63


embedded image


395.0
3.95
D
Prepared using the synthesis of Example 1, starting with 4- Ethyl-2-nitroaniline and intermediate B
10-(3-(4- chlorophenyl) propyl)-7- ethylbenzo[g] pteridine- 2,4(3H,10H)- dione





64


embedded image


488.2
2.91
G
Prepared using the synthesis of Example 1 starting with N-(3-{4- [(2,6- Dimethylmorpholin-4- yl)methyl]phenyl}prop- yl)-4,5-dimethyl-2- nitroaniline, intermediate P
10-(3-(4- (((2S,6R)-2,6- dimethyl- morpholino) methyl) phenyl)prop- yl)-7,8- dimethylbenzo [g]pteridine- 2,4(3H,10H)- dione





65


embedded image


488.3
2.86
G
Prepared using the synthesis of Example 1 starting with N-(3-{4- [(2,6- Dimethylmorpholin-4- yl)methyl]phenyl}prop- yl)-4,5-dimethyl-2- nitroaniline, intermediate P
10-(3-(4- (((2R,6R)-2,6- dimethyl- morpholino) methyl) phenyl)prop- yl)-7,8- dimethylbenzo [g]pteridine- 2,4(3H,10H)- dione





66


embedded image


395.1
3.76
D
Prepared using the synthesis of Example 1, starting with 5,6- Dimethyl-2- nitroaniline and intermediate B
10-(3-(4- chlorophenyl) propyl)-8,9- dimethylbenzo [g]pteridine- 2,4(3H,10H)- dione





67


embedded image


391.1
3.60
D
Prepared using the synthesis of Example 1, starting with 4,5- Dimethyl-2- nitroaniline and 3-(2- methoxyphenyl)propyl bromide
10-(3-(2- methoxyphen- yl)propyl)- 7,8- dimethylbenzo [g]pteridine 2,4(3H,10H)- dione





68


embedded image


381.1
3.68
D
Prepared using the synthesis of Example 1, starting with 4- methyl-2-nitroaniline and intermediate B
10-(3-(4- chlorophenyl) propyl)-7- methylbenzo [g]pteridine- 2,4(3H,10H)- dione





69


embedded image


438.0
2.65
D
Prepared using the synthesis of Example 19 starting with 8- (bromomethyl)-10-[3- (4- chlorophenyl)propyl]- 7- methylbenzo[g]pteridine- 2,4(3H,10H)-dione and dimethylamine
10-(3-(4- chlorophenyl) propyl)-8- ((dimethyl- amino)methyl)- 7- methylbenzo [g]pteridine- 2,4(3H,10H)- dione





70


embedded image


391.3
3.52
D
Prepared using synthesis of Example 17 starting from 2- bromo-4,5- dimethylnitrobenzene and 2-methoxy-3- phenylpropan-1- amine
10-(2- methoxy-3- phenylpropyl)- 7,8- dimethylbenzo [g]pteridine- 2,4(3H,10H)- dione





71


embedded image


433.2
3.98
D
Prepared using synthesis of Example 22 starting from 4,5-dimethyl-2- nitroaniline and 2-(4- tertbutylbenzyl)oxirane
10-(3-(4- (tert- butyl)phenyl)- 2- hydroxyprop- yl)-7,8- dimethylbenzo [g]pteridine- 2,4(3H,10H)- dione





72


embedded image


413.3
3.37
D
Prepared using synthesis of Example 22 starting from 4- methyl-2-nitroaniline and 2-(2- naphthylmethyl)oxirane
10-(2- hydroxy-3- (naphthalen- 2-yl)propyl)- 7- methylbenzo [g]pteridine- 2,4(3H,10H)- dione





73


embedded image


413.2
3.38
D
Prepared using synthesis of Example 22 starting from 5-methyl-2- nitroaniline and 2-(2- naphthylmethyl)oxirane
10-(2- hydroxy-3- (naphthalen- 2-yl)propyl)- 8- methylbenzo [g]pteridine- 2,4(3H,10H)- dione





74


embedded image


397.1
3.26
D
Prepared using synthesis of Example 22 starting from 5- Methyl-2-nitroaniline and 2-(4- chlorobenzyl)oxirane
10-(3-(4- chlorophenyl)- 2- hydroxyprop- yl)-8- methylbenzo [g]pteridine- 2,4(3H,10H)- dione





75


embedded image


397.0
3.27
D
Prepared using synthesis of Example 22 starting from 4- Methyl-2-nitroaniline and 2-(4- chlorobenzyl)oxirane prepared as in intermediate H
10-(3-(4- chlorophenyl)- 2- hydroxyprop- yl)-7- methylbenzo [g]pteridine- 2,4(3H,10H)- dione





76


embedded image


411.0
3.40
D
Prepared using synthesis of Example 22 starting from 4,5- Dimethyl-2- nitroaniline and 2-(3- chlorobenzyl)oxirane
10-(3-(3- chlorophenyl)- 2- hydroxyprop- yl)-7,8- dimethylbenzo [g]pteridine- 2,4(3H,10H)- dione





77


embedded image


427.3
3.53
D
Prepared using synthesis of Example 22 starting from 4,5- dimethyl-2- nitroaniline and 2-(2- naphthylmethyl)oxirane
10-(2- hydroxy-3- (naphthalen- 2-yl)propyl)- 7,8- dimethylbenzo [g]pteridine- 2,4(3H,10H)- dione





78


embedded image


397.0
3.21
D
Prepared using synthesis of Example 22 starting from 4- Methyl-2-nitroaniline and 2-(3- chlorobenzyl)oxirane prepared as in intermediate H
10-(3-(3- chlorophenyl)- 2- hydroxyprop- yl)-7- methylbenzo [g]pteridine- 2,4(3H,10H)- dione





79


embedded image


377.0
3.16
D
Prepared using synthesis of Example 22 starting from 4- Methyl-2-nitroaniline and 2-(4- methylbenzyl)oxirane prepared as in intermediate H
10-(2- hydroxy-3-(p- tolyl)propyl)- 7- methylbenzo [g]pteridine- 2,4(3H,10H)- dione





80


embedded image


411.0
3.39
D
Prepared using synthesis of Example 22 starting from 4,5- dimethyl-2- nitroaniline and 2-(4- chlorobenzyl)oxirane
10-(3-(4- chlorophenyl)- 2- hydroxyprop- yl)-7,8- dimethylbenzo [g]pteridine- 2,4(3H,10H)- dione





81


embedded image


391.1
3.30
D
Prepared using synthesis of Example 22 starting from 4,5- dimethyl-2- nitroaniline and 2-(4- methylbenzyl)oxirane
10-(2- hydroxy-3-(p- tolyl)propyl)- 7,8- dimethylbenzo [g]pteridine- 2,4(3H,10H)- dione





82


embedded image


429.0
3.91
D
Prepared using synthesis of Example 1 starting from 4,5- dimethyl-2- nitroaniline and 1-(3- bromopropyl)-4- (trifluoromethyl)benz- ene
7,8-dimethyl- 10-(3-(4- (trifluorometh- yl)phenyl) propyl)benzo[g] pteridine- 2,4(3H,10H)- dione





83


embedded image


411.1
3.93
D
Prepared using synthesis of Example 1 starting from 4,5- dimethyl-2- nitroaniline and 2-(3- bromopropyl)naphtha- lene
7,8-dimethyl- 10-(3- (naphthalen- 2- yl)propyl)benzo [g]pteridine- 2,4(3H,10H)- dione





84


embedded image


386.0
3.28
D
Prepared using the synthesis of Example 4 starting with 4,5- Dimethyl-o- phenylenediamine and 3-(3- bromopropyl)benzo- nitrile
3-(3-(7,8- dimethyl-2,4- dioxo-3,4- dihydrobenzo [g]pteridin- 10(2H)- yl)propyl)benzo- nitrile





85


embedded image


386.0
3.28
D
Prepared using synthesis of Example 4 starting from 4,5- Dimethyl-o- phenylenediamine and 4-(3- bromopropyl)benzo- nitrile
4-(3-(7,8- dimethyl-2,4- dioxo-3,4- dihydrobenzo [g]pteridin- 10(2H)- yl)propyl)benzo- nitrile





86


embedded image


417.2
4.46
D
Prepared using synthesis of Example 4 starting from 4,5-Dimethyl-o- phenylenediamine and 1-(3-bromopropyl)-4- tert-butylbenzene which was prepared as in intermediate E, starting with 4- tertbutylbenzaldehyde
10-(3-(4- (tert- butyl)phenyl) propyl)-7,8- dimethylbenzo [g]pteridine- 2,4(3H,10H)- dione





87


embedded image


375.1
3.98
G
Prepared using synthesis of Example 4 starting from 4,5- Dimethyl-o- phenylenediamine and (3-bromo-2- methylpropyl)benzene
7,8-dimethyl- 10-(2- methyl-3- phenylpropyl) benzo[g] pteridine- 2,4(3H,10H)- dione





88


embedded image


347.2
4.19
D
Prepared using synthesis of example 1 starting with 4,5- dimethyl-2-nitro-N-(2- phenylethyl)aniline
7,8-dimethyl- 10- phenethylbenzo [g]pteridine- 2,4(3H,10H)- dione





89


embedded image


395.1
5.91
F
Prepared using synthesis of Example 9 starting from 4,5- dimethyl-2- nitroaniline and (4- bromobutyl)benzene
8-chloro-7- methyl 10- (4- phenylbutyl) benzo[g] pteridine- 2,4(3H,10H)- dione





90


embedded image


423.1
4.23
D
Prepared by the synthesis of example 1 starting from 4-ethyl- 5-methyl-2- nitroaniline and 1-(3- bromo-1- methylpropyl)-4- chlorobenzene
10-[3-(4- chlorophenyl) butyl]-7- ethyl-8- methylbenzo [g]pteridine- 2,4(3H,10H)- dione





91


embedded image


435.1
4.48
D
Prepared by the synthesis of example 1 starting from 4- cyclopentyl-2- nitroaniline and 1-(3- bromopropyl)-4- chlorobenzene
10-[3-(4- chlorophenyl) propyl]-7- cyclopentyl- benzo[g] pteridine- 2,4(3H,10H)- dione





92


embedded image


403.1
4.24
D
Prepared by the synthesis of example 1 starting from 4- isopropyl-2- nitroaniline and 1-(3- bromo-1- methylpropyl)-4- methylbenzene
7-isopropyl- 10-[3-(4- methylphenyl) butyl]benzo [g]pteridine- 2,4(3H,10H)- dione





93


embedded image


407.1
4.06
D
Prepared by the synthesis of example 1 starting from 4- isopropyl-2- nitroaniline and 1-(3- bromo-1- methylpropyl)-4- fluorobenzene
10-[3-(4- fluorophenyl) butyl]-7- isopropylbenzo [g]pteridine- 2,4(3H,10H)- dione





94


embedded image


423.1
4.33
D
Prepared by the synthesis of example 1 starting from 4- propyl-2-nitroaniline and 1-(3-bromo-1- methylpropyl)-4- chlorobenzene
10-[3-(4- chlorophenyl) butyl]-7- propylbenzo [g]pteridine- 2,4(3H,10H)- dione





95


embedded image


447.3
4.48
D
Prepared by the synthesis of example 6 starting from 4- propyl-2-nitroaniline and (3-amino-2- isopropoxypropyl) benzene
10-(2- isopropoxy- 3- phenylpropyl)- 8-methyl-7- propylbenzo [g]pteridine- 2,4(3H,10H)- dione





96


embedded image


433.1
4.71
G
Prepared by the synthesis of example 1 starting from 4- propyl-2-nitroaniline and 1-(3-Bromo-2- ethoxypropyl)-4- methylbenzene
10-[2-ethoxy- 3-(4- methylphenyl) propyl]-7- propylbenzo [g]pteridine- 2,4(3H,10H)- dione





97


embedded image


467.1
4.65
D
Prepared by the synthesis of example 1 starting from 4- isopropyl-2- nitroaniline and 1-(3- bromo-2- propoxypropyl)-4- chlorobenzene
10-[3-(4- chlorophenyl)- 2- propoxypropyl]- 7- isopropylbenzo [g]pteridine- 2,4(3H,10H)- dione





98


embedded image


453.0
4.73
G
Prepared by the synthesis of example 6 starting from 1- bromo-4-isopropyl-2- nitro-benzene and 3- (4-chlorophenyl)-2- ethoxypropan-1- amine
10-[3-(4- chlorophenyl)- 2- ethoxypropyl]- 7- isopropylbenzo [g]pteridine- 2,4(3H,10H)- dione





99


embedded image


437.1
4.51
D
Prepared by the synthesis of example 1 starting from 4-ethyl- 5-methyl-2- nitroaniline and 1-(3- bromo-1- methylpropyl)-4- chlorobenzene
10-[3-(4- chlorophenyl) butyl]-8- methyl-7- propylbenzo [g]pteridine- 2,4(3H,10H)- dione





100


embedded image


407.1
4.11
D
Prepared by the synthesis of example 1 starting from 4-sec- butyl-2-nitroaniline and 1-(3- bromopropyl)-4- fluorobenzene
7-sec-butyl- 10-[3-(4- fluorophenyl) propyl]benzo [g]pteridine- 2,4(3H,10H)- dione





101


embedded image


433.1
4.67
G
Prepared by the synthesis of example 1 starting from 4- isopropyl-2- nitroaniline and 1-(3- Bromo-2- ethoxypropyl)-4- methylbenzene
10-[2-ethoxy- 3-(4- methylphenyl) propyl]-7- isopropylbenzo [g]pteridine- 2,4(3H,10H)- dione





102


embedded image


403.1
4.26
D
Prepared by the synthesis of example 1 starting from 4- isopropyl-2- nitroaniline and 1-(3- bromopropyl)-2- ethylbenzene
10-[3-(2- ethylphenyl) propyl]-7- isopropylbenzo [g]pteridine- 2,4(3H,10H)- dione





103


embedded image


437.2
4.88
G
Prepared by the synthesis of example 1 starting from 4- isopropyl-2- nitroaniline and 1-(3- bromo-1-ethyl- propyl)-4-chloro- benzene
10-[3-(4- chlorophenyl) pentyl]-7- isopropylbenzo [g]pteridine- 2,4(3H,10H)- dione





104


embedded image


423.1
4.29
D
Prepared by the synthesis of example 1 starting from 4- isopropyl-2- nitroaniline and 1- [(1S)-3-bromo-1- methylpropyl]-4- chlorobenzene
10-[(3S)-3-(4- chlorophenyl) butyl]-7- isopropylbenzo [g]pteridine- 2,4(3H,10H)- dione





105


embedded image


423.0
4.29
D
Prepared by the synthesis of example 1 starting from 4- isopropyl-2- nitroaniline and 1- [(1R)-3-bromo-1- methylpropyl]-4- chlorobenzene
10-[(3R)-3-(4- chlorophenyl) butyl]-7- isopropylbenzo [g]pteridine- 2,4(3H,10H)- dione





106


embedded image


407.1
4.08
D
Prepared by the synthesis of example 1 starting from 4- propyl-2-nitroaniline and 1-(3-bromo-1- methylpropyl)-4- fluorobenzene
10-[3-(4- fluorophenyl) butyl]-7- propylbenzo [g]pteridine- 2,4(3H,10H)- dione








Claims
  • 1. A compound of Formula P:
  • 2. The compound according to claim 1, wherein said compound is a compound of formula Q
  • 3. The compound according to claim 1 or 2, wherein said compound is a compound of Formula I:
  • 4. The compound according to any one of claims 1-3, wherein: Alk is C2-3alkylene (e.g., ethylene, i.e., CH2CH2—, n-propylene, i.e., —CH2CH2CH2—) optionally substituted with one or more C1-4alkyl (e.g., methyl, ethyl or isobutyl); orAlk is C2-3alkylene (e.g., ethylene, i.e., CH2CH2— or n-propylene, i.e., —CH2CH2CH2—) optionally substituted with one C1-4alkoxy (e.g., ethoxy or isopropyloxy) group;X is a single bond, —S— or —O—;A is aryl (e.g., phenyl), wherein the aryl group is optionally substituted with one or more C1-4alkyl (e.g., methyl),halo (e.g., Cl, F),R1 is: C1-6alkyl, e.g., C1-4alkyl (for example, methyl, ethyl, n-propyl, isopropyl, isobutyl, t-butyl, 1-methylpropyl),C3-8cycloalkyl (e.g., cyclopentyl),R2 is: H,C1-6alkyl, e.g., C1-4alkyl (for example, methyl, ethyl, n-propyl or isopropyl),—C0-4alkyl-C3-8cycloalkyl (e.g., cyclopropyl),
  • 5. The compound according to any one of claims 1-4, wherein: Alk is C3alkylene (e.g., n-propylene, i.e., —CH2CH2CH2—) optionally substituted with one or more C1-4alkyl (e.g., methyl or ethyl); orAlk is C3alkylene (e.g., n-propylene, i.e., —CH2CH2CH2—) optionally substituted with one C1-4alkoxy (e.g., ethoxy or isopropyloxy) group;X is a single bond;A is aryl (e.g., phenyl), wherein the aryl group is optionally substituted with one or more C1-4alkyl (e.g., methyl),halo (e.g., Cl, F),R1 is: C1-6alkyl, e.g., C1-4alkyl (for example, methyl, ethyl, n-propyl, isopropyl or 1-methylpropyl),C3-8cycloalkyl (e.g., cyclopentyl),R2 is: H,C1-6alkyl, e.g., C1-4alkyl (for example, methyl, ethyl, n-propyl or isopropyl),—C0-4alkyl-C3-8cycloalkyl (e.g., cyclopropyl),
  • 6. The compound according to any one of claims 1-5, wherein: Alk is —CH2CH2CH2—;X is a single bond;A is aryl (e.g., phenyl);R1 is C1-6alkyl, e.g., C1-4alkyl (for example, methyl),R2 is C1-6alkyl, e.g., C1-4alkyl (for example, methyl),R3 and R4 are H;
  • 7. The compound according to any one of claims 1-6 selected from any of following:
  • 8. The compound according to any one of claims 1-7 selected from any of following:
  • 9. The compound according to any one of claims 1-8 selected from any of following: in free or salt form.
  • 10. A pharmaceutical composition comprising a compound of Formula P:
  • 11. The pharmaceutical composition according to claim 10, wherein said compound is a compound of Formula Q:
  • 12. The pharmaceutical composition according to claim 10 or 11, wherein said compound is a compound of Formula I:
  • 13. The pharmaceutical composition according to any one of claims 10-12, wherein: Alk is C2-3alkylene (e.g., ethylene, i.e., CH2CH2—, n-propylene, i.e., —CH2CH2CH2—) optionally substituted with one or more C1-4alkyl (e.g., methyl, ethyl or isobutyl); orAlk is C2-3alkylene (e.g., ethylene, i.e., CH2CH2— or n-propylene, i.e., —CH2CH2CH2—) optionally substituted with one C1-4alkoxy (e.g., ethoxy or isopropyloxy) group;X is a single bond, —S— or —O—;A is aryl (e.g., phenyl), wherein the aryl group is optionally substituted with one or more C1-4alkyl (e.g., methyl),halo (e.g., Cl, F),R1 is: C1-6alkyl, e.g., C1-4alkyl (for example, methyl, ethyl, n-propyl, isopropyl, isobutyl, t-butyl, 1-methylpropyl),C3-8cycloalkyl (e.g., cyclopentyl),R2 is: H,C1-6alkyl, e.g., C1-4alkyl (for example, methyl, ethyl, n-propyl or isopropyl),—C0-4alkyl-C3-8cycloalkyl (e.g., cyclopropyl),
  • 14. The pharmaceutical composition according to any one of claims 10-13, wherein: Alk is C3alkylene (e.g., n-propylene, i.e., —CH2CH2CH2—) optionally substituted with one or more C1-4alkyl (e.g., methyl or ethyl); orAlk is C3alkylene (e.g., n-propylene, i.e., —CH2CH2CH2—) optionally substituted with one C1-4alkoxy (e.g., ethoxy or isopropyloxy) group;X is a single bond;A is aryl (e.g., phenyl), wherein the aryl group is optionally substituted with one or more C1-4alkyl (e.g., methyl),halo (e.g., Cl, F),R1 is: C1-6alkyl, e.g., C1-4alkyl (for example, methyl, ethyl, n-propyl, isopropyl or 1-methylpropyl),C3-8cycloalkyl (e.g., cyclopentyl),R2 is: H,C1-6alkyl, e.g., C1-4alkyl (for example, methyl, ethyl, n-propyl or isopropyl),—C0-4alkyl-C3-8cycloalkyl (e.g., cyclopropyl),
  • 15. The pharmaceutical composition according to any one of claims 10-14, wherein: Alk is —CH2CH2CH2—;X is a single bond;A is aryl (e.g., phenyl);R1 is C1-6alkyl, e.g., C1-4alkyl (for example, methyl),R2 is C1-6alkyl, e.g., C1-4alkyl (for example, methyl),R3 and R4 are H
  • 16. The pharmaceutical composition according to any one of claims 10-15, wherein said compound is selected from any of the following:
  • 17. The pharmaceutical composition according to any one of claims 10-16, wherein said compound is selected from any of the following
  • 18. The pharmaceutical composition according to any one of claims 10-17, wherein said compound is selected from any of the following
  • 19. A method for the treatment or prophylaxis of a bacterial infection comprising administering to a patient in need of such treatment an effective amount of a compound according to any one of claims 10-18.
  • 20. The method according to any one of claim 19, wherein the infection is a Gram-positive or Gram-negative bacterial infection.
  • 21. The method according to any one of claims 19-20, wherein the bacterial infection is selected from a group consisting of Clostridium difficile, Staphylococcus epidermidis, Staphylococcus aureus, Streptococcus pneumoniae, Pseudomonas aeruginosa, Acinetobacter baumannii, Escherichia coli, Haemophilus influenzae, Enterococcus faecalis, Streptococcus pyogenes, Listeria monocytogenes, Salmonella enterica, Vibrio cholerae, Brucella melitensis, Bacillus anthracis, Francisella tularensis, Moraxella catarrhalis, Klebsiella pneumoniae, Yersinia pestis, Streptococcus viridans, Enterococcus faecium, and Borrelia burgdorferi.
  • 22. The method according to any one of claims 19-21, wherein the bacterial infection is a C. difficile infection.
  • 23. The method according to claim 22, wherein the compound is selected from any of the following:
  • 24. The method according to any one of claims 19-21, wherein the bacterial infection is a Staphylococcus aureus infection.
  • 25. The method according to claim 24, wherein the compound is selected from any of the following:
  • 26. The method according to claim 23 or 25, wherein said infection is by an infectious agent which is resistant to a drug that is not a riboswitch ligand.
  • 27. The method according to claim 25, wherein the infection is an infection which is resistant to one or more drugs selected from a group consisting of a penicillin, vancomycin, cephalosporin and methicillin.
  • 28. The method according to claim 27, wherein the infection is a methicillin-resistant Staphylococcus aureus infection.
  • 29. The method according to claim 23 or 25, wherein the infection is an infection which is resistant to fluoroquinolone (e.g., ciprofloxacin- and/or levofloxacin-resistant infection), metronidazole and/or vancomycin.
  • 30. The method according to any one of claims 19-29, wherein such method is effective for the treatment or prophylaxis of a disease, condition or infection selected from a group consisting of anthrax, staphylococcal scalded skin syndrome (staph infections), pneumonia, impetigo, boils, cellulitis, folliculitis, furuncles, carbuncles, scalded skin syndrome, abscesses, meningitis, osteomyelitis endocarditis, Toxic Shock Syndrome (TSS), septicemia, acute sinusitis, otitis media, septic arthritis, endocarditis, peritonitis, pericarditis, brain abscess, tularemia, urinary tract infection, empyema, food poisoning, diarrhea, conjunctivitis and clostridium difficile associated disease (CDAD).
  • 31. Use of a compound according to any one of claims 10-18, in the manufacture of a medicament for the treatment or prophylaxis of a bacterial infection as described in any one of claims 19-30.
  • 32. A method for the treatment or prophylaxis of a bacterial infection in a plant comprising administering to said plant an effective amount of a compound of any one of claims 10-18.
  • 33. A pharmaceutical composition according to any one of claims 10-18 for use in the manufacture of a medicament for the treatment or prophylaxis of a bacterial infection as described in any one of claims 19-30.
  • 34. A compound of Formula II″:
  • 35. The compound according to claim 34, wherein said compound is a compound of Formula II:
  • 36. The compound according to claim 34 or 35, wherein X is a single bond, wherein said compound is a compound of Formula II′:
  • 37. A pharmaceutical composition comprising a compound according to claim 34, 35 or 36, in free or pharmaceutically acceptable salt form, in admixture with a pharmaceutically acceptable diluent or carrier.
  • 38. A method for the treatment or prophylaxis of a bacterial infection comprising administering to a patient in need of such treatment an effective amount of a compound according to claim 34, 35 or 36, in free or pharmaceutically acceptable salt form.
  • 39. The method according to claim 38, wherein the infection is a Gram-positive or Gram-negative bacterial infection.
  • 40. The method according to any one of claims 38-39, wherein the bacterial infection is selected from a group consisting of Clostridium difficile, Staphylococcus epidermidis, Staphylococcus aureus, Streptococcus pneumoniae, Pseudomonas aeruginosa, Acinetobacter baumannii, Escherichia coli, Haemophilus influenzae, Enterococcus faecalis, Streptococcus pyogenes, Listeria monocytogenes, Salmonella enterica, Vibrio cholerae, Brucella melitensis, Bacillus anthracis, Francisella tularensis, Moraxella catarrhalis, Klebsiella pneumoniae, Yersinia pestis, Streptococcus viridans, Enterococcus faecium, and Borrelia burgdorferi.
  • 41. The method according to any one of claim 40, wherein the bacterial infection is a C. difficile infection.
  • 42. The method according to any one of claims 38-41, wherein said infection is by an infectious agent which is resistant to a drug that is not a riboswitch ligand.
  • 43. The method according to claim 42, wherein the infection is an infection which is resistant to fluoroquinolone (e.g., ciprofloxacin- and/or levofloxacin-resistant infection), metronidazole and/or vancomycin.
  • 44. The method according to any one of claims 38-43, wherein such method is effective for the treatment or prophylaxis of a disease, condition or infection selected from a group consisting of anthrax, staphylococcal scalded skin syndrome (staph infections), pneumonia, impetigo, boils, cellulitis, folliculitis, furuncles, carbuncles, scalded skin syndrome, abscesses, meningitis, osteomyelitis endocarditis, Toxic Shock Syndrome (TSS), septicemia, acute sinusitis, otitis media, septic arthritis, endocarditis, peritonitis, pericarditis, brain abscess, tularemia, urinary tract infection, empyema, food poisoning, diarrhea, conjunctivitis and clostridium difficile associated disease (CDAD).
  • 45. Use of a compound according to claim 34, 35 or 36 in free or pharmaceutically acceptable salt form, in the manufacture of a medicament for the treatment or prophylaxis of a bacterial infection.
  • 46. Use according to claim 45, wherein the bacterial infection is selected from a group consisting of Clostridium difficile, Staphylococcus epidermidis, Staphylococcus aureus, Streptococcus pneumoniae, Pseudomonas aeruginosa, Acinetobacter baumannii, Escherichia coli, Haemophilus influenzae, Enterococcus faecalis, Streptococcus pyogenes, Listeria monocytogenes, Salmonella enterica, Vibrio cholerae, Brucella melitensis, Bacillus anthracis, Francisella tularensis, Moraxella catarrhalis, Klebsiella pneumoniae, Yersinia pestis, Streptococcus viridans, Enterococcus faecium, and Borrelia burgdorferi.
  • 47. Use of a compound according to claim 34, 35 or 36 in free or pharmaceutically acceptable salt form, in the manufacture of a medicament for the treatment of a disease, condition or infection selected from a group consisting of anthrax, staphylococcal scalded skin syndrome (staph infections), pneumonia, impetigo, boils, cellulitis, folliculitis, furuncles, carbuncles, scalded skin syndrome, abscesses, meningitis, osteomyelitis endocarditis, Toxic Shock Syndrome (TSS), septicemia, acute sinusitis, otitis media, septic arthritis, endocarditis, peritonitis, pericarditis, brain abscess, tularemia, urinary tract infection, empyema, food poisoning, diarrhea, conjunctivitis and clostridium difficile associated disease (CDAD).
  • 48. A method for the treatment or prophylaxis of a bacterial infection in a plant comprising administering to said plant an effective amount of a compound according to claim 34, 35 or 36 in free or salt form.
  • 49. A pharmaceutical composition according to claim 37 for use in the manufacture of a medicament for the treatment or prophylaxis of a bacterial infection.
  • 50. The pharmaceutical composition according to claim 49, wherein the bacterial infection is selected from a group consisting of Clostridium difficile, Staphylococcus epidermidis, Staphylococcus aureus, Streptococcus pneumoniae, Pseudomonas aeruginosa, Acinetobacter baumannii, Escherichia coli, Haemophilus influenzae, Enterococcus faecalis, Streptococcus pyogenes, Listeria monocytogenes, Salmonella enterica, Vibrio cholerae, Brucella melitensis, Bacillus anthracis, Francisella tularensis, Moraxella catarrhalis, Klebsiella pneumoniae, Yersinia pestis, Streptococcus viridans, Enterococcus faecium, and Borrelia burgdorferi.
PCT Information
Filing Document Filing Date Country Kind 371c Date
PCT/US11/00617 4/6/2011 WO 00 10/9/2012
Provisional Applications (2)
Number Date Country
61321347 Apr 2010 US
61441160 Feb 2011 US